CMA9000 Manual

INSTALLATION/
FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
CMA-9000
H/W 100-601951-VAR
S/W 169-614876-010
CMC Electronics Inc.

600 DR. FREDERIK PHILIPS BOULEVARD
VILLE ST-LAURENT, QUEBEC, CANADA H4M 2S9
TEL: (514) 748-3148, FAX: (514) 748-3100
INSTALLATION/
FLIGHT LINE MANUAL
CMA-9000
H/W 100-601951-VAR
S/W 169-614876-010

VILLE ST-LAURENT, QUEBEC, CANADA H4M 2S9
TEL: (514) 748-3148, TELEX: 05-827822, FAX: (514) 748-3100
Publication No. 9000-GEN-0840

Item No. 929-600026-000
34-61-14
May 10, 2007
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
WE VALUE YOUR COMMENTS

PLEASE EVALUATE OUR PUBLICATION
AND LET US KNOW
Although we constantly strive for accuracy and clarity, we may make errors on
occasion. If we do, we would appreciate your comments to improve this manual.
Please use the following Customer Comments form or e-mail us at
HelpLine@cmcelectronics.ca to inform us of any correction or send us a marked-up
copy of this publication. We will acknowledge your comments and notify you of any
intended action.
Your assistance in improving this manual is sincerely appreciated.
CUSTOMER COMMENTS
PUBLICATION TITLE:
PUBLICATION NUMBER:
ITEM NUMBER:
DATE OF ISSUE:
REVISION DATE:
COMMENTS:
PAGE
NO.
PARAGRAPH
LINE
NO.
FIGURE
NO.
NAME:
POSITION:
TELEPHONE:
E-MAIL ADDRESS:
COMPANY'S NAME & ADDRESS:
TABLE
NO.
CHANGE AND REASON
From:______________________________
PLACE
POSTAGE
HERE

CUSTOMER SUPPORT
VILLE ST. LAURENT, QUEBEC,
CANADA H4M 2S9
FOLD BACK
.......................................................................................................................................
INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

CMA-9000 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

NOTE
The portion of the text affected by the latest change is indicated by a vertical line in the
margin of the page. Changes to illustrations are indicated by miniature pointing hands or
black vertical lines.
Original................... 0.................... May 10, 2007
THE TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 400
CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
Title
T-1
T-2
May 10/07
Blank
List of Effective Pages
LEP-1
LEP-2
LEP-3
LEP-4
LEP-5
LEP-6
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
Record of Revisions
RR-1
RR-2
May 10/07
Blank
Service Bulletin List
SB-1
SB-2
May 10/07
Blank
Electrostatic Discharge
ED-1
ED-2
May 10/07
Blank
Abbreviations
INTRO-1
INTRO-2
INTRO-3
INTRO-4
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
Table of Contents
TC-1
TC-2
TC-3
TC-4
TC-5
TC-6
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Description and Operation 1

2
3
4
SUBJECT
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
34-61-14
PAGE
DATE
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Page LEP-1
May 10, 2007


SUBJECT
PAGE
Description and Operation 40

(contd)
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
DATE
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Installation
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
Post-Installation Test
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
34-61-14
Page LEP-2
May 10, 2007


SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
Post-Installation Test
(cont'd)
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Flight Line Test/

Troubleshooting
SUBJECT
PAGE
DATE
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
Maintenance Practices
401
402
May 10/07
Blank
Servicing
501
502
May 10/07
Blank
Removal/Installation
601
602
May 10/07
May 10/07
Cleaning/Painting
701
702
May 10/07
Blank
Approved Repairs
801
802
May 10/07
Blank
Configuration Selection
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
34-61-14
Page LEP-3
May 10, 2007


SUBJECT
(cont'd)
PAGE
DATE
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
SUBJECT
Data Loader Unit (DLU)
34-61-14
PAGE
DATE
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
Page LEP-4
May 10, 2007


SUBJECT
Appendix A
Appendix B
PAGE
DATE
T-A1
T-A2
TC-A1
TC-A2
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
A-21
A-22
A-23
A-24
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
T-B1
T-B2
TC-B1
TC-B2
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
B-10
B-11
B-12
B-13
B-14
B-15
B-16
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
SUBJECT
Appendix C
34-61-14
PAGE
DATE
B-17
B-18
B-19
B-20
B-21
B-22
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Blank
T-C1
T-C2
TC-C1
TC-C2
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-8
C-9
C-10
C-11
C-12
C-13
C-14
C-15
C-16
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
Blank
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
May 10/07
Page LEP-5
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page LEP-6
May 10, 2007

RECORD OF REVISIONS
ASSIGNED TO (JOB TITLE)
REV.
NO.
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE
On receipt of revisions, insert pages and record

date inserted and initial.
LOCATION
BY
REV.
NO.
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE
34-61-14
BY
Page RR-1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page RR-2
May 10, 2007

SERVICE BULLETIN LIST

SERVICE
BULLETIN
NO.
SUBJECT
MANUAL
REVISION
NUMBER
34-61-14
MANUAL
REVISION
DATE
Page SB-1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page SB-2
May 10, 2007

FORWARD
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Modules containing components sensitive to ESD are identified on the module by a label bearing the
following marking.
"CAUTION-THIS EQUIPMENT CONTA I N S PA R T S S E N S I T I V E T O

D A M A G E B Y E L E C T R O S TAT I C
DISCHARGE (ESD). USE ESD
PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES
WHEN TOUCHING, REMOVING, OR
INSERTING PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES."
When these modules have to be replaced and returned for service the following precautions should be
observed:
1. Handle the modules as little as possible. Do not touch the leads, pin or tracks while handling.
2. Keep spare modules in the ESD protective packing until ready for use.
3. Discharge static before handling modules (removal or replacement) by touching a grounded metallic
surface such as rack or cabinet hardware. Use of wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor
is preferred when handling modules. (This ground should be the same as the equipment ground).
4. Do not slide static-sensitive modules over any surface.
5. Clothing must not come in contact with components or assemblies. Short sleeves are preferred; if long
sleeves are worn then should be rolled up.
6. Package parts properly for storage or transportation. Modules which are removed from the equipment
should be placed into ESD protective packing immediately. Do not place any paper, card or other plastic
inside the ESD protective packing.
7. When packing these modules for storage or transportation, keep them in the bag. Fold over and seal the
mouth of the bag to keep out any static generating packing material (eg, foamed polystyrene). Pack
around the bag firmly to prevent motion which could generate static.
WARRANTY
In the case of any ESD sensitive module bearing the marking described above which is received by CMC not
in ESD protective packing, other than the initially reported fault, all warranty, present or future, is voided for
failure related to ESD sensitive components.
34-61-14
Page ED-1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page ED-2
May 10, 2007

LIST OF STANDARD AND NONSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

AAIM
ACCUR
ACMS
ACT
ADC
ADF
AFCS
AFM
AGL
AHCAS
AHRS
ALT
AMLCD
AMU
ANP
ANS
APIRS
APPR
APU
ARINC
ARR
ATC
ATP
AWG
Aircraft Autonomous Integrity

Monitoring
Alternative Current
Aircraft
Aircraft Communications
Addressing and Reporting
System
Accuracy
Aircraft Condition Monitoring
System
Active
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Automatic Flight Control System
Aircraft Flight Manual
Above Ground Level
Advanced Helicopter Cocpkpit
Avionics System
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
Altitude
Active Matrix Liquid Crystal
Display
Audio Management Unit
Actual Navigation Performance
Answer (HCS text message)
Aircraft Piloting Inertial Reference
System
Approach
Auxiliary Power Unit
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Arrival
Air Traffic Control
Acceptance Test Procedure
American Wire Gauge
AC
A/C
ACARS
BCD
BIT
BITE
BNR
BRT
BUF
Binary Coded Decimal

Built-In-Test
Built-In-Test Equipment
BiNaRy
Brightness
Buffer
CDU
CFG
CHAR
CHN/CHAN CLR
CMC
COMM
COORD
-
Control Display Unit

Configuration
Character
Channel
Clear
Communication
Coordinate
CP
CPU
CRC
CRP
Control Panel
Central Processor Unit
Cyclic Redundant Check
Centrale Reference Primaire
DA
dB
DBASE
DC
DEGR
DEP
DIG
DISC
DITS
DLU
DMAP
DME
DOP
DR
DTK
DTW
DTO
DVS
Drift Angle
deciBel
Database
Direct Current
Degradation
Departure
Digital
Discrete
Digital Information Transfer
System
Data Loader Unit
Digital Map
Distance Measurement
Equipment
Discrete Output
Dead Reckoning
Desired Track
Distance To Waypoint
Direct-To
Doppler Velocity Sensor
EADI
ECD
EFIS
EGI
EHSI
EICAS
EIS
EMI
EOT
ELT
ERR
ESD
ETA
EQP
EXEC
Electronics Atttiude Display

Indicator
Eurocopter Deutschland
Electronic Flight Instrumentation
System
Embedded GPS/INS
Electronic Horizontal Situation
Indicator
Engine Instrument Crew Alerting
System
Electrical Instrument System
ElectroMagnetic Integration
End Of Transmission
Emergency Locator Transmitter
Error
Electro Static Discharge
Estimated Time of Arrival
Equipment
Execute
FAA
FAF
FC
FLT
Federal Aviation Authority

Final Approach Fix
Fuel Computer
Flight
34-61-14
Page INTRO-1
May 10, 2007

LIST OF STANDARD AND NONSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS (contd)

FMC
FMS
FPU
FREQ
FTE
Flight Management Computer

Flight Management System
Floating Point unit
Frequency
Fliht Technical Error
GAMA
GDOP
GMT
GND
GNSSU
GPP
GPS
GPU
G/S
GS
GSM
General Aviation Manufucturers

Association
Geometric Dilution of Precision
Greenwich Mean Time
Ground
Global Navigation System Sensor
Unit
Gessellschaft Fur Prozessrechner
Programmierung mbH ( German
company that makes HCS)
Global Positioning System
Ground Power unit
Ground Speed
Glide Slope
Global System for Mobile
Telecommunication
HCS
HDG
HDOP
HF
HFOM
HIL
HSI
H/W
Helicopter Communication
System
Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
High Frequency
Horizontal Figure Of Merit
Horizontal Integration Limit
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Hardware
IDT
I/F
IFDS
IFR
I/O
I/P
ILS
INIT
INS
INT
IRS
Ident
Interface
Integrated Flight Display System
Instrument Flight Regulations
Input/Output
Input
Instrument Landing System
Initial
Inertial Navigation System
Integrity
Inertial Reference Sensor
JAA
Joint Aeronautical Authority
KG
KT(s)
Kilograms
Knot(s)
L
LAT
LB
LCD
LEGCHG
LNAV
LONG
LRU
LSK
LSW
Left
Latitude
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Leg Change
Lateral Navigation
Longitude
Line Replaceable Unit
Line Select Key
Least Significant Word
MAG
MCDU
MLS
MOD
MSL
MSW
MSG
MTBF
Magnetic
Multipurpose Control Display Unit
Microwave Landing System
Modified
Mean Sea Level
Mist Signficant Word
Message
Mean Time Between Failure
N/A
NAS
NAV
NMI
NMS
NPA
NVG
Not Applicable
National Air Space
NAVigation
Nautical Miles
Navigation Management System
Non-Precision Approach
Night Vision Goggle
OEI
OFST
OP
O/P
One Engine Inoperative

Offset
Operational
Output
PDL
PDP
PFD
PG
PLS
P/N
POF
POS
PREDEF
PREV
PROG
PROM
Portable Data Loader

Packet Data Protocol
Primary Field Display
Page
Personnel Locator System
Part Number
Phase Of Flight
Position
Predefined
Previous
Progress
Programmable Read Only
Memory
QTY
Quantity
34-61-14
Page INTRO-2
May 10, 2007

LIST OF STANDARD AND NONSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS (contd)

R
RAIM
REC
REF
REPE
RF
RMS
RNP
RTCA
RTE
RTN
RX
Right
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Recorder
Reference
Repeater
Radio Frequency
Radio Management System
Required Navigation Performance
Radio Technical Commission for
Aeronautics
Route
Return
Receive
SDI
SMC
SP
SQK
SSM
STBY
Source Data Information

System Management Computer
Space
Squawk
Sign/Status Matrix
Standby
TACAN
TAS
TAWS
TCAS
TCN
TDN
TK
TKE
TOGA
TRK
TSO
TX
TX1
TX2
TACtical Air Navigation system

True Air Speed
Terrain Awareness and Warning
Systems
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance
System
TACAN
Transition DowN
Track
Track Angle Error
Take Off Go Around
Track
Technical Standard Order
Transmit
V/UHF radio #1 transmitting
V/UHF radio #2 transmitting
UHF
UTC
UTM
Ultra High Frequency

Universal Time Coordinate
Universal Transverse Mercator
VAR
VDOP
VER
VFR
VHF
VOR
VSI
VUHF
WOW
WPT
WXR
Weight On Wheel
Waypoint
Weather Radar System
XMIT
XPDR
XTK
Transmit
ATC Transponder
Cross Track
Variation
Vertical Dilution of Precision
Vertical
Visual Flight Regulations
Very High Frequency
VHF Omni-directional Radio range
Vertical Situation Indicator
Very & Ultra High Frequency
34-61-14
Page INTRO-3
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page INTRO-4
May 10, 2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
Page
SECTION I DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ............................................................................................... 1

1. GENERAL........................................................................................................................ 1
A. Purpose of Manual................................................................................................... 1
B. Function of Equipment............................................................................................. 1
C. Reliability and Maintainability................................................................................... 1
D. External Interface Capabilities ................................................................................. 2
E. Description of the Primary Modes of Navigation ..................................................... 4
F. Annunciators and Keys............................................................................................ 7
G. Related Publications .............................................................................................. 18
H. Equipment Identification ........................................................................................ 19
2. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 21
3. DIGITAL EQUIPMENT................................................................................................... 33
A. Aircraft Condition Monitoring System (ACMS) ...................................................... 34
B. Air Data Computer (ARINC 429) ........................................................................... 35
C. Air Data Computer (ARINC 575) ........................................................................... 36
D. Attitude and Heading Reference System (ARINC 429)......................................... 36
E. Automatic Flight Control System ........................................................................... 37
F. Checker (ARINC 429)............................................................................................ 38
G. Collins DME-442/DME-4000 Distance Measuring Equipment Receiver (ARINC
429)........................................................................................................................ 38
H. Collins 700 Distance Measuring Equipment Receiver (ARINC 429)..................... 39
I.
Chelton DM-441B Distance Measuring Equipment Receiver (ARINC .................. 40
J. ARINC 615 Data Loader Unit (ARINC 429)........................................................... 40
K. GAMA EFIS Interface Description ......................................................................... 40
L. IFDS and AHCAS/AHCAS2 EFIS Interface Description ....................................... 50
M. ARINC 702 EFIS Interface Description ................................................................. 54
N. Fuel Computer ....................................................................................................... 62
O. GPS Sensor ........................................................................................................... 62
P. Flight Recorder ...................................................................................................... 67
Q. Repeater ................................................................................................................ 67
R. System Management Computer............................................................................ 68
S. Chelton VN-411B, Collins VIR-432, Collins NAV-4500 NAV (VOR/ILS) RECEIVER
(ARINC 429) .......................................................................................................... 68
T. VOR RECEIVER (ARINC 579) .............................................................................. 69
U. X-FMS for cross-talk (ARINC 429) ....................................................................... 69
V. Emergency Locator Transmitter ARTEX ELT-110-406HM/GPS (ARINC 429) ..... 70
W. Bendix King MST67A ATC Transponder (ARINC 429) ......................................... 70
X. Collins TDR 94D ATC Transponder (ARINC 429)................................................ 71
Y. Chelton VC-401B VHF COM radio (ARINC 429) ................................................ 72
Z. Chelton VC-401C VHF Comm (ARINC 429) ......................................................... 72
AA. Chelton ADF-431B, Collins ADF-462 ADF (ARINC 429) ...................................... 73
BB. Marconi Selenia SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio (ARINC 429).................................... 73
CC. TEAM Audio Management Unit AMU (ARINC 429) .............................................. 74
DD. Aircraft Piloting Inertial Reference System (APIRS SFIM) .................................... 75
EE. Digital Map System................................................................................................ 75
FF. Data Concentrator ................................................................................................. 77
34-61-14
Page TC-1
May 10, 2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)

Section
Title
Page
GG.
HH.
II.
JJ.
KK.
LL.
MM.
NN.
OO.
Radio Altimeter (ARINC 429)................................................................................. 78

LN-100GT Embedded GPS/INS Sensor (ARINC 429).......................................... 78
SIGMA50H Embedded GPS/INS Sensor (ARINC 429) ........................................ 80
Weather Radar (ARINC 429)................................................................................. 82
Doppler Velocity Sensor DVS (ARINC 429) .......................................................... 82
Personnel Locator System (ARINC 429).............................................................. 83
Thomson NC-12B TACAN (ARINC 429) ............................................................... 84
Data Loader unit Targa (RS-422) .......................................................................... 84
Helicopter Communication System (HCS) Software Protocol (RS-422) Future
Growth ................................................................................................................... 85
PP. Radio Interface Box (RIB) equipment (RS-422) Future Growth ............................ 88
QQ. Inertial Reference System (ARINC 429)................................................................ 89
SECTION II INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................ 101
1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 101
2. EQUIPMENT LOCATION ............................................................................................ 101
A. General ................................................................................................................ 101
B. Location of the FMS............................................................................................. 101
C. Selection and location of the GPS receiver and related GPS Antenna............... 101
D. Active Antenna Installations (CMA-3012 and CMA-3024) .................................. 103
3. INTERWIRING AND OUTLINE DRAWING ................................................................. 105
4. HARNESS VOLTAGE CHECKOUT ............................................................................ 117
5. EGI INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 117
6. DOPPLER INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 118
7. ANNUNCIATOR INSTALLATION................................................................................ 119
SECTION III POST-INSTALLATION TEST ................................................................................................. 201
1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 201
2. CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................. 201
3. SYSTEM TEST PREPARATION ................................................................................. 201
A. Built-In Test.......................................................................................................... 201
B. Front panel brightness control ............................................................................. 203
C. Configuration Selection........................................................................................ 204
D. Navigation Database Loading.............................................................................. 204
4. PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................. 205
A. Power On ............................................................................................................. 205
B. Annunciator Test and RADIO Page..................................................................... 205
C. Heading Input Verification.................................................................................... 208
D. True Airspeed Verification ................................................................................... 209
E. GPS Sensor Unit ................................................................................................. 210
F. DME Status.......................................................................................................... 215
G. VOR/DME/TCN Status ........................................................................................ 216
H. Radio Test............................................................................................................ 217
I.
Discrete Output Test............................................................................................ 217
J. EFIS Interface Test.............................................................................................. 218
K. Electromagnetic Compatibility Test ..................................................................... 221
L. IRS to FMS to IRS Ground Check....................................................................... 225
34-61-14
Page TC-2
May 10, 2007


Section
Title
Page
SECTION IV FLIGHT LINE TEST/TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................... 301

1.
2.
3.
4.
GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 301
ALERT MESSAGES .................................................................................................... 301
TROUBLESHOOTING PHILOSOPHY ........................................................................ 301
FAULT LOG ................................................................................................................. 302
A. SYSTEM ALERT MESSAGES ............................................................................ 302
B. MAINTENANCE ALERT MESSAGES................................................................. 312
C. MAINTENANCE ADVISORY MESSAGES.......................................................... 314
D. STATUS ADVISORY MESSAGES...................................................................... 321
SECTION V MAINTENANCE PRACTICES ................................................................................................. 401

1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 401
SECTION VI SERVICING ............................................................................................................................. 501
1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 501
SECTION VII REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 601
1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 601
2. REMOVAL PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 601
A. General ................................................................................................................ 601
B. Flight Management System (FMS)...................................................................... 601
3. PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION............................................................................ 601
4. INSTALLATION OF UNITS.......................................................................................... 601
5. POST-INSTALLATION INSPECTION ......................................................................... 602
6. POST-INSTALLATION TESTS.................................................................................... 602
SECTION VIII CLEANING/PAINTING.......................................................................................................... 701
1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 701
A. Cleaning and Painting of Surfaces ...................................................................... 701
B. Display Glass Cleaning........................................................................................ 701
SECTION IX APPROVED REPAIRS ........................................................................................................... 801
1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 801
SECTION X CONFIGURATION SELECTION.............................................................................................. 901
1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................... 901
2. CONFIGURATION CAPABILITIES OF THE CMA-9000: FOUR CONFIGURATIONS901
3. FMS Configuration Selection Procedure ..................................................................... 901
A. FMS Configuration Procedure Using Configuration Diskette .............................. 903
B. Manual FMS Configuration Procedure ................................................................. 904
34-61-14
Page TC-3
May 10, 2007


Section
Title
Page
SECTION XI DATA LOADER UNIT (DLU) ................................................................................................ 1001

1. GENERAL.................................................................................................................. 1001
2. DATA LOADER DESCRIPTION................................................................................ 1001
A. ARINC 615 Data Loader Unit (DLU).................................................................. 1001
B. Loading a database or FMS configuration with an ARINC 615 DLU ................ 1003
3. RS422 DLU................................................................................................................ 1004
A. Loading a database or FMS configuration with the RS 422 DLU...................... 1004
B. Saving the User database or the FMS configuration into the RS422 DLU ....... 1006
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX C
Ground Functional Test Procedures for CMC Electronics Inc.

CMA-9000 S/W 169-614876-0XX ................................................................................. T-A
Flight Functional Test Procedures & Report for CMC Electronics Inc.
CMA-9000 S/W 169-614876-0XX ................................................................................. T-B
Procedures for Obtaining Civil Authorities Approval - IFR/VFR Operations For
Follow-on FMS/GPS Equipment Installations CMC Electronics Inc.
CMA-9000 S/W 169-614876-0XX ................................................................................. T-C
34-61-14
Page TC-4
May 10, 2007

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Title
Page
Figure 1 CMA-9000 Flight Management System variation 100-601951-030 .................................................... 3

Figure 2A Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-030.................................................... 8
Figure 2B Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR 001/101/301 ............................. 9
Figure 2C Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR 002/003/005/102/103/302/30310
Figure 2D Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR 040 ......................................... 11
Figure 2E Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR 050 ......................................... 12
Figure 2F Annunciators and Keys (Sheet 1 of 5)............................................................................................. 13
Figure 3 Related Publications .......................................................................................................................... 18
Figure 5 Equipment Specification (Sheet 1 of 3) ............................................................................................. 21
Figure 6 Physical Specification ........................................................................................................................ 24
Figure 7 Environmental Specification (Sheet 1 of 2) ....................................................................................... 25
Figure 8A Single Basic System with Radio Tuning.......................................................................................... 27
Figure 8B Single Basic System without Radio Tuning..................................................................................... 28
Figure 8C Dual System .................................................................................................................................... 29
Figure 8D System Block Diagram Dual System .............................................................................................. 30
Figure 8E Dual FMS installation with radio tuning and suggested pins allocation (courtesy of Pilatus Aircraft
Switzerland)
............................................................................................................................................... 31
Figure 9 FMS Viewing Envelope...................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 10 Triple FMS/Triple-LTN-92 IRS Interconnections ............................................................................. 93
Figure 11 FMU to LTN-92 INU Source Select (All Relays Shown Energized) ................................................ 94
Figure 12 Heading Sources for Triple FMS/Triple LTN-92 IRS/Dual Compass Couplers ............................... 95
Figure 101A Typical CMA-9000 Location (for a helicopter)........................................................................... 104
Figure 101B Typical CMA-9000 Location (for an aircraft) ............................................................................. 104
Figure 102A CMA-9000 Outline Drawing....................................................................................................... 105
Figure 102B CMA-9000 J1 Connector........................................................................................................... 106
Figure 104 Interwiring Specifications (Sheet 1 of 5) ...................................................................................... 112
Figure 105 Input Wiring Checks for CMA-9000 hardware variation 100-601951-XXX.................................. 117
Figure 201. Integral Lighting 5V Curve .......................................................................................................... 204
Figure 202. Typical Map Mode Display.......................................................................................................... 220
Figure 203. Typical ARC Mode Display ......................................................................................................... 220
Figure 204 EMC Matrix Chart ........................................................................................................................ 224
Figure 301 System Alert Messages (Sheet 1 of 10) ..................................................................................... 302
Figure 302 Maintenance Alert Messages (Sheet 1 of 2) .............................................................................. 312
Figure 303 Maintenance Advisory Messages (Sheet 1 of 7) ........................................................................ 314
Figure 304 Status Advisory Messages (Sheet 1 of 5) ................................................................................. 321
Figure 305 Testing/Troubleshooting Flow Chart (Sheet 1 of 7)..................................................................... 326
Figure 306 Maintenance Pages (Sheet 1 of 7) .............................................................................................. 333
Figure 307 Maintenance Test 1 ..................................................................................................................... 347
Figure 308 Maintenance Test 2 ..................................................................................................................... 347
Figure 309 Typical Full Rose Map Display (Sheet 1 of 2) ............................................................................. 348
Figure 310 Typical ARC NAV Display............................................................................................................ 349
Figure 311 Typical Plan Mode ....................................................................................................................... 350
Figure 312 Label 271 Maintenance Action FMS Status ................................................................................ 351
Figure 901 FMS Configuration Pages (Sheet 1 of 60)................................................................................... 909
Figure 902 Configuration Selections (Sheet 1 of 18)..................................................................................... 969
34-61-14
Page TC-5
May 10, 2007

LIST OF TABLES
Table
Title
Page
Table 1 ARINC 429 Equipment Supported by the CMA-9000......................................................................... 33
34-61-14
Page TC-6
May 10, 2007

SECTION I
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1.
GENERAL
A.
Purpose of Manual
The purpose of this manual is to provide installation instructions and flight line maintenance for the
CMA-9000. Different hardware variations of the CMA-9000 are available. Figure 1 illustrates CMA9000 hardware variation 030. Figures 2 illustrates the other variations.
B.
Function of Equipment
The CMA-9000 is a self-contained cockpit mounted radio and flight management system. It
provides the user with a color display of moderate resolution for alphanumeric data and a keyboard
for data entry, data editing, and system control. Its display, background lighting and annunciators
are compatible with Night Vision Goggles (NVG) for use in a tactical environment.
The CMA-9000 contains ARINC 429, RS-422 RS232, and Discrete interfaces for integration with
other avionics and communication systems for control and/or monitoring via the display and
keyboard. The CMA-9000 can be used with an optional external Radio Interface Board (RIB)
(Future Growth) to interface with analogue radios.
C.
Reliability and Maintainability

The CMA-9000 exhibits a robust design in the environmental conditions specified in this document.
System mean time between failures (MTBF) is 9,499 hours at 30 C ambient temperature in the
airborne inhabited cargo (AIC) environment. In the airborne rotary wing (ARW) environment,
system MTBF is 6,500 hours. The AMLCD Backlight Module is not considered in the MTBF
calculations. It is noted that the CMA-9000 FMS is fitted with a lithium battery that is only used to
maintain the real-time clock. Refer to Section VI, Servicing for Lamp and Battery replacement.
The CMA-9000 incorporates provisions for Built-In-Test (BIT) of the installed equipment with no
additional test equipment. The end-to-end test is capable of detecting faults with a 95% probability.
The BIT monitors the integrity of the navigation database at least once every 15 minutes while
powered, and announces any corruption of data.
34-61-14
Page 1
May 10, 2007

D.
External Interface Capabilities

The CMA-9000 is capable of receiving information from external navigation sensors, including:
GPS Global Positioning System

EGI
Embedded GPS/INS*
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
NAV
VHF Omni-directional Radio range
ADF
ADC Air Data Computer
DVS
Doppler Velocity Sensor*
AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System
APIRS Aircraft Piloting Inertial Reference System
TACAN TACtical Air Navigation system
IRS
Inertial Reference System
The CMA-9000 accepts true (EGI) or magnetic (AHRS or compass) heading inputs and True Air
Speed (TAS), pressure or barometric corrected altitude from an ADC.
The CMA-9000 is capable of exchanging information with other external equipment such as XPDR
(ATC Transponder), COM and V/UHF (radios), EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator),
DMAP (Digital Map), PLS (Personnel Locator System),ACMS (Aircraft Condition Monitoring
System), AMU (Audio Management Unit), Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS), Flight Data
Recorder (REC), Weather Radar (WXR), Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) and FC (Fuel
Computer). The FMS is configurable to operate with the equipment if installed.
The CMA-9000 is capable of transmitting and receiving information to/from external communication
and navigation radios, including HF, VHF, UHF, VUHF, NAV, TACAN and ADF equipment when
used with the optional external RIB unit (Future Growth). The CMA-9000 is also capable of
receiving and transmitting information from other external equipment such as Data Loader Unit
(DLU).
34-61-14
Page 2
May 10, 2007

0611007
Figure 1 CMA-9000 Flight Management System variation 100-601951-030
34-61-14
Page 3
May 10, 2007

Waypoint and computed navigation and guidance information is generated in both geographic and
track-related reference frames for display to the pilot and for output to external aircraft display
systems, including an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS), EHSI (Electronic Horizontal
Situation Indicator), or Digital Map Display System (DMAP).
The CMA-9000 outputs on the ARINC 429 interface suitably formatted lateral steering signals (roll
command or heading error) for use by the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) for aircraft flight
guidance in the horizontal plane. In addition the CMA-9000 is capable of generating output to drive
an Aircraft Condition Monitoring System (ACMS) or a Flight Data Recorder (REC) for in flight
recording of FMS information.
The FMS has the built-in capability to hold the following databases: navigation database, custom
database, user database, radios tuning libraries, Fly Away and OEI cruise function parameters and
a phone book. The above databases, the dimming curves (for external brightness dimming
control), the unit configuration file and the magnetic variation model are updated as a CMA-9000
maintenance task via an ARINC 615 or Targa PDP/3-DOS DLU based on configuration. The unit
software upgrades are updated as a CMA-9000 maintenance task via an ARINC 615 DLU or an
RS-422 Xmodem loader. The pilot or maintenance crew may initiate the upload and download of
the user database from the CMA-9000 pages. The databases that are handled by the FMS are
configured to match the functions configured into the CMA-9000.
E.
Description of the Primary Modes of Navigation

The CMA-9000 can be configured to one of two distinct modes: the civil mode and the military
mode. Integrity monitoring and resulting consequences as required by TSO-C115b, AC20-130A,
and DO-236A are the main differences between the two options.
When in the military navigation configuration option, the sensor navigation solutions will be
assumed to have integrity unless proven otherwise. The navigation modes selection logic is geared
to accuracy performance and the FMS will not necessarily force mode transitions based on
integrity. Some integrity monitoring is nevertheless performed to raise alarms. The pilot is expected
to consider navigation mode alarms and force navigation sensor selections if judged necessary.
When in the civil navigation configuration option, the sensor navigation solutions will be assumed
not to have integrity unless proven otherwise. The navigation modes selection logic is geared to
safety (integrity) and the FMS may force mode transitions to remain in a navigation mode with
integrity, thereby also preventing unnecessary alarms from being raised. This configuration option
is intended to fully comply with TSO-C115, AC20-130A, and the integrity requirements of DO-236A.
The CMA-9000 has several navigation modes. In sequence of priority, they are: Hybrid INS/GPS
(military), GPS (civil), DME (civil), VOR/DME (civil) /TCN (military), Hybrid INS/DVS (military),
Inertial (military), DVS (military), Kalman (civil) and Dead Reckoning (DR) (civil and military
modes).
While in operation the CMA-9000 continuously computes the independent sensor positions. Each
sensor output is monitored and compared against validity criteria. Any sensor which is declared as
failed or has degraded sufficiently will automatically be deselected and will be restored to inventory
only when restored to its criteria levels.
34-61-14
Page 4
May 10, 2007

(1)
Global Positioning System (GPS) (Option)

GPS is the highest priority navigation mode of the FMS, and will be used when sufficient
satellite coverage exists in the Phase Of Flight (POF) for which it is approved. The sensor
continuously monitors the integrity of the satellites by using a Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitor (RAIM).
The GPS will remain selected for navigation when its RAIM function computes a Horizontal
Integrity Limit (HIL) value that is less than the GPS Integrity alert limit, which is a function of
the current POF and Required Navigation Performance (RNP). When the HIL exceeds the
alert limit, or if the GPS loses its RAIM function then the first secondary mode is selected.
(2)
Hybrid INS/GPS (EGI)

When an EGI is configured and the hybrid solution is available and valid, it will have priority
over a non-certified GPS. When the hybrid solution becomes invalid but the GPS solution
remains valid, the GPS solution will be used. When both the hybrid and GPS solutions
become invalid but the INS solution is valid, it will not be used. The INS solution will only be
used if any radio (DME/VOR) solution fails.
(3)
DME/DME
DME is the secondary navigation mode and will be used in areas with sufficient DME
coverage and for which the appropriate navigation database is installed. In this mode the
FMS automatically tunes the on-board DME equipment to acquire distance data from up to six
DME ground stations to determine aircraft position. The position is updated once every 10
seconds from measured sensor data. In addition a velocity rate and heading based update is
computed at least once every second.
For DME sensors, the raw information received is compared with the predicted position and
signals rejected if a discrepancy between the predicted position and DME slant range
information exceeds the applicable tolerances.
(4)
VOR/DME or VOR/DME/TACAN (if TACAN installed)

VOR/DME or VOR/DME/TACAN navigation is a reversionary navigation mode which is used
in areas with sparse DME coverage where there are two or less VOR/DME/TACAN stations.
This mode combines co-located DME distances and VOR bearing to determine position. The
position is updated once every 10 seconds.
For VOR, DME or TACAN sensors, the raw information received is compared with the
predicted position. Signals will be rejected if the discrepancy between the predicted position
and DME/VOR or TACAN information exceeds the applicable tolerances.
34-61-14
Page 5
May 10, 2007

(5)
Hybrid INS/DVS
When a SAGEM SIGMA50H EGI is configured and the hybrid INS/DVS position and
velocities provided by the EGI are available and valid, a hybrid INS/DVS navigation becomes
available.
The FMS is computing an INS/DVS Navigation solution if all of the following are true:
a) The FMS receives valid INS status, INS/DVS position, velocity, and Quality Factor data
(e.g. navigation labels are received with SSM NORMAL and values are within the
required range) from the EGI sensor.
b) The INS status indicates Navigation mode.
c) The INS is not declared Fail.
(6)
Inertial
An Inertial navigation becomes available when an EGI is configured. In the INS navigation
mode, the FMS is using the raw INS position and velocities provided by the EGI for
navigation.
(7)
Kalman Filter (Optional)

The CMA-9000 uses the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS), and the GPS to
provide a Kalman Filter navigation mode. In this mode, the primary navigation sensor is a
GPS receiver. The AHRS is made into a dead-reckoning navigation system by emulating an
INS navigator with a Kalman filter performing closed-loop GPS correction and alignment.
Each sensor has specific performance characteristics and behavior which when combined
provide for continuous navigation. The GPS receiver has bounded but noisy positioning and
velocity errors and the GPS navigation solution is subject to the availability of the GPS
satellite constellation. The AHRS exhibits steady error growth which when converted to a
dead-reckoning system will yield steady error growth in the position and velocity navigation
solution. However, the AHRS-based inertial navigation solution is always available.
The Kalman Filter provides the means to combine both navigation modes so that accurate
navigation can continue for some time after the GPS is lost. The GPS and the AHRS are
integrated via a Kalman Filter to continuously correct and align the AHRS-based inertial
navigation solution, as if the inertial navigation solution were static at a known position point.
The inertial navigation solution based on the AHRS measurements offer short-term navigation
when the GPS or other approved navigation sensor cannot provide navigation data. The
inertial navigator uses measurements from the AHRS and corrections from the Kalman Filter
when GPS is available. Once GPS is lost, the AHRS inertial navigation solution is provided
until its error bounds have been exceeded. The CMA-9000 calculates these drift errors and
makes the navigation solution unavailable when this error exceeds a limit. When exceeding
the error the number will be 300 m 95% of the time which is equivalent to 400 m 99% of the
time. The Kalman navigation mode typically lasts about 3-4 minutes. The GPS LOST discrete
output is activated as soon as GPS data is not available and the Master Caution discrete
output is activated when the 300 meter limit is exceeded.
34-61-14
Page 6
May 10, 2007

(8)
DVS
The navigation mode based solely on Doppler is the less accurate FMS navigation mode
based on sensor. It has priority over the Dead Reckoning mode only.
When a RDN85 or ANV353 DVS is configured, the CMA-9000 can compute a navigation
solution if all of the following criteria is verified:
a) The FMS receives valid Doppler velocities and mode indication (e.g. labels are received
with SSM NORMAL and values are within the required range) from the DVS;
b) The Doppler mode is LAND, SEA or CALM SEA for the RDN85 or in OPER for the
ANV353 DVS;
c) The FMS receives valid heading data (e.g. labels are received with SSM NORMAL and
values are within the required range) from an external sensor (refer to Section Heading
Sources for possible heading inputs and selection logic).
The navigation solution computed by the CMA-9000 is based on the following data:
Doppler velocities (longitudinal, lateral and vertical)
FMS System Selected Attitude (pitch and roll)
FMS System Selected Heading
(9)
Dead Reckoning (DR)

When the external sensor data inputs become insufficient to maintain the normal navigation
modes, the FMS reverts to the dead reckoning mode of navigation. The FMS must now rely
on the last known aircraft position, combined with heading and TAS inputs, and the last valid
computed wind, for its aircraft position calculation. Prolonged DR operation will result in
decreased position accuracy. Alerts are provided when the estimated position accuracy
exceeds the requirements for each phase of flight.
The FMS will automatically recover its normal modes of operation and position accuracy upon
restoration of the external sensor inputs.
F.
Annunciators and Keys

The FMS contains a full alphanumeric keyboard with special function keys. There are six line
select keys (LSK) on each side of the display area. The functions of the LSKs are specific to each
screen page. Figure 2A thru 2D describes the annunciators and FMS keys.
34-61-14
Page 7
May 10, 2007

FAIL
MSG
POS
NPA
TX1
TX2
CMC ELECTRONICS
10
10
18
16
11
32
INIT
REF
DEP
ARR
RTE
RADIO TPDR
LEGS
PROG
EXEC
MARK HOLD
MSG
BRT
12
31
30
13
14
+/ -
17
SP
CLR
29
28
27
26
25
24
23 22
21
20
33
19
15
0611006
Figure 2A Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-030
34-61-14
Page 8
May 10, 2007

FAIL
MSG
POS
NPA
GSM
SMS
CMC ELECTRONICS
INIT
REF
RTE
DEP
ARR
LEGS
PROG
EXEC
RADIO
ANS
SQK
IDT
HOLD
FIX
BRT
+/ -
SP
CLR
0610006
Figure 2B Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR 001/101/301
34-61-14
Page 9
May 10, 2007

FAIL
MSG
POS
NPA
GSM
SMS
CMC ELECTRONICS
INIT
REF
RTE
RADIO FUEL
DEP
ARR
LEGS
MARK HOLD
PROG
EXEC
FIX
BRT
+/ -
SP
CLR
0610007
Figure 2C Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR

002/003/005/102/103/302/303
34-61-14
Page 10
May 10, 2007

FAIL
MSG
RNP
IND
ATC
CMC ELECTRONICS
INIT
REF
RTE
DEP
ARR
LEGS
PROG
EXEC
RADIO FMC
VNAV
HOLD
FIX
BRT
+/ -
SP
CLR
0611003
Figure 2D Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR 040
34-61-14
Page 11
May 10, 2007

FAIL
MSG
RNP
IND
ATC
CMC ELECTRONICS
INIT
REF
RTE
DEP
ARR
LEGS
PROG
EXEC
RADIO TACT
VNAV
HOLD
ATC
BRT
+/ -
SP
CLR
0610005
Figure 2E Annunciators and Keys of CMA-9000 variation 100-601951-VAR 050
34-61-14
Page 12
May 10, 2007

The item numbers mentioned in the first column are used for referencing to annunciators and keys of Figures
2A, 2B, 2C, 2D and 2E.
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
1
2
LCD Display Screen

FAIL Annunciator
(NVIS AMBER)
Provides 14 lines of 24 characters.

Illuminates at maximum brightness with the display blank
upon detection of a FMS failure.
MSG Annunciator
(NVIS AMBER)
POS Annunciator
(NVIS AMBER)
OFST Annunciator
(NVIS GREEN)
NPA Annunciator
(NVIS GREEN)
TX1 Annunciator - VAR 030
only
(NVIS GREEN)
GSM Annunciator
(NVIS GREEN)
TX2 Annunciator - VAR 030
only
(NVIS GREEN)
SMS Annunciator
(NVIS GREEN)
Illuminates when a System Alert message appears in the

scratchpad field of the FMS display. The annunciator stays
illuminated as long as the condition causing the System Alert
message remains, or until the message is acknowledged by
pressing the CLR key, or until the System Alert message is
viewed on the MESSAGE RECALL page accessed via the
INIT REF key or the MSG key. New System Alert messages
also cause illumination of the remote MSG annunciator on
the instrument panel in the pilot's field of view (if installed).
Any acknowledged alert message is available for recall on
the MESSAGE RECALL page as long as the condition
causing it remains.
Illuminates when system is in dead reckoning navigation
mode.
Illuminates during offset (parallel track) navigation.
5
6
7
LDR Sensor
Illuminates when Non-Precision Approach is initiated.

Illuminates when the configured V/UHF unit #1 emits RF
power (radio is transmitting).
Illuminates for incoming call on the GSM network.
Illuminates when the configured V/UHF unit #2 emits RF
power (radio is transmitting).
Illuminates when the Short Message Service text message
has been received.
Detects ambient light conditions in order to perform autobrightness control of display screen and annunciators. The
brightness of the screen and annunciators of the FMS can
also be controlled by an external unit (e.g. CLDU). This item
is configurable. The LDR sensor is not functional when the
brightness is controlled by the 0-5 VDC external source.
Figure 2F Annunciators and Keys (Sheet 1 of 5)
34-61-14
Page 13
May 10, 2007

ITEM
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
10
Line Select Keys (LSK)
There are twelve LSKs on the FMS panel, six on either side
of the display. LSKs are identified by their location from top
to bottom of the screen and as left or right, e.g. LSK 1L, LSK
6R. Entry of data from the scratchpad into the selected field
is accomplished by pressing the adjacent LSK which moves
the data from the scratchpad to the selected field. Data
entries are permitted only on lines adjacent to the LSKs.
Data can also be duplicated from a data field into the
scratchpad by pressing the LSK adjacent to the desired data
line. Inward pointing arrow symbols indicate that an option
may be selected in that field. Outward point arrow symbols
indicate that a new page will be displayed when the adjacent
LSK is pressed, or that an action will be initiated.
11
EXEC Annunciator
(NVIS GREEN)
Illuminates when a modification to the active route is in

process but has not been executed. When the EXEC
annunciator is lit, the impact of the data displayed on the
LEGS page may be reviewed on other FMS pages, except
the PROGRESS pages, and may be made active for
guidance of the aircraft by pressing the EXEC key.
12
EXEC Key
Is used to accept modifications to the active route (flight plan)

performed on the LEGS, RTE (route) or HOLD pages.
Modifications to the active flight plan will turn on the EXEC
annunciator and display in reverse video a MOD status in the
page title line and also an ERASE prompt. When data
entries have been made active (by pressing the EXEC key),
the title MOD status will revert to ACT (active). Until the
MOD status is made active, the FMS will continue to use the
previous active data for navigation and guidance even
though it is not displayed. Any modification can be erased
(cancelled) prior to EXECution by pressing the ERASE LSK.
13
BRT Key
When the internal brightness mode of the FMS is configured,

this key controls the brightness of the screen and
annunciators. After an elapsed time of 5 seconds, the first
press of this key will always increase brightness; each
depression of the BRT key alternately brightens or dims the
display. The brightness of the screen and annunciators of the
FMS can also be controlled by an external unit (e.g. CLDU).
This item is configurable. It is not functional when the
brightness is controlled by the 0-5 VDC external source.
34-61-14
Page 14
May 10, 2007

ITEM
14
DESCRIPTION
MSG Key - VAR 030 only
FUNCTION
Accesses the MESSAGE RECALL page for display of
System Alert messages.
NOTE: This key can also be configured to act as a NEXT
key to access successive MESSAGE RECALL
pages.
FIX Key
(all other variations)
15
CLR Key
16
PROG Key
Provides access to FIX page for all fix and abeam waypoint
functions.
NOTE: The MSG key provides access to the MSG RECALL
page. This page provides flight crew awareness of
any FMS ALERTS by displaying the active alert
scratchpad messages. The MSG RECALL page can
be accessed though other functions keys. Even
though, this particular key can be software or
hardware (e.g. different variations) configured to
another purpose, CMC recommends to retain the
MSG key as part of one of the front panel rapid
page access keys.
Clears one character to the left during scratchpad data entry.
When pressed and held for more than 1 second, it clears the
entire scratchpad. The CLR key also clears alert and
advisory messages from the scratchpad. The DELETE
message can be cleared by a single press of the CLR key.
Pressing the CLR key with the scratchpad empty will display
DELETE in the scratchpad. The delete process is completed
by pressing the LSK next to the data to be removed.
Accesses the PROGRESS pages for display of current flight
and navigation status information.
key to access successive PROGRESS pages.
17
18
HOLD Key
LEGS Key
Provides access to the HOLD page for the definition of

HOLDING procedures at a designated waypoint or present
position.
key to access successive HOLD pages.
Displays LEGS pages containing detailed data concerning
each leg of the flight plan.
key to access successive LEGS pages.
34-61-14
Page 15
May 10, 2007

ITEM
19
DESCRIPTION
DEP ARR Key
FUNCTION
Provides access to the DEP/ARR page for the definition of
departure and arrival procedures and runways.
key to access successive DEPARTURES or
ARRIVALS pages.
20
TPDR Key - VAR 030 only
Provides access to the ATC radio control page. This page

allows the pilot to control the operation of the ATC
Transponder.
ANS - VAR 001/101/301 only
SMS annunciator active: displays the newest message of the

short message service on its dedicated page.
GSM annunciator active: accepts the phone call when
pressed the first time, hangs up when pressed a second
time. Priority is given to GSM.
FUEL - VAR
002/003/005/102/103/302/303
only
Provides a quick access function to Fuel estimation and

status pages.
key to access successive pages, when applicable.
21
RTE Key
Provides access to the ROUTE page for the definition of

routes entered into the FMS.
key to access successive ROUTE pages.
22
RADIO Key
Provides access to RADIO tuning functions.

key to access successive RADIO pages.
23
INIT REF Key
Provides access to pages of data required for initialization

and various categories of reference data.
key to access successive INIT REF pages.
24
25
SP Key
Plus-Minus [+/-] Key
26
Slash (/) Key
Provides a "space" character for separation of words.

Pressing the [+/-] will first display the "-" (minus) symbol.
Pressing it a second time will display the "+" (plus) symbol.
Separates data fields in scratchpad data entry.
27
Decimal (.) Key
Provides decimal point for numeric data entries.

34-61-14
Page 16
May 10, 2007

ITEM
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
28
Alpha-Numeric Keyboard
Allows entry of alpha-numeric data.
29
NEXT Key
When multiple-page displays are indicated in the page title

line, pressing the NEXT key advances the display to the next
higher page number or to page 1 if presently on the last
page.
30
PREV Key
When multiple-page displays are indicated in the page title

line, pressing the PREV key backs up the display to the
previous page or to the last page if presently on page 1.
31
MENU Key
Displays the system menu for access to other ARINC 739

subsystems connected to the CMA-9000. (ARINC 739
MCDU is a Future Growth capability of the CMA-9000)
32
MENU Annunciator
(NVIS GREEN)
Illuminates when a remote subsystem is connected (e.g.

ARINC 739 MCDU) to the CMA-9000 and requires attention
(Future Growth)
33
SQK_IDT - VAR 001/101/301

only
Provides a quick access function to Squawk ident of the

active ATC transponder.
MARK (all other variations)
Provides access to the MARK-ONTOP page and stores the

present position on this page and on the PREDEF WPT
page.

NOTE: Variations in above figure are in reference to the 100-601951-0xx hardware part number.
NOTE: Items 16 to 19 and 20 to 23 already stated in description may also be configured to act as a NEXT
key when displaying an applicable page.
e.g.: When this option is selected and a page like the LEGS 1/X page is displayed, pressing LEGS
again will provide access to the second LEGS page (e.g. LEGS 2/X page).
NOTE: Items 14, 17, 20, 22 and 33 are software configurable:
For hardware variation 030, the five push-button keys located on the second row of function keys
are labeled: RADIO, TPDR, MARK, HOLD and MSG as illustrated in Figure 2A.
For hardware variation 001/101/301, the five push-button keys located on the second row of
function keys are labeled: RADIO, ANS, SQK/IDT, HOLD and MSG as illustrated in Figure 2B.
For hardware variation 002/003/005/102/103/302/303, the five push-button keys located on the
second row of function keys are labeled: RADIO, TPDR, MARK, HOLD and MSG as illustrated in
Figure 2C.
34-61-14
Page 17
May 10, 2007

G.
Related Publications
The related publications are listed in Figure 3.
PUBLICATION NAME
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Operators Manual for Flight Management

System CMA-9000
9000-GEN-0101 with appropriate software

930-600052-000
Interface Specification for Flight Management

System CMA-9000
408-A14876-XXX
Installation/Flight Line Manual for GNSSU

CMA-3012
3012-GEN-0801A
924-990400-100
Component Maintenance Manual for GNSSU

CMA-3012
3012-GEN-1202
924-990445-000
Installation/Flight Line Manual for GNSSU

CMA-3024
3024-GEN-0801
929-600043-000
Targa PDP/3-DOS protocol
32001328 - Revision A
Figure 3 Related Publications
34-61-14
Page 18
May 10, 2007

H.
Equipment Identification
The equipment identification is listed in Figure 4.
EQUIPMENT
NOMENCLATURE
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
NAME
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
HW PART
NUMBER
100-601951030
SW PART
NUMBER
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
PANEL TYPE
REMARKS
MIL-L-85762A
Type I Class B
NVIS green B
RADIO,
TPDR,
MARK,
HOLD,
MSG keys
RADIO,
ANS,
SQK/IDT,
HOLD,
FIX keys
RADIO,
ANS,
SQK/IDT,
HOLD,
FIX keys
RADIO,
FUEL,
MARK,
HOLD,
FIX keys
RADIO,
FUEL,
MARK,
HOLD,
FIX keys
RADIO,
FUEL,
MARK,
HOLD,
FIX keys
RADIO,
FUEL,
MARK,
HOLD,
FIX keys
RADIO,
ANS,
SQK/IDT,
HOLD,
FIX keys
100-601951001
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
MIL-L-85762A
Type I Class B
NVIS green B
100-601951101/301
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
MIL-L-85762A
Type I Class B
NVIS green B
100-601951002
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
MIL-L-85762A
Type I Class B
NVIS Saturn
Yellow
100-601951102/302
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
MIL-L-85762A
Type I Class B
NVIS Saturn
Yellow
100-601951003/005
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
MIL-L-85762A
Type I Class B
NVIS green B
100-601951103/303
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
MIL-L-85762A
Type I Class B
NVIS green B
100-601951301
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
Non NVIS
INTEGRAL
LIGHTING
5 VDC sense
see note
5 VDC sense
see note
28 VDC
power
see note
5 VDC sense
see note
28 VDC
power
see note
5 VDC sense
see note
28 VDC
power
see note
28 VDC
power
see note
Figure 4 Equipment Identification (Sheet 1 of 2)
34-61-14
Page 19
May 10, 2007

EQUIPMENT
NOMENCLATURE
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-9000 Flight
Management
System (FMS)
CMA-3024 Global
Navigator System
Sensor Unit
(GNSSU MKII)
CMA-3012 Global
Navigator System
Sensor Unit
(GNSSU MKI)
Trimble TA-12
Honeywell Global
Navigator System
Sensor Unit
(GNSSU MKII)
NAME
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
FMS:
Note:
variation
supplied
GPS
Note: not
supplied
GPS
Note: not
supplied
GPS
Note: not
supplied
GPS
Note: not
supplied
Honeywell Global
Navigator System
Sensor Unit
(GNSSU MKI)
GPS
CMA-3112 GPS
Sensor Module
(embedded in the
CMA-900 FMS)
GPS/
FMS:
Note: not
supplied
Not
supplied
HW PART
NUMBER
100-601951302
SW PART
NUMBER
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
PANEL TYPE
100-601951303
Operational=
169-614876-001
Boot = 169615065-X01
100-6019440XX/1XX
Operational =
169-614788-001
100-601600201,302,405,
504,702
Operational =
169-613751007,207,115,402,
305
ARINC
743A
24835-10
Operational =
TA12-CX-0129
TA_12
HG2021GD0
3
(same as
CMC 100601944-0XX)
HG2021GD0
2
(same as
CMC 100601600-3XX)
P/N 245-601
650-1XX or
2XX
Operational =
169-614788-001
ARINC 743
Operational =
169-613751-207
ARINC 743
Operational =
169-613850-5XX
ARINC 743
Non NVIS
Non NVIS
REMARKS
RADIO,
FUEL,
MARK,
HOLD,
FIX keys
RADIO,
FUEL,
MARK,
HOLD,
FIX keys
ARINC
743A
INTEGRAL
LIGHTING
28 VDC
power
see note
28 VDC
power
see note
Figure 4 Equipment Identification (Sheet 2 of 2)

NOTE: "Sense" means that the energy needed to illuminate the keyboard is retrieved from the FMS aircraft
power 28VDC on pins J1-4/5/6/7.
"Power" means that the energy needed to illuminate the keyboard is retrieved from the Integral
Lighting pins on pins J1-8/9/1.
34-61-14
Page 20
May 10, 2007

2.
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Equipment specification of the CMA-9000 are listed in Figure 5. The interconnection of an integrated
unit is illustrated in Figure 6 and is included as an aid to better understanding the relationship of the
FMS to other aircraft systems.
CHARACTERISTIC
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS/
AEEC
ARINC 424
SPECIFICATION
Navigation System Database
ARINC 429
Mark 33 Digital Information Transfer System (DITS)
ARINC 545
Subsonic Air Data Computer System
ARINC 561
Air Transport Inertial Navigation Systems (INS)
ARINC 565
Mark 3 Subsonic Air Data System
ARINC 610A
Guidance for Use of Avionics Equipment and Software in Simulators
ARINC 615
Airborne Computer High Speed Data Loader
ARINC 702A
Advanced Flight Management Computer System (FMS)
ARINC 704
Inertial Reference Systems
ARINC 716
Airborne VHF Communication Transceiver
ARINC 739
Multi-Purpose Control and Display Unit
ARINC 743A
Airborne Global Positioning System Receiver
ARINC 601
Control/Display Interfaces
FEDERAL AVIATION
ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
TSO-C113
TSO-C115b (See NOTE 1)
Airborne Multipurpose Electronic Displays; FAA Standard Orders

Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-Sensor Inputs
NOTE 1: TSO-C115b (a)(1), with respect to RTCA DO-187 para
2.3, Vertical Navigation is not implemented.
TSO-C115b
(a)(2)(xii),
Standalone
VOR/DME
approaches are not implemented.
Figure 5 Equipment Specification (Sheet 1 of 3)
34-61-14
Page 21
May 10, 2007

CHARACTERISTIC
SPECIFICATION
TSO-C129a (See NOTE 2)
TSO-C115b
AC 20-130A
AC 20-138
AC 90-94
Airborne Supplemental Navigation Using Global Positioning System

(GPS)
NOTE 2:
TSO-C129a (a)(3)(xix), Vertical Navigation
(VNAV) is not implemented.
Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-Sensor
Inputs
Airworthiness Approval of Navigation or Flight Management Systems
integrating Multiple Navigation Sensors
Airworthiness Approval of Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation Equipment for use as a VFR and IFR Supplemental
Navigation System
Guidelines for Using Global Positioning System Equipment for IFR
En Route and Terminal Operations and for Non-Precision Instrument
Approaches in the U.S. National Airspace System
RTCA/EUROCAE
DO-160E
Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne

Equipment
DO-178B
Software Considerations in Airborne Systems and Equipment

Certification
DO-187A
Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Airborne Area

Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs
Standards for Aeronautical Information
Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Airborne
Supplemental Navigation Equipment Using Global Poaitioning
System (GPS)
DO-201A
DO-208
DO-212
Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Airborne Automatic

Dependent Surveillance (ADS) Equipment
DO-217
MASP, DGNSS Instrument Approach System: SCAT-I
DO-236B/ED-75
Minimum Aviation System Performance Specification Required

Navigation Performance for Area Navigation
Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Required
Navigation Performance for Area Navigation
DO-283A
ED-79
Certification Considerations for Highly-Integrated or Complex Aircraft

Systems
34-61-14
Page 22
May 10, 2007

CHARACTERISTIC
SPECIFICATION
SAE
AMS2521A
Reflection-Reducing Coatings for Instrument Glasses
ARP 1068B
Flight Deck and Instrumentation, Display Criteria and Associated

Controls for Transport Aircraft
Design Objectives for Liquid Crystal Displays for Part 25 (Transport)
Aircraft
Certification Considerations for Highly-Integrated or Complex Aircraft
Systems
ARP 4256
ARP-4754/ED-79
AS8034
Minimum Performance Standard for Airborne Multipurpose Electronic

Displays
JAA (Joint Aeronautical

Authority)
Leaflet No. 2
AMJ-20X2 - Advisory Material for the Airworthiness Approval of

Navigation Systems for Use in European Airspace Designated for
Basic RNAV Operations, 1 July 1996
Interim Guidance on GPS as a Supplementary Navigation System,
1 July 1996
Leaflet No. 3
INT/POL/27/29/1
Protection from the effects of HIRF, Issue 1, 01-10-96
TGL-10 (P-RNAV)
Airworthiness and operational approval

operations in designated european airspace
for
Precision
RNAV
MILITARY SPECIFICATION
MS25212C (ASG)
Control Panel Console Type, Aircraft Equipment, Basic Dimensions
MILITARY STANDARD
MIL-C-14806A
Coating, Reflection Reducing, for Instrument Cover Glasses and

Lighting Wedges
MIL-STD-810C
Environmental Test Methods and Engineering Guidelines
MIL-M-13231C
MIL-C-14806A
MIL-L-85762A
Markings
Anti-Reflection Coating
Lighting, Aircraft, Interior, Night Vision Imaging System (NVIS)
Compatible
CMC
408-A14876-XXX
Interface specification for the CMA-9000 FMS
ECD
SP L330 M0901 E01
EC135 NVG Cockpit, Issue C, 2nd Draft, Date

34-61-14
Page 23
May 10, 2007

PHYSICAL
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATION
Size
Weight
SPECIFICATION
147.57 mm (5.81 in) depth, 146.05 mm (5.75 in) wide, 171.45 mm
(6.75 in) high
3.86 kg (8.5 lb) maximum
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Power Dissipation
Power Interrupt and

BIT Timer
+28 Vdc, 45.0W typical at ambient, 75.0W typical during cold

temperature startup
Integral lighting, 12.0W maximum at 5.0 Vdc (included in power
specified in the sentence above)
NOTE: CMC recommends a 5 Amp circuit breaker for the +28 Vdc
power supply source.
DO-160E, Section 16.0 Cat. A 200msec power interrupt
No interrupt < 0.200 seconds
Warm start 0.200 < t < 7 or 0.200 < t < 90 seconds (depending on the
configuration.)
Cold start t > 7 seconds or t > 90 seconds (depending on the
configuration.)
BIT duration 10.0 seconds maximum (Cold start only)
NOTE: The power interruption duration, when the aircraft is on the
ground, is software configurable to either 7 or 90 seconds.
Figure 6 Physical Specification
34-61-14
Page 24
May 10, 2007

ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENTAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature
SPECIFICATION
In accordance with Radio Technical Commission for Aeronautics
(RTCA) Document No. DO-160E. However, only major characteristics
are listed.
DO-160E Section 4.5 Cat. A4B4
Non-operating high temperature
85C (185F)
Non-operating low temperature
-55C (-67F)
Operating high temperature (see Note below)
see note below
Operating low temperature
-40C(-40F)
Forced cooling air required
None
Decompression
NOTE:
- At +55 C, fully operational (tested for 2 hours).
- At +70C, fully operational for 30 minutes.
- At +70C, fully operational for 2 hours if display is initially set at 80 fL.
(Display
may
dim. This specification is made in order to protect the lamp at high
temperature.
DO-160E Section 4.6 Cat. A4B4
2h at 40,000 ft.
45,000 ft. in 15 sec.
Overpressure
DO-160E Section 4.6.2 At 15,000 ft, 10 minutes, off
Temperature Variation
DO-160E Section 5.0 Cat. B
Humidity
DO-160E Section 6.0 Cat. A
Shock
Explosion proofness
Waterproofness
DO-160E Section 7.0 Cat. B:

DO-160E Section 7.2
operational shock
DO-160E Section 7.3.1
impulse test
DO-160E Section 7.3.2
sustained test
DO-160E Section 8.0 Cat. H(R), S (M, B, B3) fixed wing
DO-160E Section 8.0 Cat. R(G) rotor configuration (not applicable to
VAR 030)
DO-160E Section 9.0 Cat. X. No test required.
DO-160E Section 10.0 Cat. W
Fluids Susceptibility
DO-160E Section 11.0 Cat. X. No test required.
Sand and Dust
DO-160E Section 12.0 Cat. D
Fungus Resistance
DO-160E Section 13.0 Cat. F
Salt Spray
DO-160E Section 14.0 Cat. X No test required.
Altitude
Vibration
Figure 7 Environmental Specification (Sheet 1 of 2)
34-61-14
Page 25
May 10, 2007

ENVIRONMENTAL
SPECIFICATION
ELECTROMAGNETIC
INTERFERENCE (contd)
Magnetic Effect
DO-160E Section 15.0 Cat. Z
Power Input
DO-160E Section 16.0 Cat. A Momentary Power Interrupt (200 ms)
Voltage Spike conducted

Audio Frequency conducted
susceptibility

DO-160E Section 18.0 Cat. R
Induced Signal susceptibility
DO-160E Section 19.0 Cat. ZC
RF Susceptibility
DO-160E Section 20.0 Cat. WW and RR
Emission of Radio
Frequency Energy
DO-160E Section 21.0 Cat. M
Lighting Induced transient

susceptibility
DO-160E Section 22.0 Cat. A3E3X

The bonding resistance of the CMA-9000 is less than 2.5 mOhm.
Lightning Direct Effects Test
DO-160E Section 23.0 Cat. X.
Icing
DO-160E Section 24.0 Cat X.
Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD)
Fire, Flammability
DO-160E Section 26.0 Cat. X.
Bench Handling
MIL-STD-810E, Method 516.4. Drop of 4 inches and at 45 degrees edge
Solar radiation
MIL-STD-810E, Procedure II Method 505.3
Figure 7 Environmental Specification (Sheet 2 of 2)
34-61-14
Page 26
May 10, 2007

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COPILOT'S
EADI
HSI/VSI
MODE
PILOT'S
EADI
COPILOT'S
EFIS
HSI/VSI
MODE
PILOT'S
EFIS
APIRS
DISCRETE OUTPUTS
(ANNUNCIATORS)
GPS LOST
XPDR1 STBY/ON
XPDR2 STBY/ON
MASTER CAUTION
DISCRETE INPUTS
(CONTROLS)
NIGHT/DAY
NVG
LAMP TEST ON/OFF
TOGA
LNAV ROLL STEEERING
NAV1/XPDR1 CP ACTIVE (GROWTH)
CONCENTRATOR
RADIO
NAVIGATION
2
ADF-2
DKG-3
MAP
ELT
PILOT'S
FMS
DME
DKG-4
MAP
GPS TIME MARK
AUDIO
MISSION SYSTEM
AUDIO
RS-422
MOBILE
COMM
VHF-AM
1
VHF-AM
2
ATC
1
ATC
2
NAV-2
GPS
NAV-1
ANTENNA
NAV/GLS
400.00
999.99
IDENT
V
O
L
(')
NAV
HLD
NAV/GLS
X
F
SBAS E
DME R
HLD
M
E
M
TUNE
GLS
OFF
TST
NAV
CMC ELECTRONICS
NAV1/VHF AM1
CP ACTIVE
(TO CDU)
NAV1/VHF AM1
CP ACTIVE
(TO CDU)
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
XPDR2
STBY/ON
FROM CDU
400.00
999.99
IDENT
V
O
L
(')
NAV
HLD
X
F
SBAS E
DME R
HLD
M
E
M
TUNE
GLS
OFF
TST
NAV
CMC ELECTRONICS
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
0605025
Figure 8A Single Basic System with Radio Tuning
34-61-14
Page 27
May 10, 2007

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS (BASIC SYSTEM)

COPILOT'S ADI
TO FMS
(A429 HS)
(BASIC #1)
PILOT'S ADI
2 FUEL FLOW
METER (ANALOG)
VMS
TO FMS
(ARINC 429 HS)
(FUEL FLOW)
ATT/HDG
TO FMS
(A429 HS)
(BASIC #2)
A429 LS
VOR/ILS
VIR 432
AUDIO
A429 LS
VOR/ILS
VIR 432
AUDIO
DME 442
AUDIO
RA
HSI/VSI
MODE
COPILOT'S
HSI
HSI/VSI
MODE
PILOT'S
HSI
A429 LS
MISSION SYSTEM
A429 LS
A429 LS
A429 LS
DIGITAL
MAP
JOYSTICK
ETC
4098F
A429 LS
A429 LS
RADIO
NAVIGATION
TRUE/MAG
TOGA
LAMP TEST
WOW
NVG
NIGHT
A429 LS
A429 LS
A429 LS
RS422
RLY
A429 LS
PILOT'S
CMA-9000
RS422
RS422
A429 HS
MASTER
CAUTION
A429 HS
MESSAGE
A429 HS
DATA
TRANSFER
UNIT
A429 HS
BASIC #1
BASIC #2
VMS
A429 HS
EGI
(INS/GPS)
ADL
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
0605028
Figure 8B Single Basic System without Radio Tuning
34-61-14
Page 28
May 10, 2007

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COPILOT'S
EADI
DISCRETE OUTPUTS
(ANNUNCIATORS)
GPS LOST (2)
XPDR1 STBY/ON
MASTER
AHRS 1
CAUTION (2)
DISCRETE INPUTS
(CONTROLS)
NIGHT/DAY
NVG
LAMP TEST ON/OFF
TOGA
LNAV ROLL STEEERING
HSI/VSI
MODE
COPILOT'S
EFIS
PILOT'S
EFIS
HSI/VSI
MODE
AHRS 2
CONCENTRATOR
PILOT'S
EADI
2
SWITCHED
FOR
BACKUP
ONLY
DLU
RADIO
NAVIGATION
MISSION SYSTEM
DKG-3
MAP
PILOT'S
FMS
DKG-4
MAP
ADF
DF431B
AUDIO
AUDIO
DME
DM441B
GPS TIME MARK
ELT
2
ARINC
429
VHF-AM 1
VC401C
VHF-AM 2
VC401C
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
ATC-1
MST67A
NAV-2
VN411B
GPS
CMA-3012
ANTENNA
NAV-1
VN411B
NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
0605026
Figure 8C Dual System
34-61-14
Page 29
May 10, 2007

CADC
TAWS
TCAS
X-Talk
EHSI
FMS 1
GPS
FMS 2
Map data,
Heading
Mode S
Map data,
Heading
FMU
Steering
FDR
Aircraft
Systems
CVR
Interphone
Systems
Alt Alert
Steering
EHSI
Rad Alt
EADI
Nav
Radios
ATC
EHSI,
RMI
& FD/AP
VHF
COMM
ADC
FMU
FIt Instr
& FD/AP
CADC
FMU
FIt Instr
& FD/AP
Compass
ADF
DME442
IRS
HF
FMU
FIt Instr
& FD/AP
Data
Loader
ELT
Indicator
Wx Radar
Nav
Radios
FMU
IRS
EADI 1
EADI 1
EHSI 1
EHSI 1
SELCAL
FD / AP A
Standby
Horizon
FD / AP A
0605027
Figure 8D System Block Diagram Dual System
34-61-14
Page 30
May 10, 2007
BA TT
BA TT
J1
26
27
G P S R e c e iv e r J 1
24
25
21
22
J1
05
06
J1
05
06
V O R /IL S 2
J1
21
22
R EAR FMS
(J 1 P 4 )
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
REAR FM S
(J 1 P 3 4 ,3 7 )
R EAR FMS
(J 1P 1 0/1 1)
RD
GN
RD
GN
J1
V O R /IL S 1
1 31 3

RD
GN
R EAR FMS
(J 1P 12 /1 3)
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
O SM C, FPFD,
RPFD , C AT, HSG
R EAR FMS
(J1 P 19 /20 )
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
R EAR FMS
(J 1P 70 ,71 )
OSMC , FPFD ,
R PFD , H SG
RD
GN
R EAR FMS
(J 1 P 3 8)
C1
J1
ATC
T ra n s p o n d e r
19
20
J1
13
14
J1
DME
01
02
J1
21
22
C2
REAR FM S
(J1 P 2 1 /22 )
RD
GN
C3
X2
X1
M C F A IL 2
R E LA Y
AMU
RD
GN
REAR FM S
(J 1 P 2 3 /2 4 )
RD
GN
F R O N T LA M P
T E S T S W IT C H
R EAR FMS
(J 1 P 1 6 )
RD
GN
D3
D1
D2
C A T 2 (J9 P 9/1 0)
J1
E F IS
44
45
J1
33
34
X2
X1
W O W 2 R ELAY
RD
GN
RD
GN
C O C K P IT C A T
(J 5 02 P 1 1 , 1 2 )
C O C K P IT C A T
(J5 02 P 29 , 3 0 )
RD
GN
JJ11
74
75
03
04
05
06
07
70
71
10
11
12
13
14
15
53
85
86
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
34
37
83
84
100
38
32
35
33
36
99
45
41
42
81
82
40
46
47
93
94
125
51
52
16
54
55
111
112
115
116
62
63
121
122
50
F irs t F M S
R EAR FMS
(J 1P 66 /6 7)
J1
J1
2 8 V D C IN T L IG H T IN G 0 1
66
67
O N /O F F C O N T R O L IR S A 4 2 9 I/P 1 5
I/P H I
78
I/P H I
79
6
8
I/P L O
A D C A 4 2 9 I/P 1 6
69
I/P L O
72
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
O
/P
5
IR
S
A
4
2
9
O
/P
8
X -T A L K A 4 2 9 O /P 4 H S
73
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 H S 0 .5 -5 V d c A M L C D D IM M IN G 1 2 6
A M L C D D IM M IN G R E T U R N 0 2
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 L S
76
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 7
77
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 5 H S 0 .5 -5 V d c IN T L IG H T (P A N E L ) 0 8
IN T E G R A L L IG H T R E T U R N 0 9
C H A S S IS G N D
80
D IS C R E T E I/P 9
D IS C R E T E I/P 1 4
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 3 L S 4 3
44
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 6 L S M A S T E R C A U T IO N O /P (1 ) 3 9
31
G P S IN T W A R N O /P (4 )
29
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 3 L S
U /V H F 2 A 4 2 9 I/P 8
30
D IS C R E T E O /P 5 8 7
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 7 L S
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 1 L S
91
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 2 H S
RS422 RX3
92
D IS C R E T E R E T U R N
4197
X -T A L K A 4 2 9 I/P 9 H S
U /V H F 1 A 4 2 9 I/P 4
18
95
R S 2 3 2 /4 2 2 R X 1
96
M C F A IL (6 )
97
R S 2 3 2 /4 2 2 T X 1
98
RS422 R X2
E M E R G E N C Y D IS C I/P (2 )
48
101
RS422 TX2
RS 422 RX4
110023
RS 232 G ND
104
RS 422 TX 4
D IS C R E T E O /P 2
105
106
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 7
107
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 8 1 0 8
109
L A M P T E S T D IS C R E T E (3 )
110
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 9
56
T O G A (D IS I/P 1 )
57
V O L F B C K F C (I/P 1 0 )
RS422 TX3
113
114
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 1
S Y N C R E F I/P L O
117
G P S T IM E M A R K H I
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 3 H I
58
G P S T IM E M A R K L O
59
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 1
118
W O W (8 )
111189
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 3 L O
S H IE L D R E T U R N
120
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 4
60
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 0
61
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 2
123
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 2
S Y N C O /P 1 Z
124
S Y N C R E F I/P H I
64
D A T A L O A D A 6 1 5 I/P 1 3
F U E L A 4 2 9 I/P 1 4
65
S Y N C O /P 1 X
27
S Y N C O /P 1 Y
1 1 5 V a c,4 0 0 H z P O W 1
128
D A Y /N IG H T D IS C R E T E (7 ) 1 1 5 V a c ,4 0 0 H z R T N
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 6
RD
GN
POW ER
+28VDC
+28VDC
+28VDC
+28VDC
J1
28
29
J1
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
J2
15
B rig h tn e s s
C o n tro l
D is p la y
RD
GN
38
39
RD
GN
ADC
FR ON T FMS
(J 1P 6 8/6 9)
J1
J1
80
78
79
RD
GN
J1
RD
GN
18
27
J 11
B
C
RD
GN
RD
GN
R a d io 8 1
In te rfa c e 1
J1 1
RD
GN
AHRS
36
37
J1
RD
GN
J1
29
U /V H F 1
A
E
RD
GN
REAR FM S
(J 1 P 1 7 /1 8 )
R a d io E m e rg e n cy
J2
78
79
RD
GN
REAR FM S
(J 1 P 2 9/3 0 )
RD
GN
U /V H F 2
JB
8E
RD
GN
8F
O S M C (J 1 P 5 0/
51 )
AMU
JB
RD
GN
B 1 1A
RD
GN
JB
B 1 1B
7A
7B
JB
RD
GN
R EAR FMS
(J 1P 25 /2 6)
B 1 0A
RD
GN
B 1 0B
J2
A V IO N IC S C A T
2 (J 9 P 1 5 /1 6 )
46
Fuel
47
C o m p u te r
C3
C1
C2
RD
GN
R EAR FMS
(J 1P 6 4/6 5)
X1
X2
D A Y /N IG H T 3
FR ON T R ELAY
S e co n d F M S
BATT
BATT
FRONT FMS
(J1P 4)
J1
10
11
G P S re ce ive r
J1
24
25
RD
GN
FRONT FMS
(J1P 10/11)
RD
GN
REAR FMS
(J1P 34,37)
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
J1
V O R /IL S 1
15
16
J1
05
06
J1
05
06
V O R /IL S 2
J1
21
22
RD
GN
FRONT FMS
(J1P 12/13)
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
OSMC, FPFD,
RPFD, CAT, HSG
FRONT FMS
(J1P 19/20)
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
OSMC, FPFD,
RPFD, HSG
FRONT FMS
(J1P 70,71)
FRONT FMS
(J1P 38)
RD
GN
C1
J2
ATC
T ran sp o n d e r
19
20
J2
21
22
J1
DME
01
02
J1
21
22
C2
FRONT FMS
(J1P 21/22)
RD
GN
C3
X2
X1
M C F A IL 2
R E LA Y
AMU
RD
GN
FRONT FMS
(J1P 23/24)
RD
GN
R E A R LA M P
T E S T S W IT C H
FRONT FMS
(J1P 16)
D3
RD
GN
D1
D2
C A T 2(J9P 11/12)
J1
E F IS
44
45
J1
33
34
X2
X1
W O W 2 R E LA Y
RD
GN
RD
GN
RD
GN
C O C K P IT C A T
(J502 P 27, 28)
C O C K P IT C A T
(J502 P 36, 37)
J1
74
75
03
04
05
06
07
70
71
10
11
12
13
14
15
53
85
86
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
34
37
83
84
100
38
32
35
33
36
99
45
41
42
81
82
40
46
47
93
94
125
51
52
16
54
55
111
112
115
116
62
63
121
122
50
J1
01
66
67
68
69
78
79
72
73
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 H S 0 .5 -5 V d c A M L C D D IM M IN G 1 2 6
A M L C D D IM M IN G R E T U R N 0 2
76
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 L S
A R IN C 42 9 O /P 7
77
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 5 H S0 .5 -5 V d c IN T L IG H T (P A N E L ) 0 8
09
IN T E G R A L L IG H T R E T U R N
C H A S S IS G N D
80
4
3
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 3 L S
44
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 6 L S M A S T E R C A U T IO N O /P (1 ) 3 9
31
G P S IN T W A R N 0 /P (4 )
29
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 3 L S
U /V H F 2 A 4 2 9 I/P 8 3 0
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 7 L S
89
D
IS
C
R
E
T
E
O
/P
7
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 1 L S
91
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 2 H S
R S 42 2 R X 3
92
D IS C R E T E R E T U R N
49
X -T A L K A 4 2 9 I/P 9 H S
17
U /V H F 1 A 42 9 I/P 4
18
95
R S 2 3 2 /4 22 R X 1
96
M C F A IL (6 )
97
R S 2 3 2 /42 2 T X 1
98
RS422 RX2
E M E R G E N C Y D IS C I/P (2 )
48
101
RS422 TX2
RS422 RX4
102
1
03
RS232 GND
RS422 TX4
104
105
A R IN C 4 29 I/P 1 7 1 0 6
A R IN C 42 9 I/P 1 8 1 0 7
108
L A M P T E S T D IS C R E T E (3 )
109
A R IN C 42 9 I/P 1 9 1
10
T O G A (D IS I/P 1 )
56
V O L F B C K R C (I/P 1 0 )
57
RS422 TX3
113
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 1
114
S Y N C R E F I/P L O
117
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 3 H I
G P S T IM E M A R K H I
58
G P S T IM E M A R K L O
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 1
59
W O W (8 )
118
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 3 L O
119
A R IN C 4 29 I/P 2 4
120
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 0
60
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 1 2
61
A R IN C 4 2 9 I/P 2 2
123
S Y N C O /P 1 Z
S Y N C R E F I/P H I 1 2 4
D A T A L O A D A 61 5 I/P 1 3
64
F U E L A 42 9 I/P 1 4 6 5
S Y N C O /P 1 X
S Y N C O /P 1 Y
1 1 5 V a c,4 0 0 H z P O W 1 2 7
D A Y /N IG H T D IS C R E T E (7 ) 1 1 5 V a c,4 0 0 H z R T N 1 2 8
FRONT FMS
(J1P 66/67)
J1
2 8 V D C IN T LIG H T IN G
A R IN C 4 2 9 O /P 6
RD
GN
P O W E R O N /O FF C O N T R O L IR S A 4 29 I/P 1 5
+2 8 V D C I/P H I
A D C A 42 9 I/P 1 6
+2 8 V D C I/P H I
+2 8 V D C I/P L O
A R IN C 42 9 O /P 8
+2 8 V D C I/P L O
A R IN C 42 9 O /P 5
X -T A L K A 4 2 9 O /P 4 H S
FRONT FMS
(J1P 68/69)
J1
29
J2
15
RD
GN
28
29
RD
GN
RD
GN
B righ tn e ss
C o n tro l
D isp la y
38
39
RD
GN
78
79
J1
RD
GN
ADC
J1
J1
RD
GN
AHRS
J1
80
RD
GN
R a d io 8 1
In te rfa ce 2
18
27
J1
RD
GN
B
C
RD
GN
U /V H F 1
REAR FMS
(J1P 17/18)
R a d io E m e rg e n cy
J2
REAR FMS
(J1P 29/30)
RD
GN
J1
78
79
RD
GN
RD
GN
U /V H F 2
A
E
RD
GN
JB
9E
9F
O S M C (J1P 54/
55)
AMU
JB
RD
GN
10A
10B
JB
RD
GN
7A
7B
RD
GN
FRONT FMS
(J1P 25/26)
JB
11A
11B
RD
GN
J2
A V IO N IC C A T
2(J9P 17/19)
D3
D2
X2
D1
46
Fuel
47
C o m p u ter
RD
GN
FRONT FMS
(J1P 64/65)
X1
D A Y /N IG H T 3
R E A R R E LA Y
Figure 8E Dual FMS installation with radio tuning and suggested pins allocation (courtesy of
Pilatus Aircraft Switzerland)
34-61-14
Page 31
May 10, 2007

NORMAL LINE
45
45
10
30
6 O' CLOCK DIRECTION OPTIMAL VIEWING ANGLE
VERTICAL BOTTOM: 30
VERTICAL TOP: 10
HORIZONTAL BOTTOM SIDES: 45
MG331
Figure 9 FMS Viewing Envelope
34-61-14
Page 32
May 10, 2007

3.
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT
Table 1 shows a list of ARINC 429 equipment which may be connected to each CMA-9000 system (in a
dual FMS installation). The digital inputs and outputs can be configured for high or low speed.
QUANTITY
1
ACRONYM
ACARS
1
1
Up to 2
Up to 2
1
Up to 3
1
1
1
1
Up to 2
1
ACMS
AMU
ADC
ADF
AFCS
AHRS
APIRS
CHK
DMAP
DLU
DME
DVS
1
Up to 2
1
1
Up to 2
1
Up to 2
1
1
1
1
1
Up to 2
1
Up to 2
1
Up to 2
EFIS
EHSI
EGI
ELT
FC
GPS
CONC
PLS
PRI
REC
REPE
SIMUL
NAV
TACAN
VUHF
WXR
XPDR
DESCRIPTION
Aircraft Communication Addressing and
Reporting System (Future Growth)
Aircraft Condition Monitoring System
Air Data Computer
Aircraft Flight Control System
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Aircraft Piloting Inertial Reference System
ARINC 429 I/F Checker
Digital Map System
Data Loader Unit
Distance Measuring Equipment
Doppler Velocity Sensor*
Electronic Flight Instrument System
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
Embedded GPS INS (1)*
Emergency Locator Transmitter (use REC o/p)
Fuel Computer
Global Positioning System (ARINC 743A)
Data Concentrator
Personnel Locator System
Printer (Future Growth)
Flight Recorder
Repeater
Simulator (Future Growth)
VOR/ILS Receiver
Tactical Air Navigation Receiver
V/UHF Communication Radio
Weather rader
ATC Transponder
I/O
Both
O/P
Both
I/P
Both
O/P
I/P
I/P
Both
Both (Note 1)
Both
Both
I/P for RDN-85
Both for ANV-353
Both (Note 2)
Both
Both
O/P
I/P
Both
I/P
I/P
O/P
O/P
Both
Both
Both
I/P
Both
I/P
Both
NOTE 1: The FMS transmits output data to the DMAP unit via the EFIS output A429 bus.
NOTE 2: The FMS receives and decodes input data from EFIS IFDS, AHCAS and AHCAS2 unit types
only.
*The installation of an EGI, DVS are not allowed with an approved FMS.
Table 1 ARINC 429 Equipment Supported by the CMA-9000
34-61-14
Page 33
May 10, 2007

A.
Aircraft Condition Monitoring System (ACMS)

(1)
FMS to Digital ACMS Link Summary

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 outputs that are supplied by the FMS to
the Aircraft Condition Monitoring System (ACMS).
LABEL-EQUIP ID
001-002
002-002
012-002
056-002
061-002
062-002
063-002
074-002
075-002
102-002
104-002
114-002
115-002
116-002
117-002
120-002
121-002
125-002
126-002
150-002
164-002
203-002
204-002
205-002
206-002
210-002
212-002
213-002
233-002
234-002
235-002
236-002
237-002
251-002
252-002
260-002
270-002
271-002
272-002
275-002a
DESCRIPTION
Distance to the TO waypoint
Time to go to the "TO" waypoint
Ground Speed
ETA at Destination
Dep/Dest airports (dep123)
Dep/Dest airports (dep4/dest1)
Dep/Dest airports (dest234)
Zero Fuel Weight (Aircraft Gross Weight - Aircraft Fuel Weight)
Aircraft Gross Weight
Selected Altitude
Target Vertical Speed
Desired track
Waypoint bearing
Cross-track (lateral deviation)
Vertical deviation
Range to target altitude
Roll/steering command
Greenwich Mean Time
Vertical deviation
UTC (Time)
(Pilot Entered) MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude)
Pressure altitude
Baro Corrected Altitude
Mach Number
CAS/IAS
True Airspeed
Vertical Rate
Static Air Temperature
Flight number (char1/char2)
Distance to Go
Time to Go
Date
FMS status word 1
FMS failure word
FMS sub-system validity word
FMS status word 2
34-61-14
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
1 sec
500 msec
500 msec
1 sec
1 sec
500 msec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
500 msec
500 msec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Page 34
May 10, 2007

LABEL-EQUIP ID
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
315-002
316-002
317-002
320-002
321-002
325-002
335-002
354-002b
361-004
365-002
B.
DESCRIPTION
Present position latitude
Present position longitude
Ground speed
Track angle true
True heading
Wind Speed
Wind Angle
Track Angle Magnetic
Magnetic Heading
Drift angle
Roll angle
Track angle rate
TO WPT name
Baro Inertial Altitude
Inertial vertical speed
TX RATE
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
1 sec
500 msec
500 msec
Air Data Computer (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital ADC to FMS Link Summary

The Air Data Computer (ADC) provides True Air Speed (TAS), Pressure Altitude (P.ALT.) and
Baro Corrected Altitude to the FMS following ARINC 429 specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
102-002
203-006
204-006
205-002
206-002
210-006
212-002
213-002
234-006
237-025
DESCRIPTION
Mode Control Panel
Selected Altitude
Pressure Altitude
Mach Number
Corrected Airspeed
Or Indicated Airspeed
True Air Speed
Vertical Rate
Baro Correction
Barometric Correction
TX RATE
65 msec
450 msec
450 msec
125 msec
125 msec
100 msec
65 msec
500 msec
50 msec
50 msec
When a Rockwell, Barco or AHCAS2 EFIS is installed, the crew selected altitude type (barocorrected or standard) is also provided via label 170.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
170-006
DESCRIPTION
DH Selected
TX RATE
100 msec
34-61-14
Page 35
May 10, 2007

C.
Air Data Computer (ARINC 575)

(1)
Digital ADC to FMS Link Summary

The Air Data Computer (ADC) provides True Air Speed (TAS), Pressure Altitude (P.ALT.) and
Baro Corrected Altitude to the FMS following ARINC 575 specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
210-575
203-575
204-575
D.
DESCRIPTION
True Air Speed
Pressure Altitude
Barometric Altitude
TX RATE
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
Attitude and Heading Reference System (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital AHRS to FMS Link Summary

The Attitude And Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides True & Magnetic Heading, to
the FMS following the ARINC 429 specifications. The FMS gives priority to the TRUE
heading when both labels are available.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
314-005
320-005
DESCRIPTION
True Heading
Magnetic Heading
TX RATE
50 msec
50 msec
When a Rockwell or Barco EFIS is installed, the heading source selection is also provided
via label 275.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
275-025
(2)
DESCRIPTION
EFIS status
TX RATE
200 msec
Central Reference Primaire (CRP) AHRS to FMS Link Summary

This section identifies the labels received by the FMS from an AHRS of type CRP
LABEL-EQUIP ID
350-005
320-005
DESCRIPTION
AHRS status
Magnetic Heading
TX RATE
80 msec
20 msec
34-61-14
Page 36
May 10, 2007

E.
Automatic Flight Control System

(1)
AFCS to FMS Link Summary

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 outputs that are supplied by the
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) to the FMS.
NOTE: LABEL 300 is always valid, regardless of the SSM value. It is used to compute tail
deformation compensation value on helicopter.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
300-025
(2)
DESCRIPTION
Engines Hinge Moment
TX RATE
200 msec
FMS to Digital AFCS Link Summary

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 outputs that are supplied by the FMS to
the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS).
LABEL-EQUIP ID
121-002
214-002a* (see note)
216-002a* (see note)
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
Horizontal Command
Track Angle Error For Steering
Control
Cross-Track Distance For
Steering Control
TX RATE
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
Labels 214 and 216 are installation configurable through the A429 GENERAL EQP
1/6 page
(a) Horizontal Command Output Characteristics

The Horizontal Command to the AFCS has the following characteristics:
Refresh rate = 100 msec
Maximum bank angle = +/- 10 to 30 degrees based on configuration
Maximum roll rate = 2.5 degrees/sec to 4.0 degrees/sec
The "Status Matrix" should be interpreted as follows:
NOTE: When the "NO COMPUTED DATA" status is set, the data should not be used for
flight guidance.
34-61-14
Page 37
May 10, 2007

Normal:
No Computed Data:
F.
- Valid roll command

- System failures
- Heading failure when not in GPS navigation mode or when
flying a heading leg (heading to altitude, ...)
- TAS failure when navigating in DR mode.
- Aircraft airborne and speed below minimum speed.
- Undefined active waypoint (Disco, end of route, no route)
- Aircraft is not on intercept heading/course (installation
configurable).
- Unable to meet approach criteria 2 nm inbound to FAF.
Checker (ARINC 429)

This equipment is used for testing purposes, it allows the user to monitor and transmit ARINC
labels from a Maintenance page (A429 I/O CHECKER page)
NOTE: The checker (CHK) is configured on a single ARINC 429 input bus and/or on a single
ARINC 429 output bus.
G.
Collins DME-442/DME-4000 Distance Measuring Equipment Receiver (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital DME to FMS Link Summary

The COLLINS 442 or COLLINS 4000 Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) Receiver
provides the frequency of the DME station tuned, the distance to the DME station and the
DME station identifier to the FMS. This is done in accordance with the GAMA specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
035-009
202-009
DESCRIPTION
DME Frequency
Distance from Station
TX RATE
100 msec
100 msec
The FMS is expecting these labels from the DME receiver, in the following sequence:
CH 1 - FREQ(035), DIST(202)
CH 2 - FREQ(035), DIST(202)
CH 3 - FREQ(035), DIST(202)
CH 1 - FREQ(035), DIST(202), IDENT(300), IDENT(300)
NOTE:
The CMA-9000 is not using the DME station identifier ARINC 429 label 300-009 at
this stage (Future Growth).
34-61-14
Page 38
May 10, 2007

(2)
FMS to Digital DME Link Summary

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 RADIO TUNING output, supplied by the
FMS to the COLLINS 442 or COLLINS 4000 DME receiver.
The FMS sends an output of the next frequency to be tuned by the DME receiver. The
frequency identifies a particular DME station.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
035-002
H.
DESCRIPTION
DME Frequency
TX RATE
100 msec
Collins 700 Distance Measuring Equipment Receiver (ARINC 429)

(1)

The COLLINS 700 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT (DME) RECEIVER provides the
frequency of the DME station tuned and the distance to the DME station to the FMS. This is
done in accordance with the ARINC specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
035-009a
DESCRIPTION
DME Frequency
TX RATE
200 msec
202-009a
Distance From Station
167 msec
The FMS is expecting these labels from the DME receiver, in the following sequence:
CH 1 - FREQ(035), DIST(202)
CH 2 - FREQ(035), DIST(202)
CH 3 - FREQ(035), DIST(202)
NOTE:
(2)
The CMA-9000 is not using the DME station identifier ARINC 429 label 300-009 at
this stage (Future Growth).
FMS to Digital DME Link Summary

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 RADIO TUNING output, supplied by the
FMS to the COLLINS 700 DME receiver.
The FMS sends an output of the next frequency to be tuned by the DME receiver. The
frequency identifies a particular DME station.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
035-002a
DESCRIPTION
DME Frequency
TX RATE
100 msec
34-61-14
Page 39
May 10, 2007

I.
Chelton DM-441B Distance Measuring Equipment Receiver (ARINC

The Chelton DM-441B used to be known as the Bendix King DME receiver 441B.
(1)
Digital FMS to Digital DME Link Summary

The DME requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it is
attached. The labels of interest to the DME are listed below.
NOTE:
Output for hold mode channel only when in hold mode. NAV radio paired channels
may be tuned directly by the NAV radio output or by using the FMS output.
The outputs listed below are formatted in accordance with the General Aviation Manufacturers
Association (GAMA) specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
035-002
(2)
DESCRIPTION
DME Frequency
TX RATE
100 msec,
Burst
REMARKS
Output on CH 3 for
Navigator, CH4, 5 for Hold
mode (burst), CH1, 2 when
paired with NAV receiver.

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and transmission protocol of the inputs to
the FMS from the DME radio.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
035-009
202-009
J.
DESCRIPTION
DME Frequency
DME Distance
RATE
150 msec
150 msec
ARINC 615 Data Loader Unit (ARINC 429)

The ARINC 615 capable data loader unit sends/receives data to/from the FMS. The communication
between the DLU and FMS takes place over the ARINC high speed data link using label 226 as per
the ARINC 615-3 specification.
K.
GAMA EFIS Interface Description

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 outputs that are supplied by the FMS to an
EIS. The outputs are formatted to follow the GAMA specifications (General Aviation Manufacturers
Association).
34-61-14
Page 40
May 10, 2007

(1)
FMS to Digital Sperry EIS (Airline Version) Link Summary

The FMS transmits the following labels according to the table below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
001-002
056-002
114-002
115-002
116-002a
117-002a
121-002
125-002
147-002
251-002
252-002
261-002
275-002a
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
315-002
316-002
321-002
326-002
352-002
371-002
DESCRIPTION
Distance To The "To" Waypoint
Estimated GMT At End Of Route
Desired Track (True)
Bearing To Waypoint (True)
Cross Track Distance
Vertical Deviation
Horizontal Command
Greenwich Meantime
Magnetic Variation
Distance To Go
Time To Go
GPS Discrete Word
FMS Status
Present Position Latitude
Present Position Longitude
Ground Speed
Track Angle (True)
True Heading
Wind Speed
Wind Angle (From) (True)
Drift Angle
Lateral Scale Factor
Estimated Time To Destination
Manufacturer Ident Code
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1 sec
200 msec
200 msec
1 sec
3 times/sec
200 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
50 msec
100 msec
1 sec
1 sec
This table provides the list of labels transmitted for route and navaid output and their rate of
transmission.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
074-002
075-002a
113-002
300-002
301-002
302-002
303-002
304-002
305-002
306-002
307-002
*
DESCRIPTION
Data Record Header
Active WPT From/To
Message Checksum
Station Type/Class
Message Character 7-9
Message Control Word
Waypoint Latitude
Waypoint Longitude
TX RATE
*
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1/ Fixed rate at 10 seconds.

2/ Continuous rate depending on number of waypoints.
34-61-14
Page 41
May 10, 2007

(2)
FMS to Digital Sperry EIS (General Aviation Version) Link Summary

The FMS will transmit the following labels according to the table below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
001-002
056-002
114-002a
115-002
116-002
117-002a
121-002
125-002
147-002
251-002
252-002
261-002
275-002
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
315-002
316-002
321-002
326-002
352-002
371-002
DESCRIPTION
Estimated GMT At End Of Route
Desired Track (Magnetic)
Vertical Deviation
Horizontal Command
Greenwich Meantime
Magnetic Variation
Distance To Go
Time To Go
GPS Discrete Word
FMS Status
Ground Speed
Track Angle (True)
True Heading
Wind Speed
Drift Angle
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1 sec
200 msec
200 msec
1 sec
3 times/sec
200 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
50 msec
100 msec
1 sec
1 sec
This table provides the list of labels transmitted for route and navaid output and their rate of
transmission.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
074-002
075-002a
113-002
300-002
301-002
302-002
303-002
304-002
305-002
306-002
307-002
*
DESCRIPTION
Data Record Header
Active WPT From/To
Message Checksum
Station Type/Class
Waypoint Latitude
Waypoint Longitude
TX RATE
*
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec

34-61-14
Page 42
May 10, 2007

(3)
FMS to Digital EIS (GAMA compliant) Link Summary

The FMS transmits the following labels according to the table below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
100-002
114-002
115-002
116-002
117-002a
121-002
147-002
150-002
251-002
252-002
261-002
275-002b
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
315-002
316-002
321-002
326-002
352-002
371-002
DESCRIPTION
Selected Intercept Course (True/Mag)
Vertical Deviation
Horizontal Command
Magnetic Variation
Greenwich Mean Time
Distance To Go
Time To Go
GPS Discrete Word
FMS Status
Ground Speed
Track Angle (True)
True Heading
Wind Speed
Drift Angle
TX RATE
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1 sec
100 msec
200 msec
200 msec
1 sec
3 times/sec
200 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
50 msec
100 msec
1 sec
1 sec
This table provides the labels transmitted at for route and navaid output and their rate of
transmission.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
074-002
075-002a
113-002
300-002
301-002
302-002
303-002
304-002
305-002
306-002
307-002
*
DESCRIPTION
Data Record Header
Active WPT From/To
Message Checksum
Station Type/Class
Waypoint Latitude
Waypoint Longitude
TX RATE
*
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec

34-61-14
Page 43
May 10, 2007

(4)
FMS to Sextant Digital EIS (GAMA compliant, Avionique Nouvelle) Link Summary
This table provides the labels transmitted at a fixed rate and their rate of transmission.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
100-002
114-002
115-002
116-002
117-002a
121-002
147-002
150-002
172-002a
251-002
252-002
261-002
270-002a
275-002c
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
315-002
316-002
321-002
326-002
352-002
371-002
DESCRIPTION
Selected Intercept Course (True/Mag)
Vertical Deviation
Horizontal Command
Magnetic Variation
Greenwich Mean Time
ACK Of DMAP WPT TXFR
Distance To Go
Time To Go
GPS Discrete Word
FMS Status
FMS Status
Ground Speed
Track Angle (True)
True Heading
Wind Speed
Drift Angle
TX RATE
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1 sec
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
200 msec
1 sec
100 msec
3 times/sec
200 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
50 msec
100 msec
1 sec
1 sec
This table provides the labels transmitted at for route and navaid output and their rate of
transmission.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
DESCRIPTION
TX RATE
074-002
Data Record Header
*
075-002a
Active WPT From/To
100 msec
113-002
Message Checksum
100 msec
300-002
Station Type/Class
100 msec
301-002
100 msec
302-002
100 msec
303-002c
100 msec
304-002
100 msec
305-002
100 msec
306-002
Waypoint Latitude
100 msec
307-002
Waypoint Longitude
100 msec
*
34-61-14
Page 44
May 10, 2007

(5)
FMS to Rockwell/Rockwell2/AHCAS2 Custom EIS (GAMA Compliant) Link Summary

This table provides the labels transmitted and their rate of transmission.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
074-002
075-002
076-002
113-002
114-002
115-002
116-002
117-002a
121-002
140-002
147-002
150-002
164-002
172-002a
203-002
204-002
210-002
216-002
220-002
251-002
252-002
260-all except 002c
270-002b
271-002
275-002a
300-002
303-002d
304-002
305-002
306-002
307-002
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002a
314-002
315-002
316-002
321-002a
326-002
352-002
371-002
DESCRIPTION
Data Record Header
Active WPT From/To
Msl Altitude (From GPS)
Message Checksum
Vertical Deviation
Horizontal Command
Roll Steering
Magnetic Variation
Time Utc
Radio Height
ACK Of DMAP WPT TXFR
Standard ALT
Corrected ALT
True Airspeed
Cross Track Offset
INS/GPS Altitude
Distance To Go
Time To Go
Date (D/M/Y)
Status Word
FMS Failure Word
FMS Status Word
Station Type/Class
Waypoint Latitude
Waypoint Longitude
Ground Speed
Track Angle (True)
True Heading
Wind Speed
Drift Angle
TX RATE
See NOTE
100 msec
200 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1 sec
300 msec
200 msec
100 msec
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
1 sec
200 msec
200 msec
1 sec
1 sec
333 msec
1 sec
333 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
100 msec
50 msec
333 msec
333 msec
100 msec
333 msec
1 sec
1 sec
34-61-14
Page 45
May 10, 2007

NOTE:
(6)
Fixed rate at 10 seconds.

Continuous Rate Depending on Number of Waypoints.
Rockwell/Rockwell2 EFIS to FMS Summary

The FMS will receive from the Rockwell/Rockwell2 EFIS units the following input ARINC 429
labels and decode them via the input EFIS (EFI) equipment:
LABEL-EQUIP ID
005 - 025b
006 - 025b
063-025b
067-025b
167-025
274-025b
275 - 025a
320- 005a
(7)
RECEIVED FROM
ROCKWELL2
ROCKWELL2
ROCKWELL2
ROCKWELL2
ROCKWELL2
ROCKWELL2
ROCKWELL/ROCKWELL2
ROCKWELL
DESCRIPTION
AFCS Vx velocity
AFCS Vy velocity
Fix marker for transdown
Roll/Yaw Active mode
Hover height
AHRS Status word
ND Status - EFIS Switch Label
EFIS Heading Angle
TX RATE
200 ms
200 ms
50 ms
200 ms
40 ms
200 ms
200 ms
20 ms
FMS to BARCO GAMA EFIS (GAMA Compliant) Link Summary
34-61-14
Page 46
May 10, 2007

LABEL-EQUIP ID
074-002
075-002a
076-002
113-002
114-002
115-002
116-002
117-002a
121-002
140-002
147-002
150-002
203-002
204-002
210-002
216-002
251-002
252-002
260-all except 002c
270-002b
271-002
275-002a
300-002
303-002d
304-002
305-002
306-002
307-002
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002a
314-002a
315-002
316-002
321-002a
326-002
352-002
371-002
DESCRIPTION
Data Record Header
Active WPT From/To
MSL Altitude (From GPS)
Message Checksum
Vertical Deviation
Horizontal Command
Roll Steering
Magnetic Variation
Time UTC
Standard ALT
Corrected ALT
True Airspeed
Cross Track Offset
Distance To Go
Time To Go
Date (D/M/Y)
Status Word
FMS Failure Word
FMS Status Word
Station Type/Class
Waypoint Latitude
Waypoint Longitude
Ground Speed
Track Angle (True)
True Heading
Wind Speed
Drift Angle
TX RATE
10 sec less See NOTE 1
100 msec
200 msec See NOTE 3
100 msec See NOTE 4
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1 sec
300 msec
200 msec See NOTE 2
200 msec See NOTE 2
200 msec See NOTE 2
1 sec
200 msec
1 sec
1 sec
333 msec
1 sec
333 msec
100 msec See NOTE 4,5
100 msec See NOTE 4
100 msec See NOTE 4
100 msec See NOTE 4
100 msec See NOTE 4
100 msec See NOTE 4
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
100 msec
50 msec
333 msec
333 msec
100 msec
333 msec
1 sec
1 sec
34-61-14
Page 47
May 10, 2007

NOTES:
1. Label 113 transmission rate depends on the following:
Fixed rate at 10 seconds.
Continuous rate depends on number of waypoints, navaids, and airports to be

transmitted. The resulting rate may be faster than once every 10 seconds.
2. Labels 203, 204, and 210 are repeated from the air data computer.
3. Label 076 GPS MSL Altitude is repeated from the GPS Sensor.
4. Each label in a record is sent 10 times per second.
5. Station type, class is only sent for NAVAID records.
6. Transmission of these labels is optional depending on the length of the ident. They may
be transmitted with NUL characters even if the ident is less than 7 characters long.
(8)
BARCO EFIS to FMS Summary

The FMS will receive from the BARCO EFIS units the following input ARINC 429 labels and
decode them via the input EFIS (EFI) equipment:
LABEL-EQUIP ID
271-025
DESCRIPTION
PFD Configuration
RATE
200 ms
34-61-14
Page 48
May 10, 2007

(9)
FMS to Meggit EIS (GAMA Compliant) Link Summary

This table provides the labels transmitted and their rate of transmission.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
001-002
012-002
074-002
075-002
100-002
113-002
114-002
115-002
116-002
117-002a
121-002
125-002
147-002
251-002
252-002
260-All
261-002
275-002a
300-002
303-002e
304-002
305-002
306-002
307-002
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
315-002
316-002
317-002
320-002
321-002a
326-002
352-002
371-002
377-002
NOTE 1:
DESCRIPTION
Ground Speed
Data Record Header
Active WPT From/To
Selected Intercept Course
Message Checksum
Vertical Deviation
Horizontal Command
Greenwich Mean Time
Magnetic Variation
Distance To Go
Time To Go
Date (D/M/Y)
GPS Discrete Word
FMS Status Word
Station Type/Class
Waypoint Latitude
Waypoint Longitude
Ground Speed
Track Angle (True)
True Heading
Wind Speed
Track Angle (Magnetic)
Magnetic Heading Angle
Drift Angle
Equipment Hex ID
TX RATE
200 sec
500 msec
See Note 1
1 sec
200 msec
100 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
1 sec
200 msec
200 msec
1 sec
1 sec
333 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
100 msec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
- Fix rate at 4 sec.

- Continuous rate depending on number of waypoints.
34-61-14
Page 49
May 10, 2007

L.
IFDS and AHCAS/AHCAS2 EFIS Interface Description

(1)
IFDS/AHCAS/AHCAS2 to FMS Summary

The FMS will receive from the IFDS or AHCAS2 units the following input ARINC 429 labels
and decode them via the input EFIS (EFI) equipment:
LABEL-EQUIP ID
071 -025
111 - 025
113 - 025
167 - 025
273 - 025
275 - 025
320 - (all)
320 - 005b
320 - 005
360 - 025
361 - 025
(2)
DESCRIPTION
RATE
AHCAS Joystick Discrete Word 1

AHCAS Joystick Discrete Word 2
Aircraft gross weight
Hover height
Roll/Yaw Active mode
Return Armed mode (Automatic Hover mode)
Heading Angle
AHCAS Heading Angle
AHRS Status Word
AHCAS Joystick Latitude
AHCAS Joystick Longitude
25 ms
25 ms
200 ms
40 ms
200 ms
40 ms
20 ms
25 ms
80 ms
150 ms
150 ms
FMS to IFDS/AHCAS Link Summary

(a) Navigation Sub-frame
Except for labels 124 and 125, all other labels are sent with SDI=00 for this sub-frame.
Labels 124 and 125 will be sent with SDI 00 (used by the Plan sub-frame) and 10 (used
by the Preparation sub-frame).
The FMS will transmit the following ARINC 429 labels over the Navigation sub-frame at
specific rates as defined in the table below.
LABELS-EQUIP ID
012-002
026-002c
027-002c
036-002c
037-002c
076-002a
113-002c
114-002b
115-002
116-002
117-002a
120-002a
120-002a
124-002c
125-002c
140-002
DESCRIPTION
Ground speed (BCD)
Active route ident (first 7, 8 and 9)
Active route ident (first 10, 11 and 12)
Active route ident (characters 1, 2 and 3)
Active route ident (characters 4, 5 and 6)
GPS altitude
Selected radial magnetic
Desired track DTK magnetic
Bearing next waypoint
Cross track distance XTK
VERTICAL DEVIATION
FMS Latitude Fine
FMS Longitude Fine
TO waypoint number and Destination type
Pattern type & starting waypoint number
Roll command
RATE
333.33 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
333.33 ms
333.33 ms
200 ms
100 ms
100 msec
200 ms
200 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
34-61-14
Page 50
May 10, 2007

LABELS-EQUIP ID
150-002
163-002
164-002
201-002
203-002
204-002
216-002
220-002
251-002
252-002
260-002c
266-002
270-002c
270-002d
275-002a
300-002a
304-002s
310-002a
311-002a
312-002
314-002
315-002
317-002c
321-002a
326-002
340-002
341-002
342-002
343-002
372-002
DESCRIPTION
GMT Time
Track Angle Error TKE
Radio height
Distance to go (BCD)
Pressure Altitude
(FMS) Baro Corrected Altitude
Cross Track Offset
ALT INS/GPS
Distance to go (BNR)
Time to go
Date
H/C Delta Mass
FMS Status (IFDS)
FMS Status (AHCAS)
FMS Status word 2
ACK of DMAP wpt xfer / True/Mag
Magnetic variation
FMS Latitude Coarse
FMS Longitude Coarse
Ground speed (BNR)
True Heading
Wind speed
Track angle magnetic
Drift angle
HIS scale
PLS Waypoint Latitude
PLS Waypoint Longitude
DMAP Center Waypoint Latitude
DMAP Center Waypoint Longitude
Wind direction magnetic
RATE
1000 ms
333.33 ms
200 ms
333.33 ms
200 ms
200 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
100 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
333.33 ms
200 ms
200 ms
333.33 ms
200 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
200 ms
200 ms
200 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
333.33 ms
333.33 ms
200 ms
200 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
(b) Waypoint Data Sub-frames

1
Sector Sub-frame
This sub-frame will contain all the parameters defining an active flight plan or pattern.
The FMS will transmit this sub-frame all the time with all the parameters having
SDI=00 and a refresh rate of 1800 ms (which makes this sub-frame distinct of the
"navigation" sub-frame). The parameters that are not used are sent with SSM NCD.
The parameters of this frame are listed in the table above. The transmission order of
this sub-frame is as follows: FROM, TO, TO+1, , TO+9.
For a Hover procedure the sector sub-frame will contain the TDN and MRK waypoints
in the last but one and respectively last position of the transmission.
34-61-14
Page 51
May 10, 2007

Plan Sub-frame
This sub-frame will contain all the parameters necessary to define an active flight
plan or pattern. The FMS will transmit this sub-frame all the time with all parameters
having SDI = 01 and a refresh rate of 1800 ms. The parameters that are not used are
sent with SSM NCD. The sub-frame update is done in increasing order starting with
the CENTER waypoint and finishing with waypoint (TO+9). The parameters of this
sub-frame are listed in the table above.
In order to properly display the Plan sub-frame information, the IFDS will use the
information sent in the ARINC labels 124-00 and 125-00 of the navigation sub-frame.
For a Hover procedure the plan sub-frame will contain the TDN and MRK waypoints
always in the (TO+8) and (TO+9) positions.
3
Preparation Sub-frame
This sub-frame will contain all the parameters necessary to define a flight plan or a
pattern that is being prepared (see NOTE 1). This sub-frame is sent all the time. All
the parameters are sent with SDI = 10 and a refresh rate of 1800 ms. Unused
parameters are sent with SSM NCD.
Patterns are transmitted in the Preparation sub-frame only when there is no active
hover procedure, holding pattern and search pattern in the Active route.
In the particular case of waypoint identifiers, the waypoint ident parameters will
always be sent NCD, except when the Inactive route is transmitted in the Preparation
sub-frame, in which case the waypoint ident parameters are sent with SSM NORM
only for those waypoints defined in the Inactive route.
This sub-frame will contain all the parameters necessary to transmit the information
related to one of the procedures or route selected according to the priority logic
defined below:
an offset leg if one is defined in the Active route; else

a holding pattern if a holding pattern waypoint is defined in the Active route or
modified Active route and is located in the route before any discontinuity (if
one exists) and before any search waypoint (if one exists) which was not
created off-route (see NOTE 2); else
a search pattern if a search pattern waypoint is defined in the Active route or
modified Active route and is located in the route before any discontinuity (if
one exists); else
the Inactive route, if one is defined.
NOTE 1:
In order to display correctly the Preparation sub-frame, the IFDS uses the
information sent in the navigation sub-frame on the ARINC labels 124-10
and 125-10.
34-61-14
Page 52
May 10, 2007

NOTE 2:
A holding pattern waypoint always has priority over a search pattern

waypoint created off-route. Off-route search pattern waypoints are created
from the CDU SAR pages using a search waypoint Ident or a search
waypoint Reference Ident and are always inserted as the first waypoint of
the route.
It is important to clarify that Off-route SAR waypoints are actually part of
the route. The term "Off route" relates to their nature fof being created
outside of the planned route, e.g. they are "Off route".
Waypoint Data
For a pattern other than hover, the FMS will send the waypoint identifier as NCD.
For a hover procedure, waypoint identifiers are sent only for TRANSDOWN (TDN)
and MARK ON TOP (MRK) waypoints; NCD for others.
Within each sub-frame and at every 100ms, the FMS will transmit all data related to
each waypoint in the following order: LAT, LON, and ident (4 ARINC labels).
Each sub-frame is refreshed every 1800ms.
NOTE: The transmission of all 11 waypoints for each sub-frame requires 1100ms.
Therefore, 7 additional empty transmission slots of 100ms are required to
make up the 1800ms sub-frame refresh rate.
The FMS will transmit to the IFDS EFIS the Active route waypoints (via Sector and
Plan sub-frames) or Inactive route waypoints (via Preparation sub-frame) with the '/'
character appended followed by the attribute 'H' for a holding pattern or 'O' for overfly
or 'S' for a search pattern,. T' for a Tactical DTO and 'R' for Radial-To.
(c) Holding pattern

For a holding pattern in order to display on the IFDS EFIS the same active leg in both
plan and sector sub-frames, the FMS will compute a supplementary leg of zero length
that is super-imposed on the holding fix.
(d) DME arcs and Fix Radius turns (arc legs)
When legs of types "Arc to a Fix" and "Radius to a Fix" are encountered in the Active
route or when a Hover procedure becomes active in the Active route, the FMS will
compute intermediate arc waypoints in order to draw the desired arc (Sector and Plan
sub-frames only). No identifiers are provided for those intermediate arc waypoints.
When legs of types "Arc to a Fix" and "Radius to a Fix" are encountered in the Inactive
route (Preparation sub-frame only), no intermediate arc waypoints are computed.
34-61-14
Page 53
May 10, 2007

(e) Tactical DTO waypoint

When a route waypoint with a Tactical DTO qualifier ("/T") becomes the Active TO
waypoint, then the FMS will replace on IFDS EFIS the display of any existing legs leading
to the Tactical DTO waypoint by an initial leg starting from aircraft present position to the
waypoint. Once the waypoint is overflown, the FMS will no longer connect aircraft present
position to the waypoint. If the Tactical DTO qualifier is removed from the Active TO
waypoint before it is overflown, then the FMS will display back on IFDS EFIS the original
leg as specified by the attributes of the active FROM/TO waypoints.
(f)
Active Leg Backwards Extension

Upon engaging specific leg types for which the displayed leg course on IFDS EFIS does
not match the desired course (e.g. CF, CI, VI, CA, VA, CD, VD, CR, VR, FA, FC, FD legs
and downpath DF leg), the FMS will re-draw on IFDS EFIS, in lieu of the active leg and
any existing previous legs, a new active leg whose course matches the desired course
and which extends backwards from the active waypoint.
(g) Search pattern

In order to display a search pattern on the IFDS & AHCAS EFIS types, the FMS will
transmit, via the Sector, Plan and Preparation sub-frames, a maximum of 10 search
pattern waypoints at a time out of the total 80 search pattern waypoints (including the
search pattern origin). The origin identifier will be transmitted over the Sector and Plan
sub-frames only. In addition, for the AHCAS EFIS type only, search pattern waypoints
(excluding the origin) will be transmitted, via the Sector, Plan and Preparation subframes, with valid identifiers of the form "nn", where nn is a number whose range is [01,
79].
M.
ARINC 702 EFIS Interface Description

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 outputs supplied to an EHSI. The outputs are
transmitted in alternating blocks of dynamic and background data, according to the ARINC 702A
specification.
(1)
ARINC 702 EFIS to FMS Link Summary

The data sent from the EHSI to the FMS consists of the map mode, scale and symbol option
selections made by the flight crew on the EHSI control panel. These selections are encoded
into the discrete words listed below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
272-002a
273-002
DESCRIPTION
EFIS Discrete #1
EFIS Discrete #2
TX RATE
200 msec
200 msec
34-61-14
Page 54
May 10, 2007

(2)
FMS to ARINC 702 EFIS Link Summary

FMS to Smiths Industries 5-ATI EHSI:
DYNAMIC DATA
LABEL-EQUIP ID
DESCRIPTION
TX RATE (MSEC)
001-002
FMS Distance to Waypoint
1000
012-002
FMS Ground Speed (BCD)
1000
056-002a
Estimated Time of Arrival
1000
116-002
Cross-Track Distance
100
117-002
VERTICAL DEVIATION
100
126-002
Vertical Deviation
100
120-002
Range to Altitude
100
210-002
True Airspeed
100
271-002a
FMC Discrete Word 1
500
303-002b
Start of Dynamic Data
50
310-002
FMC Present Position - Latitude
100
311-002
FMC Present Position - Longitude
100
312-002
FMS Ground Speed
200
313-002
Track Angle True
50
315-002
Wind speed
1000
316-002
Wind Direction
200
317-002
Track Angle Magnetic
50
354-002
Alpha Numeric Text
1000
34-61-14
Page 55
May 10, 2007

BACKGROUND DATA
OCTAL
LABEL
BIT POSITION
PARAMETER
301
START OF TRANSMISSION (SOT)

(BACKGROUND)
303
START OF TRANSMISSION (SOT)

(DYNAMIC)
100
VECTOR - Active Flight Plan
300
VECTOR - Active Flight Plan Changes
040
VECTOR - Inactive Flight Plan
140
VECTOR - Radial
020
VECTOR - Offset Path
160
VECTOR IDENTIFIERS
250
SYMBOL: VORTAC + Identifier
150
SYMBOL: TUNED VORTAC (Astronautics only)
350
SYMBOL: VOR + Identifier
030
SYMBOL: TUNED VOR (Astronautics only)
230
SYMBOL: DME/TACAN + Identifier
130
SYMBOL: TUNED DME/TACAN (Astronautics)
330
SYMBOL: Waypoint + Identifier
070
SYMBOL: Active Waypoint + Identifier
270
SYMBOL: Airfield + Identifier
170
SYMBOL: Origin/Destination Airfield + Identifier
004
SYMBOL: Altitude Profile Point + Identifier
34-61-14
Page 56
May 10, 2007

BACKGROUND DATA (Cont'd)

OCTAL
LABEL
BIT POSITION
PARAMETER
104
SYMBOL: Conditional Waypoint

(Astronautics Only)
304
SYMBOL: Active Conditional Waypoint

(Astronautics Only)
204
SYMBOL: Selected Reference Point
244
SYMBOL: Selected Reference Point +

Distance
224
TEXT: Type 1 - Navigation Advisory
264
MAP REFERENCE GROUP - Latitude
164
MAP REFERENCE GROUP - Longitude
364
DISCRETE WORD - Map Mode
014
DISCRETE WORD - Range
054
ROTATED SYMBOLS: Runway + Ident
254
ROTATED SYMBOLS: Airport + Runway +

Ident
354
ROTATED SYMBOLS: Holding Pattern - R
034
ROTATED SYMBOLS: Holding Pattern - L
234
ROTATED SYMBOLS: Procedure Turn - R
134
ROTATED SYMBOLS: Procedure Turn - L
302
END OF TRANSMISSION (EOT)
000
FILL-IN WORDS
NOTE: The labels are shown in the order of transmission.

(3)
Map Data Updating

The FMS outputs map data to the EFIS every 50 msec, in alternating blocks of background
data (64 words) and dynamic data, until a complete map background data block of 512 words
are transmitted. After completion of the map background data transmission, the dynamic data
continues to be updated at 20 Hz until a new map background data block is transmitted. Map
background data is updated and transmitted once every 3 seconds, except on a mode, scale
or option change, when the FMS updates and transmits new map background data within 1
second.
34-61-14
Page 57
May 10, 2007

(4)
Dynamic Data Format

The first word of each dynamic data transmission is a Start of Dynamic Data (SOD) word,
label 303.
(5)
Background Data Format

(a) Start of Transmission Word
The first word of each 64-word data block is a Start Of Transmission (or SOT) word, label
301. Each SOT word contains a field indicating the position of the block in the sequence of
such blocks into which the transmission is divided. This count is from 1 to 8. Each SOT
word also contains a binary count of the total number of usable background data words to
be contained in the transmission. This count does not include the SOT, EOT and fill-in
words, hence the maximum is 496. This count is set to zero in subsequent background
data blocks.
(b) End of Transmission Word
The last word of each 64-word data block is an End Of Transmission (EOT), label 302.
(c) Fill-in Word
The 62 usable data words of each map background data block contain the positional,
character and control information used by the EHSI to construct the map background. If
the final block of the transmission contains less than 62 useful words, it is padded with fill-in
words, label 000, and terminated with the End of Transmission word at position 64.
(d) Data Types
Seven types of data are transmitted as part of the EFIS background data: Control Words
(SOT, EOT, Filler), Position, Distance, Length, Angular, and Discrete.
(e) Data Type Word Groups
Three types of background data word groups may be transmitted: vector word groups,
symbol word groups, and map reference word groups. Word groups are formatted as a
sequence of data labels where the label field is used to encode the data type and the
sign/status matrix is used to designate the start and end of the group, as well as to identify
special control words, as follows:
31
0
0
1
1
BIT
30
1
0
1
0
WORD DESCRIPTION
First word of data type group
Intermediate position or character words
Control word, symbol rotation or vector conic data
Last word of data type group
34-61-14
Page 58
May 10, 2007

Vector Word Groups
VECTOR
WORD GROUP
OCTAL
LABEL
DATA FORMATS
POSITION
ANGULAR
DISTANCE
CHARACTER
Active Flight
Plan
100
Lat, Long
Inbound
course,
course
change
Turn
Radius
Inactive Flight
Plan
040
Lat, Long
Inbound
course,
course
change
Turn
Radius
Active Flight
Plan Changes
300
Lat, Long
Inbound
course,
course
change
Turn
Radius
Offset Flight
Plan
020
Lat, Long
Inbound
course,
course
change
Turn
Radius
Vector Identifiers
160
Offset
Distance +
Direction
Vector Radial
140
Lat, Long
34-61-14
Page 59
May 10, 2007

Symbol Word Groups
SYMBOL WORD
GROUPS
OCTAL
LABEL
DATA FORMATS
POSITION
ANGULAR
LENGTH
CHARACTER
VORTAC
(VOR/DME)
250
Lat, Long
Identifier
VOR
350
Lat, Long
Identifier
DME/TACAN
230
Lat, Long
Identifier
Airport
270
Lat, Long
Identifier
Origin/Dest Airport
170
Lat, Long
Identifier
Flight Plan
Waypoint
330
Lat, Long
Identifier +
Constraints
Conditional
Waypoint
104
Lat, Long
Identifier
Active Waypoint
070
Lat, Long
Identifier +
Constraints
Active Conditional
Waypoint
304
Lat, Long
Identifier
34-61-14
Page 60
May 10, 2007

SYMBOL WORD
GROUPS
OCTAL
LABEL
DATA FORMATS
POSITION
ANGULAR
LENGTH
CHARACTER
Rotated Airport
254
Lat, Long
Runway
Heading
Airport ID
Runway ID
Runway
054
Lat, Long
Runway
Heading
Paved
Length
Airport ID
Runway ID
Altitude Profile
Point
004
Lat, Long
Identifier
Selected
Reference Point
204
Lat, Long
SRP Distance
244
Lat, Long
Distance
Displayed
Distance
Holding Pattern
Left
034
Lat, Long
Inbound
Course
Holding Pattern
Right
354
Lat, Long
Inbound
Course
Proc Turn Left
134
Lat, Long
Inbound
Course
Proc Turn Right
234
Lat, Long
Inbound
Course
34-61-14
Page 61
May 10, 2007

Map Reference Word Groups
MAP REFERENCE
WORD GROUP
N.
OCTAL
LABEL
DATA FORMAT
POSITION
ANGULAR
LENGTH
CHARACTER
Plan Mode Ref Pt Lat
264
Lat
Plan Mode Ref Pt Long
164
Long
Discrete Word 1
364
Discrete Word 2
014
Fuel Computer
The Fuel Computer (FC) provides fuel contents and/or fuel flow to the FMS following the ARINC
429 specifications.
The FMS is configurable for single, dual or no FC inputs.
The FMS is configurable for fuel inputs displayed either in kilograms or pounds.
The FMS is configurable for 1 or 2 labels type for both fuel quantity and fuel flow.
The FMS has a configuration item for the value of the most significant bit of the fuel quantity and a
separate configuration item for the value of the most significant bit of the fuel flow.
The FMS has a configuration item for Source Destination Identifier (SDI OFF/ON) for both fuel
quantity and fuel flow.
O.
GPS Sensor
(1)
ARINC 743A Standard GPS Receiver which includes CMA-3024, CMA-3012 and CMA-3112
(a) Digital GPS to FMS Link Summary
34-61-14
Page 62
May 10, 2007

The FMS decodes the GPS sensor unit the labels listed in the following table, according to
the ARINC 743A specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
273-00B
076-00B
101-00B
102-00B
103-00B
110-00B
120-00B
111-00B
121-00B
112-00B
130-00B
133-00B
136-00B
140-00B
165-00B
166-00B
174-00B
247-00B
260-00B
150-00B
162-00B
343-00B
370-00B
DESCRIPTION
GPS Sensor Status
GPS Altitude
GPS HDOP
GPS VDOP
GPS Track Angle
GPS Latitude
GPS Latitude Fine
GPS Longitude
GPS Longitude Fine
GPS Ground Speed
GPS HIL (Integrity)
GPS VIL (Integrity)
GPS Vertical Fom
GPS UTC Fine
GPS Vertical Velocity
GPS N/S Velocity
GPS E/W Velocity
GPS Horizontal Fom
GPS Date
GPS UTC
GPS Destination WPT ETA
GPS Destination WPT HIL
GPS Height
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec*
1 sec*
1 sec
NOTE: The labels are shown in their transmission order. This order must be respected by the GPS receiver.
Labels 162 and 343 are sent when applicable.
34-61-14
Page 63
May 10, 2007

(b) FMS to Digital GPS Link Summary

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 outputs that are supplied by the FMS
to the GPS sensor. The outputs are formatted to follow the ARINC 743A specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
041-002
042-002
143-002
144-002
146-002
150-002
152-002
170-002
203-002
210-002
260-002
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
DESCRIPTION
Initialize Latitude
Initialize Longitude
Destination WPT Long.
Destination WPT Lat.
SV Deselect A
GMT (UC)
Destination WPT ETA
SV Deselect B
Pressure Altitude
True Air Speed
Date
Latitude
Longitude
Ground Speed
Track Angle True
True Heading
TX RATE
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
500 msec (2)
500 msec (2)
500 msec (2)
200 msec
500 msec (2)
500 msec (2)
50 msec
100 msec
1 sec
200 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
NOTES:
1. These words are transmitted in burst of 2 seconds duration on power-up and when a
new position is entered.
2. These words are transmitted in burst of 3 seconds duration when doing a predictive
RAIM request.
(c) GPS Time Mark input
(d) The GPS time mark discrete provides for the GPS to be synchronized with other aircraft
systems.
34-61-14
Page 64
May 10, 2007

(2)
ARINC 743 Standard GPS Receiver which includes HONEYWELL, HG2021GD02,

HG2021GD03 and TRIMBLE TASMAN TA-12.
(a) Digital GPS to FMS Link Summary
The GPS sensor unit provides the labels listed in the following table to the FMS, with
respect to the ARINC 743 specification.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
273-00B
076-00B
101-00B
102-00B
103-00B
110-00B
120-00B
111-00B
121-00B
112-00B
130-00Ba
136-00B
165-00B
166-00B
177-00B
247-00B
260-00B
150-00B
140-00B
162-00B
343-00B
DESCRIPTION
GPS Sensor Status
GPS Altitude
GPS HDOP
GPS VDOP
GPS Track Angle
GPS Latitude
GPS Latitude Fine
GPS Longitude
GPS Longitude Fine
GPS Ground Speed
GPS HIL (Integrity)
GPS Vertical Fom
GPS N/S Velocity
GPS E/W Velocity
GPS Horizontal Fom
GPS Date
GPS UTC
GPS UTC Fine
GPS Destination WPT ETA
GPS Destination WPT HIL
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
NOTE: The labels are shown in their transmission order. This order must be respected by the GPS receiver.
Labels 162 and 343 are sent when applicable.
34-61-14
Page 65
May 10, 2007

(b) FMS to Digital GPS Link Summary

This section provides information on the ARINC 429 outputs that are supplied by the FMS
to the GPS sensor. The outputs are formatted to follow the ARINC 743 specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
041-002
042-002
125-002
126-002
127-002
143-002
144-002
150-002
152-002
203-002
210-002
260-002
310-002
311-002
312-002
313-002
314-002
DESCRIPTION
Initialize Latitude
Initialize Longitude
Gmt (UC)
SV Deselect A
SV Deselect B
Destination WPT Long.
Destination WPT Lat.
GMT (UC)
Destination WPT ETA
Pressure Altitude
True Air Speed
Date
Latitude
Longitude
Ground Speed
Track Angle True
True Heading
TX RATE
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
200 msec
500 msec (2)
500 msec (2)
500 msec (2)
500 msec (2)
200 msec
500 msec (2)
50 msec
100 msec
1 sec
200 msec
200 msec
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
NOTES:
1.
These words are transmitted in burst of 2 seconds duration on power-up and when a new
position is entered.
2. These words are transmitted in burst of 3 seconds duration when doing a predictive
RAIM request.
(c) GPS Time Mark input
The GPS time mark discrete provides for the GPS to be synchronized with other aircraft
systems.
34-61-14
Page 66
May 10, 2007

P.
Flight Recorder
When configured, this equipment transmits data for the ACMS and the lables defined below:
LABEL-EQUIP ID
44-002
45-002
45-002
276-002a
347-002a
350-002a
351-002a
352-002a
353-002a
355-002a
356-002a
357-002a
362-002a
363-002
Q.
DESCRIPTION
First 2 characters of Approach
Procedure Name
3rd and 4th characters of
Approach Procedure Name
Last 4 characters of Approach
Procedure Name
FMS VNAV Status discrete word
Maintenance VOR/DME latitude
Maintenance GPS latitude
Maintenance GPS longitude
Maintenance DME latitude
Maintenance DME longitude
Maintenance VOR/DME longitude
Maintenance Inertial latitude
Maintenance Inertial longitude
Desired vertical path angle for
approach VNAV
Target altitude
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
500 msec
Repeater
This equipment relays data from selected input port to selected output port.
NOTE:
The ARINC 429 labels received from a single ARINC 429 input bus (e.g. Single interface
equipment) can be configured to be repeated. The Reapeater can be configured to any
ARINC 429 output bus.
34-61-14
Page 67
May 10, 2007

R.
System Management Computer

(1)
Digital SMC to FMS Link Summary

The SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMPUTER (SMC) provides TOTAL FUEL CONTENTS and
FUEL FLOW RATE to the FMS following the ARINC 429 specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
247-048
347-048
S.
DESCRIPTION
Total Fuel Contents
Fuel Flow Rate
TX RATE
80 ms
80 ms
Chelton VN-411B, Collins VIR-432, Collins NAV-4500 NAV (VOR/ILS) RECEIVER (ARINC 429)
The Chelton VN-411B used to be known as the Bendix King NAV receiver 411B.
The Collins NAV-45000 combines a VOR/ILS/MB and an ADF receiver in the same enclosure.
The same interface protocol is compatible with Chelton VN411B and Collins VIR-432 and
NAV-4500.
(1)
Digital NAV to FMS Link Summary

The NAV or VOR RECEIVER provides the frequency of the VOR station tuned, the VOR omni
bearing to the FMS following the ARINC specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
034-011
222-011
(2)
DESCRIPTION
VOR/ILS Frequency
VOR Bearing Word
TX RATE
200 ms
200 ms
Digital FMS to NAV Link Summary

The NAV requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it is
attached. The labels of interest to the NAV are listed below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
034-002
DESCRIPTION
VOR/ILS Frequency
TX RATE
Burst/200 MS
REMARKS
Burst when backup CP
installed
34-61-14
Page 68
May 10, 2007

T.
VOR RECEIVER (ARINC 579)

(1)
Digital VOR to FMS Link Summary

The VOR RECEIVER provides the VOR omni bearing to the FMS following the ARINC 579
specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
222-579
U.
DESCRIPTION
VOR Bearing Word
TX RATE
200 ms
X-FMS for cross-talk (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital X-FMS to FMS Link Summary

In multiple-FMS installations, the FMS will transmit/accept the following labels to/from the
offside FMS(s), in accordance with proprietary protocol specifications for cross-talk.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
010-002x
011-002x
013-002x
014-002x
015-002x
016-002x
017-002x
020-002x
021-002x
022-002x
060-002x
061-002x
062-002x
063-002x
064-002x
065-002x
066-002x
067-002x
102-002x
205-002x
206-002x
212-002x
213-002x
226-002x
274-002x
277-002x
330-002a
DESCRIPTION
Best Sensor Latitude
Best Sensor Longitude
Best Sensor Track Angle
Best Sensor Ground Speed
True Air Speed
Heading
ADC Altitude
Best Sensor Latitude Fine
Best Sensor Longitude Fine
QNH
Block Transfer Data Word
Block Transfer Data Word
Best Sensor Accuracy (MS)
GPS HIL (Integrity)
Inbound Holding Course
INS Time In NAV
INS Actual Navigation Performance (ANP)
Best Sensor Accuracy (LS)
Selected Altitude
Mach Number
Computed Air Speed/Indicated Air Speed
Vertical Speed
Block Transfer Control Word
Cross-Talk Control/Status Word
EFIS Status Word
System Altitude
34-61-14
EXPECTED RATE
1sec
1sec
1sec
1sec
100 msec
50 msec
100 msec
1sec
1sec
50 msec
as required
as required
1sec
1sec
1sec (1)
5-10 sec
50 msec
1sec
1sec
1sec
1sec
1sec
1sec
as required
50 ms
50 ms
100 msec
Page 69
May 10, 2007

(a) This word is received only when the cross-side FMS is performing an entry procedure
into a holding pattern or is on a flight plan leg terminated by a holding fix.
(2)
FMS to Digital X-FMS Link Summary

The ARINC 429 labels are the same as listed in (1) above.
V.
Emergency Locator Transmitter ARTEX ELT-110-406HM/GPS (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital FMS to ELT Link Summary

The ELT requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it is
attached. The labels of interest to the ELT are listed below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
310-002x
311-002x
DESCRIPTION
TX RATE
100 msec
100 msec
W. Bendix King MST67A ATC Transponder (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital FMS to XPDR Link Summary

The transponder requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it
is attached. The labels of interest to the transponder are listed below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
031-002
DESCRIPTION
ACTRBS
TX RATE
100 - 200 msec or
Burst
In addition to the above label, the CMA-9000 outputs the following labels to the ATC to
support the Elementary Surveillance (ELS) (flight identification) requirement.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
233-002
234-002
235-002
236-002
DESCRIPTION
Flight ID (Char1/Char2)
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
34-61-14
Page 70
May 10, 2007

(2)
Digital XPDR to FMS Link Summary

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and transmission protocol of the inputs to the
CMA-9000 from the transponder.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
350-018
X.
DESCRIPTION
Mode S BIT Automatic Message Mode
TX RATE
500 1000 msec
Collins TDR 94D ATC Transponder (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital FMS to XPDR Link Summary

The transponder requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which
it is attached. The labels of interest to the transponder are listed below.
The CMA-900 will transmit transponder labels in either continuous or burst tuning modes
(installation configurable).
LABEL-EQUIP ID
031-002
DESCRIPTION
ACTRBS
TX RATE
100 - 200 msec
or Burst
In addition to the above label, the CMA-9000 outputs the following labels to the ATC.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
233-002
234-002
235-002
236-002
(2)
DESCRIPTION
TX RATE
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Digital XPDR to FMS Link Summary

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and transmission protocol of the inputs to
the FMS from the transponder.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
031-018b
350-018b
DESCRIPTION
Transponder Reply Word
Transponder diagnostics Word
TX RATE
500 1000 msec
500 1000 msec
34-61-14
Page 71
May 10, 2007

Y.
Chelton VC-401B VHF COM radio (ARINC 429)

The Chelton VC-401B used to be known as the Bendix-King VC-401B VHF COM radio. The
Chelton VC-401B supports only a frequency step of 25kHz.
(1)
Digital FMS to VHF Link Summary

The VHF radio requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it is
attached. The labels of interest to the VHF radio are listed below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
030-002
(2)
DESCRIPTION
VHF COM Frequency
(25 kHz Frequency Steps)
TX RATE
100 - 200 msec
or Burst
Digital VHF to FMS Link Summary

FMS from the VHF radio.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
030-016
Z.
DESCRIPTION
VHF COM Frequency
(25 kHz steps)
TX RATE
100 200 msec
Chelton VC-401C VHF Comm (ARINC 429)

The Chelton VC-401C used to be known as the Bendix-King VC-401C VHF COM radio. The
Chelton VC-401C supports both frequency steps of 25kHz and 8.33 kHz.
(1)
Digital FMS to VHF Link Summary

The VHF radio requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it is
attached. The labels of interest to the VHF radio are listed below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
030-002
047-002
DESCRIPTION
VHF COM Frequency
(25 kHz Steps)
VHF COM Frequency
(8.33 kHz Steps)
TX RATE
100 - 200 msec
or Burst
100 - 200 msec
or Burst
34-61-14
Page 72
May 10, 2007

(2)
Digital VHF to FMS Link Summary

FMS from the VHF radio.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
030-016
047-016
DESCRIPTION
VHF COM Frequency
(25 kHz frequency steps)
TX RATE
100 200 msec
VHF COM Frequency

(8.33 kHz frequency steps)
100 200 msec
AA. Chelton ADF-431B, Collins ADF-462 ADF (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital FMS to ADF Link Summary

The ADF requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it is
attached. The labels of interest to the ADF are listed below.
(2)
LABEL-EQUIP ID
032-002
DESCRIPTION
ADF Frequency
TX RATE
200 msec
320-002
Magnetic Heading
50 msec
Digital ADF to FMS Link Summary

FMS from the ADF radio.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
032-012
162-012
DESCRIPTION
ADF Frequency
Relative Bearing
TX RATE
200 msec
67.5 msec
REMARKS
echo
BB. Marconi Selenia SRT-651/N-A V/UHF radio (ARINC 429)

Either a single or no V/UHF is installation configurable via maintenance pages. After a V/UHF is
configured, the output can be moved to any ARINC 429 output bus.
(1)
Digital FMS to V/UHF Link Summary

The V/UHF requires only a portion of the data available on the ARINC 429 link to which it is
attached. The labels of interest to the V/UHF are listed below.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
271-002b
272-002b
273-002b
DESCRIPTION
V/UHF Command Word 1
MAX TX RATE
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
REMARKS
Tuning and mode setting
34-61-14
Page 73
May 10, 2007

(2)
Digital V/UHF to FMS Link Summary

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and the transmission protocol of the inputs to
the FMS from the V/UHF radio.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
271-017
272-017
273-017
274-017
DESCRIPTION
V/UHF Status Word 1
V/UHF Status Word 2
V/UHF Status Word 3
V/UHF Status Word 4
MAX TX RATE
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
REMARKS
Feedback label
Feedback label
Feedback label
Feedback label
CC. TEAM Audio Management Unit AMU (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital FMS to AMU Link Summary

The labels of interest to the AMU are listed below.
NOTE: These labels are only output to the AMU when the FMS is in control of the AMU.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
051-002b
053-002b
055-002b
155-002b
160-002b
275-002b
(2)
DESCRIPTION
COM 1/2 Volume
NAV 1/2 Volume
Intercom Volume
DME 1/2 or TACAN 1/2 Volume
ACM
CFM
MAX TX RATE
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
REMARKS
Volume setting
Volume setting
Volume setting
Volume setting
Aircraft configuration settings
Common Frequency mode
Digital AMU to FMS Link Summary

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and the transmission protocol of the inputs
to the FMS from the AMU.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
051-136
053-136
055-136
155-136
270-136
DESCRIPTION
COM 1/2 Volume
NAV 1/2 Volume
Intercom Volume
DME 1/2 or TACAN 1/2 Volume
AMU Status
MAX TX RATE
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
275-136
CFM
300 ms
REMARKS
Volume setting
Volume setting
Volume setting
Volume setting
Audio Board 1/2/3
status
Desensitization,
Mute, COM1/2/3 TX
34-61-14
Page 74
May 10, 2007

DD. Aircraft Piloting Inertial Reference System (APIRS SFIM)

(1)
Digital (APIRS SFIM) to FMS Link Summary

This input is for the purpose of Kalman Filtered navigation mode only, normal AHRS input
requires heading only (magnetic, true). The labels processing on this input will synchronize the
APIRS labels with the GPS Time Mark signal for use by the Kalman Filter.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
006-005
273-005
320-005
324-005
325-005
326-005
327-005
330-005
331-005
332-005
333-005
DESCRIPTION
Major/Minor Cycle #
General Operating Mode Status
Heading Angle
Pitch Angle
Roll Angle
Pitch Rate
Roll Rate
Yaw Rate
Longitudinal Acceleration
Lateral Accelleration
Normal Acceleration
TX RATE
128 Hz
64 Hz
64 Hz
64 Hz
64 Hz
128 Hz
128 Hz
128 Hz
128Hz
128 Hz
128 Hz
EE. Digital Map System

(1)
Digital DMAP to FMS Link Summary

The data input to the FMS from the DMAP comprises multi-waypoint flight plans, or singlewaypoint (direct-to) flight plans.
The inputs are formatted in accordance with the General Aviation Manufacturers Association
(GAMA) specifications.
34-61-14
Page 75
May 10, 2007

LABEL-EQUIP ID
074-0CEa
113-0CEa
301-0CEa
302-0CEa
303-0CEa
304-0CEa
305-0CEa
306-0CEa
307-0CEa
371-0CEa
DESCRIPTION
Data Record Header
Message Checksum
Waypoint Latitude
Waypoint Longitude
TX RATE
as required
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
REMARKS
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
NOTE 2,3
NOTE 2,3
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 1:
Transmitted once at the start of each route transmission.
NOTE 2:
The set of labels (303, 304, 305, 301, 302, 306, 307 and 113) specify the first
navigation point are transmitted immediately after Label 074. Each set of labels
specifying successive navigation points will follow at intervals of 100 milliseconds.
NOTE 3:
5
Not transmitted by the DMAP ELBIT unit.
(a)
Example of Transmission
The transmission of a normal or Direct-To flight plan from the DMAP to the FMS will follow
the example below. A Direct-To flight plan will consist of a single waypoint as follows:
T = 0.0 SECONDS (DIRECT-TO WAYPOINT, NO IDENTIFIER)
074
DATA RECORD HEADER
303
MESSAGE CONTROL WORD
304
WPT IDENT CHAR 1-3 (CHAR 1, 2, 3 = NUL)
305
301
302
306
WPT LATITUDE
307
WPT LONGITUDE
113
MESSAGE CHECKSUM
34-61-14
Page 76
May 10, 2007

FF. Data Concentrator

(1)
Digital FMS to Data Concentrator Link Summary

The Data Concentrator will receive data from the ARINC 429 link of the FMS but does not use
any data itself. The inputs needed will be configured on the input port connected to the Data
Concentrator. The labels received are described in the sections for those individual equipment
types.
NOTE: The Data Concentrator only receives data. If some equipment configured for the Data
Concentrator has outputs, those must be configured onto output busses in the normal
manner.
(2)
Digital Data Concentrator to FMS Link Summary

The FMS receives data from the Data Concentrator via up to two dedicated ARINC 429 links.
The labels listed below assume ADF, DME, NAV and ADC are installed on the Data
Concentrator, this is for example only, the actual labels expected will depend on the
equipment configuration.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
DESCRIPTION
032-012
ADF Frequency
TX RATE MAX
RATE
ALLOWED
135 msec
034-011
VOR/ILS Frequency
150 msec
035-009
DME Frequency
135 msec
162-012
202-009
203-006
204-006
210-006
222-011
ADF Bearing
DME Distance
Standard Altitude 1013.25
True Airspeed
VOR Omnibearing
45 msec
135 msec
20 Hz
20 Hz
20 Hz
100 msec
REMARKS
radio feedback
radio feedback
radio feedback,
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 1:
DME is a special equipment and can be installed only on one side of the Data
Concentrator (per equipment). All others may have redundant input on both
sides.
NOTE 2:
These parameters are transmitted or not depending on the ADC connected.
34-61-14
Page 77
May 10, 2007

GG. Radio Altimeter (ARINC 429)

(1)
Radio Altimeter to FMS Link Summary

The RADIO ALTIMETER provides RADIO ALTITUDE to the FMS following the ARINC 429
specifications.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
164-007
DESCRIPTION
Radio Altitude (BNR)
MAX RATE
200 msec
REMARKS
Altitude in feet
HH. LN-100GT Embedded GPS/INS Sensor (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital EGI to FMS Link Summary

the FMS from the LN-100GT EGI.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
010-00Be
011-00Be
076-00Be
103-00Be
110-00Be
111-00Be
112-00Be
120-00Be
121-00Be
150-00Be
163-004e
166-00Bf
171-004e
172-004e
174-00Bf
214-004e
220-004e
240-004e
240-00Be
243-004e
250-00Be
251-00Be
260-00Be
265-00Be
270-004e
270-004e
270-00Be
271-00Be
DESCRIPTION
GPS SA/AS Key Status
GPS Integrity
GPS Altitude Mean Sea Level
GPS Ground Track
GPS Latitude (MSW)
GPS Longitude (MSW)
GPS Ground Speed
GPS Latitude (LSW)
GPS Longitude (LSW)
GMT Time UTC
Navigation Time
North South GPS Speed
Hybrid Quality Factor
Pure Inertial Quality Factor
East West GPS Speed
Alignment Counter
Latitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (LSW)
GPS Est Horizontal Position Error
Longitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (LSW)
GPS Discrete Data #2
GPS Discrete Data #3
GPS Date
INS Output Status Label
Maintenance Label
GPS Discrete Data No 1
GPS Satellite Used 1-16
TX RATE
1sec
1 sec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
100 msec
1sec
40 msec
160 msec
40 msec
40 msec
160 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
1sec
1 sec
1sec
100 msec
40 msec
40 msec
100 msec
100 msec
34-61-14
Page 78
May 10, 2007

LABEL-EQUIP ID
272-00Be
276-00Be
277-00Be
301-004e
302-004e
306-004e
307-004e
310-004e
311-004e
314-004e
315-004f
316-004f
321-004e
324-004e
325-004e
340-00Be
340-004e
342-004e
343-004e
344-004e
345-004e
346-004e
350-004f
351-004f
365-004e
366-004e
367-004e
(2)
DESCRIPTION
GPS Satellite Used 17-32
GPS Dilution Factor, VDOP HDOP
GPS Dilution Factor, PDOP GDOP
Velocity North, Hybrid GPS
Velocity East, Hybrid GPS
Latitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (MSW)
Longitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (MSW)
Latitude Pure Inertial
Longitude Pure Inertial
True Heading
Wind speed
Wind direction
Drift Angle
Pitch Angle
Roll Angle
Satellites visible
X Lever Arm to GPS Antenna (+ Forward)
Z Lever Arm to GPS Antenna (+ Down)
Yaw Boresight
Pitch Boresight
Roll Boresight
Y Lever Arm to GPS Antenna (+ Right)
RAIM integrity
AAIM integrity
Velocity Vertical, Pure Inertial
Velocity North, Pure Inertial
Velocity East, Pure Inertial
TX RATE
100 msec
1sec
1sec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
160 msec
160 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
1sec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
160 msec
160 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
Digital FMS to EGI Link Summary

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and the transmission protocol of the outputs
from the FMS to the LN-100GT EGI.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
005-002s
006-002s
041-002
042-002
054-002s
055-002s
150-002
203-002
210-002
260-002s
270-002b
271-002a
304-002s
306-002
DESCRIPTION
Set Latitude WGS84, (LSW)
Set Longitude WGS84, (LSW)
Set Latitude WGS84, (MSW)
Set Longitude WGS84, (MSW)
Delta Latitude Update/ Pure INS
Delta Longitude Update/ Pure INS
GMT Time, UTC
Pressure Altitude (standard)
True Airspeed
Date
Discrete Data Input Status
Magnetic variation
Latitude INI/END
TX RATE
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
34-61-14
Page 79
May 10, 2007

LABEL-EQUIP ID
307-002
340-002s
342-002s
343-002s
344-002s
345-002s
346-002s
II.
DESCRIPTION
Longitude INI/END
X Lever Arm to GPS (+Fwd)
Z Lever Arm to GPS Antenna (+Dwn)
Yaw Boresight Entry
Pitch Boresight Entry
Roll Boresight Entry
Y Lever Arm to GPS Antenna (+Rt)
TX RATE
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
SIGMA50H Embedded GPS/INS Sensor (ARINC 429)

(1)
Digital EGI to FMS Link Summary

the FMS from the SIGMA50H EGI.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
010-00Bf
011-00Bf
076-00Bf
103-00Bf
110-00Bf
111-00Bf
112-00Bf
120-00Bf
121-00Bf
150-00Bf
163-004f
166-00Bf
171-004f
172-004f
174-00Bf
214-004f
220-004f
240-004f
240-00Bf
243-004f
260-00Bf
265-00Bf
270-004f
270-004f
270-00Bf
271-00Bf
276-00Bf
277-00Bf
301-004f
302-004f
306-004f
DESCRIPTION
GPS SA/AS Key Status
GPS Integrity
GPS Altitude Mean Sea Level
GPS Ground Track
GPS Latitude (MSW)
GPS Longitude (MSW)
GPS Ground Speed
GPS Latitude (LSW)
GPS Longitude (LSW)
GMT Time UTC
Navigation Time
North South GPS Speed
Hybrid/GPS Quality Factor
Hybrid/DVS Quality Factor
East West GPS Speed
Alignment Counter
Latitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (LSW)
GPS Est Horizontal Position Error
Longitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (LSW)
GPS Date
INS Output Status Label
Maintenance Label
GPS Discrete Data No 1
NB. GPS Satellite Used
GPS Dilution Factor, VDOP HDOP
GPS Dilution Factor, PDOP GDOP
Velocity North, Hybrid GPS
Velocity East, Hybrid GPS
Latitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (MSW)
34-61-14
RATE
960 msec
960 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
960 msec
40 msec
160 msec
40 msec
40 msec
160 msec
40 msec
160 msec
160 msec
960 msec
40 msec
960 msec
160 msec
40 msec
40 msec
160 msec
160 msec
960 msec
960 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
Page 80
May 10, 2007

(2)
LABEL-EQUIP ID
307-004f
DESCRIPTION
Longitude, Ppos Hyb GPS (MSW)
RATE
40 msec
310-004f
311-004f
314-004f
315-004f
315-00Bf
316-004f
316-00Bf
321-004f
324-004f
325-004f
340-004f
342-004f
343-004f
344-004f
345-004f
346-004f
350-004f
351-004f
365-004f
366-004f
367-004f
Latitude Pure INS/DVS

Longitude Pure INS/DVS
True Heading
Wind Speed
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
160 msec
Wind Direction
160 msec
Drift Angle
Pitch Angle
Roll Angle
X Lever Arm to GPS Antenna (+ Forward)
Z Lever Arm to GPS Antenna (+ Down)
Yaw Boresight
Pitch Boresight
Roll Boresight
RAIM Integrity
AAIM Integrity
Velocity Vertical, INS/DVS
Velocity North, INS/DVS
Velocity East, INS/DVS
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
160 msec
160 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
Digital FMS to EGI Link Summary

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and the transmission protocol of the
outputs from the FMS to the LN-100GT EGI.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
007-002
054-002s
055-002s
270-002b
271-002a
306-002
307-002
340-002s
342-002s
343-002s
344-002s
345-002s
346-002s
DESCRIPTION
Initial Altitude
Delta Latitude Update/ Pure INS
Delta Longitude Update/ Pure INS
Latitude INI/END
Longitude INI/END
X Lever Arm to GPS (+ Forward)
Z Lever Arm to GPS (+ Down)
Yaw Boresight Entry
Pitch Boresight Entry
Roll Boresight Entry
34-61-14
RATE
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
160 msec
Page 81
May 10, 2007

JJ. Weather Radar (ARINC 429)

(1)
Weather Radar to FMS Link Summary

This section describes the transmission protocol of the inputs to the FMS from the weather radar
via ARINC 429.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
360-008
361-008
DESCRIPTION
WXR joystick Lat (BNR)
WXR joystick Lon (BNR)
MAX RATE
160 msec
160 msec
REMARKS
Latitude +/-90 deg
Longitude +/-180 deg
KK. Doppler Velocity Sensor DVS (ARINC 429)

NOTE: The installation of a DVS is not allowed with an approved FMS.
(1)
Doppler Velocity Sensor (RDN85 and ANV353 DVS) to FMS Link Summary
This section describes the inputs to the FMS from the Doppler Velocity Sensor (DVS) via ARINC
429.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
050-025
DESCRIPTION
DVS Longitudinal speed (BNR)
051-025
DVS Lateral speed (BNR)
052-025
DVS Vertical speed (BNR)
343-025
344-025
345-025
353-025
DVS Boresight YAW (BNR)

DVS Boresight PITCH (BNR)
DVS Boresight ROLL (BNR)
DVS status word
RATE
80 msec (RDN85)/
40 msec (ANV353)
80 msec (RDN85)/
40 msec (ANV353)
80 msec (RDN85)/
40 msec (ANV353)
40 msec (ANV353)
40 msec (ANV353)
40 msec (ANV353)
80 msec (RDN85)/
40 msec (ANV353)
REMARKS
+/- 1024 knots
+/- 1024 knots
+/- 8192 feets per min
+/- 180 degrees
+/- 180 degrees
+/- 180 degrees
34-61-14
Page 82
May 10, 2007

(2)
FMS to Doppler Velocity Sensor (ANV353 DVS) Link Summary

This section describes the outputs from the FMS to the Doppler Velocity Sensor via
ARINC 429.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
124-002d
164-002
167-002d
171-002d
172-002d
324-002
325-002
371-002
DESCRIPTION
DVS Maintenance (DIS)
Radio height (BNR)
DVS Boresight YAW (BNR)
DVS Boresight ROLL (BNR)
DVS Boresight PITCH (BNR)
Pitch angle (BNR)
Roll angle (BNR)
DVS Control
RATE
200 msec
100 msec
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
100 msec
100 msec
200 msec
REMARKS
0/8142 ft.
+/- 180 degrees
+/- 180 degrees
+/- 180 degrees
+/- 180 degrees
+/- 180 degrees
LL. Personnel Locator System (ARINC 429)

The FMS decodes the range and the steering of the PLS waypoint from the labels in table below.
(1) Cubic AN/ARS6 PLS
LABEL-EQUIP ID
202-(300)
222-(300)
DESCRIPTION
PLS range
PLS steering
Rate
200 msec
200 msec
NOTE:
1. PLS Range is the distance between the aircraft and the PLS position.
2. PLS Bearing (steering) is the bearing to the PLS position with the heading of the aircraft as
reference (+- 90 degrees).
(2)
Cubic V12 PLS

LABEL-EQUIP ID
110 300a
111 300a
162 300a
202 300a
240 300a
276 300a
DESCRIPTION
PLS Latitude 1000
PLS Longitude 1000
PLS Bearing 200
PLS Range 200
PLS Operating mode 200
PLS Surviving number 200
Rate
1000 msec
1000 msec
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
200 msec
NOTE:
1. PLS Range is the distance between the aircraft and the PLS position.
2. PLS Bearing is the bearing to the PLS position with the heading of the aircraft as reference
(+- 180 degrees).
34-61-14
Page 83
May 10, 2007

MM. Thomson NC-12B TACAN (ARINC 429)

This section describes the ARINC 429 data words and the transmission protocol of the outputs
from the NC 12B Thomson TACAN used by the FMS.
LABEL-EQUIP ID
DESCRIPTION
033
201
222
TACAN Channel
TACAN Distance
TACAN Omni bearing
Rate
(msec)
50 msec
50 msec
50 msec
NN. Data Loader unit Targa (RS-422)

This section describes the RS-422 data words and the transmission protocol of the interface Targa
data loader and CMA-9000 FMS.
When the Targa DLU is configured, the data loader unit sends/receives data to/from the FMS. The
communication between the DLU and FMS takes place over the RS422 serial link at 38.4 kbps
using the Packet Data Protocol PDP/3-DOS.
In order to load files from the Targa DLU to the FMS, the following file extension convention shall
be used (otherwise, file transfer is not performed):
DATA TYPE
USER_DATA
NAV_DATA
CUSTOM_DATA
RADIO_DATA
CONFIG_0
CONFIG_1
CONFIG_2
CONFIG_3
PRECAN _MSG
MAGVAR_MODEL
OEI_MODEL
DESCRIPTION
User database
Navigation database
Custom database
Radio Tuning libraries and GSM library
OP CSCI configuration file
Precanned Messages
Magnetic variation model database
OEI model data tables
FILE EXTENSION
*.UDB
*.NDB
*.RTE
*.RAD
*.CFG
*.CFG
*.CFG
*.CFG
*.PCM
*.MVA
*.OEI
34-61-14
Page 84
May 10, 2007

OO. Helicopter Communication System (HCS) Software Protocol (RS-422) Future Growth
This section describes the RS-422 data words and the transmission protocol of the HCS interface
and CMA-9000 FMS.
(1)
HCS Software Protocol

(a) Transmission of Data Frames
The information interchange is based on simple data frames that start with the ASCII
character STX and end with an ETX. The maximum frame length including ETX and STX
is 512 characters. Data can be sent without delay between the characters. The receiving
system has to read in the complete frame as fast as the data are sent. There is no flow
control mechanism to stop the sending station.
(b) Polling
The FMS polls the Helicopter Communication System periodically. That means a
Command or Request Frame is sent by the FMS and the HCS answers in an Answer
Frame.
Serial Message Frame Types between the HCS and the FMS:
FRAME TYPE
Command/Request Frame
Answer Frame
DESCRIPTION
The FMS sends a Command or Request Frame to the HCS.
The HCS answers in an Answer Frame
(c) Command / Request Frame

If the FMS sends a Command Frame to the HCS, the HCS will respond with an Answer
Frame that consists of STX, Status Code (0,1,A,B,@), Attention Code, Checksum and
ETX. The FMS can decide whether the command has been accepted depending on the
Status Code.
If the FMS sends a Request Frame, the HCS responds with an Answer Frame that may
have the result of a previous command of this type in the Answer Area. If not, the Status
Code informs the FMS that the Command is not yet processed.
Command/Request Frame Message Format from the HCS to the FMS
34-61-14
Page 85
May 10, 2007

BYTE NO.
0
1
2 to 1+PL
2+PL to
3+PL
4+PL
CONTENTS OF THE
COMMAND/REQUEST
FRAME
STX
Command/Request
Parameter Area
Checksum
ETX
DESCRIPTION
Start of Text
Command Code ( '@','A'-'Z') or Request Code ('a'-'z')
The Parameter Frame contains the necessary
parameters of a command. (Parameter Length (PL) is
the length of the Parameter Area)
A checksum transmitted in character 2+PL and 3+PL of
the Command/Request Frame.
End of text
(d) Answer Frame

The Answer Frame contains a Status Code that informs the Display Unit about data
transmission problems and availability of an answer. Additionally, the FMS gets the
information, whether the previously transmitted command could be stored.
If an answer is available the Answer Area contains the requested answer data.
Every Answer Frame contains an Attention Code. If the character is '@' there is no further
answer available in the HCS. If the Character is between 'a' and 'z', it tells the FMS that
an answer is available. This answer can be requested by a Request Frame with a
Request Code that is equal to the previously received Attention Code.
Answer Frame Message Format from the FMS to the HCS:
BYTE NO.
0
1
CONTENTS OF
THE ANSWER
FRAME
STX
Status Code
2 to 1+AF
Answer Area
2+AF
Attention Code
3+AF
4+AF
5+AF
Checksum
ETX
DESCRIPTION
Start of text
The Status Character contains one of the following:
- command is stored and will be processed ('0')
- command refused ('1')
- new answer available ('2')
- answer available (3)
- no answer available ('4')
- transmission error occured ('A')
- input buffer overflow ('B')
- @ command received (@)
The Answer Frame contains the necessary parameters of a
command. (Answer Frame (AF) is the length of the
Parameter Frame)
If an answer has become available, the Attention Code
contains the value of the Request Code that can be used to
order the Answer Frame. Otherwise, a '@' is inserted.
A checksum transmitted in character 3+AF and 4+AF of the
Answer Frame.
End of text
34-61-14
Page 86
May 10, 2007

(e) Calculation of Checksum

In addition to the parity bit that will be transmitted with each character, at the end of a
frame a Checksum is inserted. The Checksum is calculated over all characters (7 bit
codes) of the data frame excluding STX and ETX. The resulting Checksum is the least 8
significant bits value of the sum over the character codes. The Checksum is transmitted
as a two character wide hexadecimal number. As hexadecimal digits the characters '0' to
'9' and 'A' to 'F' should be used. The most significant digit is transmitted first.
(f)
High Level Software Protocol between HCS and Display Unit

1
Commands and requests sent to the HCS by the FMS:
Commands and requests consist of several information units, which depend on the type
of command, request or answer.
2
Format of the Application Data:
In this chapter the format of the application messages is described, which are sent from
the FMS to the DC and vice versa.
The application messages are inserted in the parameter area of the command S= Send
a normal message, when sending a message from the FMS to the DC or inserted in the
answer area of the request r = Receive a message, when a message has been
received from the DC.
The length of the complete message is restricted for Short Messages to 140 bytes. The
length of the application messages can be up to 108 characters in direction from the DC
to the FMS and up to 66 characters from the FMS to the DC. The last direction is
restricted to the length of 66 characters, because the HCS adds to each message
characters with information, got by the P command, about geographical position, date,
time, altitude and remaining flight time according the fuel level.
The application data exchanged between DC and FMS and vice versa are passed
through by the HCS unchanged.
3
Information Flow:
The following information flows demonstrate examples for the main functions of the
communication between the HCS and FMS. As examples only the exchanged application
data is shown without STX, Checksum and ETX. The requests shown in the following
should be repeated by the CDU until the answer frame indicates a valid answer.
34-61-14
Page 87
May 10, 2007

Polling of the CDU-Driver on the HCS by the FMS:
The CDU-driver on the HCS is polled by the FMS about every 100 msec. That means
every time the FMS sends a command or a request, the HCS sets up the corresponding
answer and sends it to the FMS. Whenever a command is received, outstanding answers
for this command type are erased. Answers are erased after having been read.
The Send Status command and the null command can be sent always by the FMS. In
general the null command can be replaced by the Send Status command to provide the
HCS continuously with the latest status.
Whenever the FMS-driver on the HCS receives a message, that means a string of
characters beginning with STX and ending with ETX, the following activities will be
performed at the HCS:
It is checked whether the command/request format code is valid. If so the corresponding
answer will be set up with status code and answer area, if available.
It will be checked whether any different answer is available. If this is so, the next available
answer is announced by the corresponding attention code.
The answer frame is sent to the FMS. The delay between reception of a frame and
answer to this frame is less than 50 msec.
PP. Radio Interface Box (RIB) equipment (RS-422) Future Growth
(1) This section describes the RS-422 data words and the transmission protocol of the RIB
interface and CMA-9000 FMS.
The FMS shall communicate with the RIB in accordance to the protocol listed below.
(a) Serial Port Radio Equipment
The RIB has the capability to control the following serial radio equipment:
AN/ARC-164 UHF AM Radio;

AN/ARC-186 VHF FM Radio;
AN/ARC-182 UHF/VHF AM/FM Radio; and
AN/ARN-118 TACAN Radio.
(b) Parallel Port Radio Equipment

The RIB has the capability to control the following parallel radio equipment:
ADF-206 Radio; and

VIR-31 NAV Radio.
34-61-14
Page 88
May 10, 2007

QQ. Inertial Reference System (ARINC 429)

(1) LTN-92 INS Interface.
(a) FMU To/From INU (LTN-92) (See Figure 11, 12 and 13).
Figure 11 illustrates the FMU-INU interconnections. The INU high-speed ARINC 429
data bus (HS429) is connected to all three FMUs. This provides ARINC 704 IRS data,
including navigation, attitude, acceleration, baro-inertial altitude, true and synthetic
magnetic heading, status and maintenance data.
The FMU processes the IRS alerts and status messages, which are output on the highspeed data bus, to generate MCDU scratchpad alert messages.
The INU CDU bus output provides CDU character data labels, which the FMU processes
for the creation of emulated IRS display pages on the MCDU.
Under normal operations, the general output bus from each FMU is connected in parallel
to the CDU and FMS input ports of its onside INU. The FMU transmits on the general
output bus serial data containing both MCDU keystroke and INS initialization data labels.
These data labels are automatically recognized by the appropriate INU port without label
conflict.
Emulated INS-CDU keystrokes are transmitted by the FMU using label 030. The FMU
also outputs a status word on label 151 to the INU at a rate of greater than 2 Hz
(nominally 10 Hz). The CDU Valid discrete input of the INU is connected to a source of
28 VDC.
(b) Primary/Backup FMU-INU Source Switching
To enable continued control of an INU in the event of its onside FMU failure, an
automatic source select capability is provided to allow the INU CDU and FMS input ports
to be switched to a backup FMU (see Figures 10-12). Each INU FMS source select
function is controlled by the system valid discrete output of its onside FMU as illustrated
in Figures 135 and 136. This source select function is implemented by the Flight
Interface Unit (FIU).
INU
INU #1
INU #2
INU #3
Primary FMU
FMU #1
FMU #2
FMU #3
Backup FMU
FMU #2
FMU #3
FMU #1
34-61-14
Page 89
May 10, 2007

(c) LTN-92 CDU Emulation

1
INU Display Data to FMS
LABEL NUMBER
266-004c
200-004c
230-004c
260-004c
310-004c
201-004c
231-004c
261-004c
311-004c
202-004c
232-004c
262-004c
312-004c
203-004c
233-004c
263-004c
313-004c
205-004c
235-004c
265-004c
315-004c
DESCRIPTION
INU CDU Display Control Word
Display Line 1 Char 1 - 4
Char 5 - 8
Char 9 - 12
Char 13 - 16
Char 5 - 8
Char 9 - 12
Char 13 - 16
Char 5 - 8
Char 9 - 12
Char 13 - 16
Char 5 - 8
Char 9 - 12
Char 13 - 16
Char 5 - 8
Char 9 - 12
Char 13 - 16
EXPECTED RATE
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
250 msec
(2) ADIRU/ laseref V/LTN-101

(a) The FMS outputs the following labels to the ADIRU:
LABEL NUMBER
041-002
042-002
043-002
For ADIRU and laseref V
125-002
For LTN-101
150-002
203-002
210-002
260-002
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
Initial latitude
Initial longitude
Initial Magnetic
Heading
UTC
OUTPUT RATE
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
UTC
100 msec (1)
Pressure Altitude
True Air Speed
Date
200 msec
200 msec
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
These words are transmitted in bursts of 2-second duration.
34-61-14
Page 90
May 10, 2007

(b) FMS Control Data to INU.

LABEL NUMBER
030-004c
151-004c
DESCRIPTION
INU CDU Keystroke
INU CDU Control Word
EXPECTED RATE
as required
100 msec
(c) Inertial Reference System (IRS).

1
LTN-92 IRS Data to FMS.
LABEL NUMBER
072-004
073-004
151-004
152-004
153-004
154-004
155-004
156-004
157-004
158-004
160-004
161-004
310-004
311-004
312-004
313-004
314-004
317-004
320-004
321-004
322-004
324-004
325-004
335-004
361-004
365-004
366-004
367-004
270-004
DESCRIPTION
Inertial latitude
Inertial longitude
IRS maintenance word #1
Present position latitude (updated)
Present position longitude (updated)
Ground speed
Track angle true
True Heading
Track angle mag
Mag heading
Drift angle
Flight path angle
Pitch angle
Roll angle
Track angle rate
Inertial altitude
North-South velocity
East-West velocity
IRS discrete Word
EXPECTED RATE
125 msec
125 msec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
125 msec
125 msec
31.25 msec
31.25 msec
31.25 msec
31.25 msec
31.25 msec
31.25 msec
31.25 msec
15.625 msec
15.625 msec
15.625 msec
31.25 msec
31.25 msec
62.5 msec
62.5 msec
500 msec
34-61-14
Page 91
May 10, 2007

FMS to Position Initialization Data LTN-92.
LABEL NUMBER
041-002
042-002
150-002
260-002
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
Initial latitude
Initial longitude
UTC
Date
EXPECTED RATE
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
100 msec (1)
These words are transmitted in bursts of 2-second duration.
34-61-14
Page 92
May 10, 2007

FMU 1
SYSTEM
VALID
FMU 3
FMU 2
TP-1A
TP-1A
TP TP MP
15C 1C 1A
15D 1D 1B
TP
8C
8D
TP
9C
9D
TP TP
1C 15C
1D 15D
J1B
49
50
F
M
S
C
D
U
J2B J1B
65 47
66 48
INU 1
A/C 28VDC J1B-53 (CDU WARN)
TP
9C
9D
MP TP TP
1A 15C 1C
1B 15D 1D
C
D
U
J1B
35
36
H
S
4
2
9
J1B
49
50
F
M
S
C
D
U
J2B J1B
65 47
66 48
C
D
U
J1B
35
36
H
S
4
2
9
J1B
49
50
F
M
S
C
D
U
J2B J1B
65 47
66 48
INU 3
TP
8C
8D
SYSTEM
VALID
TP
9C
9D
FIU (INU # 2
BACKUP
RELAY)
FIU (INU # 3
BACKUP
RELAY)
FIU (INU # 1
BACKUP
RELAY)
H
S
4
2
9
MP TP
1A 8C
1B 8D
TP-1A
SYSTEM
VALID
C
D
U
J1B
35
36
INU 2
929-600008-000 043
Figure 10 Triple FMS/Triple-LTN-92 IRS Interconnections
34-61-14
Page 93
May 10, 2007

PART OF FIU
429 O/P #5 FMU2
429 O/P #5 FMU1
Hi
Lo
TP-8C
Hi
Lo
TP-8C
SYSTEM VALID FMU1
1
INU1 FMS I/P
Hi
Lo
INU1 CDU I/P
Hi
Lo
INU2 FMS I/P
Hi
Lo
INU2 CDU I/P
Hi
Lo
INU3 FMS I/P
Hi
Lo
INU3 CDU I/P
3
4
5
TP-8D
TP-1A
Hi
Lo
TP-8D
6
X1
X2
429 O/P #5 FMU3
429 O/P #5 FMU2
Hi
Lo
Hi
Lo
1
3
4
6
X1
SYSTEM VALID FMU2
X2
429 O/P #5 FMU1
429 O/P #5 FMU3
Hi
Lo
Hi
Lo
1
3
4
SYSTEM VALID FMU3
6
X1
Aircraft 28 VDC
X2
0102007
Figure 11 FMU to LTN-92 INU Source Select (All Relays Shown Energized)
34-61-14
Page 94
May 10, 2007

MP-9C, 9D
MP-11A, 11B, 11C
INU2
I/P 11
INU3
I/P 12
MP-9C, 9D
MP-11A, 11B, 11C
FMU 1
FMU 3
I/P 9
I/P 12
TP
15C, 15D
INU 1
J1-B
49, 50
MP-9C, 9D
MP-11A, 11B, 11C
I/P 9
INU1
I/P 11
INU2
FMU 2
I/P 11
TP
1C, 1D
INU1
I/P 12
INU3
MP
1A, 1B
FMU2
FMU1
FMU1
FMU3
FMU2
FMU3
COMPASS
I/P 9
J1-B
49, 50
INU 3
COUPLER 1
COMPASS
J1-B
49, 50
INU 2
COUPLER 2
HS 429 TRUE & MAG HDG

SYNCHRO MAG HDG
APFD
A
APFD
C
APFD
B
929-600008-000 056
Figure 12 Heading Sources for Triple FMS/Triple LTN-92 IRS/Dual Compass Couplers
(2) ADIRS ( LTN-101, Laseref V or Honeywell ADIRU) interface.
(d) FMU To/From ADIRS
The ADIRU Nav data bus is fed to all FMUs. The FMS extracts from this bus the INS
position, heading, velocities, status data.
The FMS configuration pages expects the following physical interconnections when
configuring the FMS ARINC 429 input ports receiving ADIRU data:
FMU
FMU #1
FMU #2
FMU #3
Primary ADIRS
(pIRS)
ADIRU #1
ADIRU #2
ADIRU #3
Secondary ADIRS
(xIRS)
ADIRU #2
ADIRU #1
ADIRU #2
Tertiary ADIRS
(tIRS)
ADIRU #3
ADIRU #3
ADIRU #1
Under normal operations, the ADIRS expects initialization data from its onside FMS. To
enable continued control of an ADIRS in the event of its onside FMU failure, the
initialization data of all FMUs is sent to all ADIRSs.
ADIRS
ADIRS #1
ADIRS #2
ADIRS #3
Primary FMU
FMU #1
FMU #2
FMU #3
Secondary FMU
FMU #3
FMU #1
FMU #2
Tertiary FMU
FMU #2
FMU #3
FMU #1
34-61-14
Page 95
May 10, 2007

(e) Initialization Data from FMU to ADIRS

Each ADIRS Remote Test Discrete Input is connected to its onside FMS. The user can
initiate an ADIRS Remote TEST via the FMS/MCDU IRS DATA page.
The FMS accepts the following labels from the ADIRS:
Label
For Honeywell ADIRU and
Laseref V:
126-004b, d
For LTN-101:
160-004a
270-004
271-004b, d
310-004
311-004
312-004
313-004
314-004
317-004
320-004
321-004
322-004
324-004
325-004
335-004
350-004b, d
361-004
365-004
366-004
367-004
Description
Time In NAV
Expected Rate
640 msec
Time In NAV
1000 msec
IRS discrete status #1

IRS discrete status #2
Inertial position latitude
Inertial position longitude
Inertial Ground speed
Track Angle True
True Heading
Track angle magnetic
Magnetic heading
Drift angle
Flight path angle
Pitch angle
Roll angle
Track angle rate
IRS Maintenance Word
Inertial altitude
North-South velocity
East-West velocity
320 msec
320 msec
160 msec
160 msec
80 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
40 msec
20 msec
20 msec
20 msec
320 msec
40 msec
20 msec
80 msec
80 msec
34-61-14
Page 96
May 10, 2007

SECTION II
INSTALLATION
1.
GENERAL
The installation of a CMA-9000 Flight Management System (FMS) in an aircraft requires the approval of
the appropriate air/radio division of the government of the country issuing the aircraft certificate of
airworthiness. Contact with the appropriate government authority prior to the installation and during the
system planning is highly recommended in order to minimize approval problems. If installation
assistance is required contact CMC's Avionics Field Engineering Department at the
telephone/telex/FAX numbers on the title page of this manual.
2.
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
A.
General
(1)
The location of a Flight Management System within an aircraft varies with the type of aircraft
in which it is installed. A typical location of a single FMS installation is illustrated in Figure
101.
(2) System planning is necessary since the FMS must be correctly interfaced with other aircraft
system and instrumentation.
(3) The FMS is installed in the cockpit area, located either in the instrument panel or in the
pedestal.
(4) The FMS is secure with four captive Dzus fasteners.
B.
Location of the FMS

(1)
C.
Where the FMS is to be used as a flight instrument in the guidance and control of the aircraft,
it should be located where it is clearly visible to the pilot with the least possible deviation from
his normal position and from his line of vision when he is looking forward along the flight path.
Where a dual FMS is to be used as flight instrument in the guidance and control of the aircraft,
one unit should be located where it is clearly visible to the pilot and the other to the co-pilot. A
typical location of the second co-pilot FMS could be right next to the pilot FMS on the center
pedestal.
Selection and location of the GPS receiver and related GPS Antenna
(1)
Recommendation of GPS receiver and antenna selection

CMC Electronics currently offers three types of GPS receiver: the CMA-3012, the CMA-3112
(embedded in the CMA-900 FMS) and the CMA-3024. The CMA-9000 is certified to work with
any of these GPS receivers. The latest generation, the CMA-3024 offers growth capability to
WAAS and EGNOS. CMC Electronics recommends the selection of the CMA-3024 GPS
receiver and an active GPS antenna.
34-61-14
Page 101
May 10, 2007

(2)
GPS receiver location

With all avionic equipment, if at all possible, the GPS receiver should be installed in a
pressurized and temperature-controlled area with low levels of humidity and moisture in order
to reduce environmental stresses. If necessary, it can be installed in an un-pressurized
location.
The GPS receiver location is dependent upon the location of the GPS antenna. When using a
passive antenna, the GPS receiver should be located on the inside of the aircraft near to the
GPS antenna to minimize the RF losses in the interconnecting RF cable. This is particularly
important in this case since cables longer than a few meters will quickly degrade the
sensitivity and the performance of the GPS receiver.
Using active antennas allows much longer cable runs, thus more flexibility in installation.
(3)
GPS antenna selection and location

When installed with CMA-3012 or CMA-3024 GPS receiver, the GPS antenna must comply
with the requirements of RTCA DO-228 change 1.
The GPS antenna should be installed on the outer aircraft skin, nominally along the aircraft
centerline and upward in a horizontal attitude in normal flight. Typically the antenna will be
installed on the forward topside portion of the aircraft fuselage to minimize the shadowing
effect of the vertical stabilizer and wings.
Proper antenna separation from RF sources is required to provide the RF isolation necessary
to minimize the risks of RF interference. It is recommended to install GPS antennas at least
one meter away from other transmitting antennas, and at least one hundred and sixty (160)
inches (4.064 meters) from SATCOM and GLOBALSTAR antennas. The two antennas in dual
GPS receiver antenna installations should be separated by a minimum of twelve (12) inches
(0.3048 meter).
Refer to CMA-3012 Installation Manual GNSSU (3012-GEN-1202) for information related to GPS
receiver and antenna installation.
Refer to CMA-3024 GNSSU MKII CMC Installation Manual 3024-GEN-0801 publication 929600043-XXX for additional information on GPS receiver and related GPS antenna installation
information.
34-61-14
Page 102
May 10, 2007

D.
Active Antenna Installations (CMA-3012 and CMA-3024)

Recommended Active Antenna Types
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION & NOMINAL

RF POWER GAIN
S67-1575-132
GPS antenna, active, 29.5 dB

gain
S67-1575-133
GPS antenna, active, 33 dB

gain
AT575-143W-TNCF000-RG-29.5-NM
GPS antenna, active, DO-228,

29.5 dB gain
MAXIMUM GAIN
OF ANTENNA
MANUFACTURER
32.5 dB
Sensor Systems
36 dB
Sensor Systems
32.5 dB
34-61-14
AeroAntenna
Technology
Page 103
May 10, 2007

Figure 101A Typical CMA-9000 Location (for a helicopter)
0607001
Figure 101B Typical CMA-9000 Location (for an aircraft)
34-61-14
Page 104
May 10, 2007

3.
INTERWIRING AND OUTLINE DRAWING

The following figures provide dimensional, mounting, connector pin assignments and other data
required to correctly install the CMA-9000.
1.87 .05
D38999/20FJ35AN
MAITING WITH
D38999/26FJ35SN
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
1. APPLICABLE STANDARDS/SPECIFICATIONS:
ASME Y14.5M-1994.
2. WEIGHT OF UNIT: 8.5 LBS MAX (3.86 Kg).
3. INPUT POWER : 75W TYP, (98W MAX) WITH HEATER
: 45W TYP, (67W MAX) WITHOUT HEATER
4. POWER FOR INTEGRAL LIGHTNING: 8W TYP, (12W MAX)
(INCLUDED IN INPUT POWER, NOTE 3. FOR VARIATION
WITH SENSE CONFIGURATION, REFER TO FIGURE 4)
5. COLOR OF CONTROL PANEL: MATT BLACK.
COLOR OF HOUSING: CHEMICAL FILM, CLEAR.
5.02
.05
6. CONTROL PANEL DIMENSIONS PER MS25212

AND AS SHOWN.
7. MOUNTING HARDWARE: DZUS FASTENER 1/4 TURN
PF35-53RB.
8. NEOPRENE RUBBER GASKET MAY EXCEED
MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS.
5.365
6.75
MAX
5.73 .05
6.645
REF
6.375
.215
.200
5.75
MAX
.762 .020
5.82 .02
0612006
Figure 102A CMA-9000 Outline Drawing
34-61-14
Page 105
May 10, 2007

0505003
Figure 102B CMA-9000 J1 Connector
PLUG/PIN NO.
J1 connector 20FJ35AN
J1 backshell
P1 connector 26FJ35SN
P1 straight cable-clamp back-shell
M85049-38-25N
P1 elbow cable-clamp back-shell
M85049-39-25N
CMC PART NUMBER

230-990123-702
702-990121-803
230-990304-647
230-990304-648
FCI INTERNATIONAL
PART NUMBER
N/A
N/A
805-25F35SN
8D-109F02
N/A
8D-109F03
34-61-14
Page 106
May 10, 2007

PLUG/PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
REMARKS
POWER INPUT
J1-4
J1-5
+28 VDC I/P HI
Connect to positive side of aircraft +28 Vdc

power supply
J1-6
J1-7
+28 VDC I/P LO
Connect to negative side of aircraft +28 Vdc

power supply
J1-3
SPARE
Future Growth - On/Off switch (see note

below)
J1-53
CHASSIS GROUND
Connect to good aircraft ground plane
J1-54
J1-55
SHIELD RETURN
Internal Ground Connection
J1-127
SPARE
Future Growth - Connect to HOT side of

aircraft 115 Vac power supply
J1-128
SPARE
Future Growth - Connect to COLD side of

aircraft 115 Vac power supply
IMPORTANT INSTALLATION NOTES:

1) Discrete I/P 1 to 16 supports either open/ground or 0/28 VDC type of discrete signal. The open is
defined as >100 Kohms and the ground is defined as <10 ohms. The impedance range between 100
Ohms and 100 kOhms is indeterminate. The 0Vdc is any voltage of less than 3.5 Vdc and the 28 Vdc
is any voltage in between 18.5 Vdc and 30.5 Vdc. A remote discrete input tolerates a ground voltage
mismatch of up to 2.5 Volts in magnitude measured as the difference in the ground potential between
the FMS ground (either Chassis Ground pin 53 or Discrete Input Return pin 49) and the remote
grounding point of the discrete input.
2) Discrete O/P 1 to 6 will be able to sink 200 mA each. Discrete O/P 7 and 8 will be able to sink 500 mA
each.
3) There is a future growth capability for the CMA-9000 to offer four 28V/Open discrete input type of
signal. This will accommodate older installations for which 28V/Open discrete are required (e.g. older
LNAV_ON signal). The current plan for this future variation is to have Discrete input #1 to #4
configured as 28V/Open.
4) Future Growth - Pin J1-03 provides the capability for an ON/OFF internal switch on the CMA-9000
FMS. The CMA-9000 is activated (power and display are ON) when appropriate 28VDC circuit breaker
is set and the aircraft power bus is energized, providing power to pins 4/5/6/7, and this pin J1-3 is in an
Open state (e.g. not connected).This specific discrete accepts only Open/Ground type of signal. The
definition of Open state for this pin (this pin only) is a resistivity greater than 1 MOhms. The definition of
Ground state for this pin (this pin only) is a resistivity of less than 2 Ohms.
Figure 103 FMS Pin Assignments (Sheet 1 of 5)
34-61-14
Page 107
May 10, 2007

PLUG/PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
REMARKS
DIMMING INPUTS
J1-1
28 VDC Integral Lighting
Connects to cockpit integral lighting

potentiometer for 28 VDC Integral Lighting
Configuration. Refer to Figure 4 Equipment
Identification for appropriate hardware variation.
J1-8
5 VDC Integral Lighting

potentiometer for 5 VDC Integral Lighting
Configuration. Refer to Figure 4 Equipment
Identification for appropriate hardware variation.
J1-9
Integral Lighting Return

potentiometer return (for both 5 VDC and
28VDC Integral Lighting Configuration)
0.5 to 5 VDC AMLCD

AMLCD Display Dimming
Connects to cockpit display brightness dimming

potentiometer
0.5 to 5 VDC AMLCD Display

Dimming Return
Return for cockpit AMLCD display dimming
J1-126
J1-2
DISCRETE INPUTS
J1-16
J1-38
J1-40
J1-41
J1-42
J1-47
J1-48
J1-49
J1-50
J1-80
J1-81
J1-82
J1-83
J1-84
J1-85
J1-86
J1-100
DISCRETE I/P NO. 8

DISCRETE I/P NO. 6
DISCRETE I/P NO. 3
DISCRETE I/P NO. 4
DISCRETE I/P NO. 5
DISCRETE I/P NO. 1
DISCRETE I/P NO. 2
DISCRETE RETURN
DISCRETE I/P NO. 7
DISCRETE I/P NO. 9
DISCRETE I/P NO. 10
DISCRETE I/P NO. 11
DISCRETE I/P NO. 12
DISCRETE I/P NO. 13
DISCRETE I/P NO. 14
DISCRETE I/P NO. 15
DISCRETE I/P NO. 16
(Refer to Note 1, Figure 103 Sheet 1 of 5)

Discrete inputs 1 through 16 can be configured
to one of the following options:
TOGA_ON, LAMP_TEST, NAV_COM_CP,
SEL_CAPHSI, SEL_FOHSI, ADF_ATC_CP,
EMERGENCY, NVG_MODE, NIGHT_MODE,
OLEO_AIR, LNAV_ON, TRUE_MAG,
(Internal Ground Connection)
CENTRAL_CLEAR, APPROACH_ARMED,
SDI_1, SDI_2, CFG_SEL_1, CFG_SEL_2,
ZEROIZE_1, ZEROIZE_2, MC_FAILED,
34-61-14
Page 108
May 10, 2007

PLUG/PIN NO.
DISCRETE
OUTPUTS
J1-31
J1-39
J1-45
J1-46
J1-87
J1-88
J1-89
J1-90
SIGNAL NAME
REMARKS
(Refer to Note 2, Figure 103 Sheet 1 of 5)
DISCRETE O/P NO. 4

DISCRETE O/P NO. 1
DISCRETE O/P NO. 2
DISCRETE O/P NO. 3
DISCRETE O/P NO. 5
DISCRETE O/P NO. 6
DISCRETE O/P NO. 7
DISCRETE O/P NO. 8
Master Caution* (CMC recommendation)

Discrete outputs 1 through 8 can be configured
to one of the following options :
APPR_ARMED, APPR_CAP, GPS_INT,
HDG_VALID, LEGCHG, LNAV_VALID, MSG,
OFFSET, SYS_VALID, TRUE_ANG,
VNAV_VALID, WPT, MCAUTION, pATC, xATC,
AMU_CTRL
NOTE: Even though the discrete output #1
can be configured, CMC strongly
recommends configuring the Discrete
Output #1 to Master Caution as the
discrete output is also internally
connected to the CPU SYSTEM_FAIL
signal.
RS-422 I/O
J1-32
J1-33
J1-35
J1-36
J1-91
J1-92
J1-93
J1-94
J1-101
J1-102
J1-103
J1-104
RS-422 or RS-232
J1-95
J1-96
J1-97
RS-422 RX2-A
RS-422 TX2-A
RS-422 RX2-B
RS-422 TX2-B
RS-422 RX3-A
RS-422 RX3-B
RS-422 TX3-A
RS-422 TX3-B
RS-422 RX4-A
RS-422 RX4-B
RS-422 TX4-A
RS-422 TX4-B
RS-422 ports 2 through 4 can be configured to

DLU.
RS-232 RX1 or RS-422 RX1-B

RS-422 RX1-A
RS-232 TX1 or RS-422 TX1-B
RS-422 TX1-A
RS-232 GND
This first serial port can be configured to either

RS-232 or RS-422 protocol. The port can be
configured to one of the following options: DLU
or MAINT.
GPS Time Mark Hi

GPS Time Mark Lo
GPS Time Mark Pulse High

GPS Time Mark Pulse Low
J1-98
J1-99
RS-422 GPS TIME
MARK
J1-51
J1-52
34-61-14
Page 109
May 10, 2007

PLUG/PIN NO.
ARINC INPUTS
J1-10
J1-11
J1-12
J1-13
J1-14
J1-15
J1-17
J1-18
J1-19
J1-20
J1-21
J1-22
J1-23
J1-24
J1-29
J1-30
J1-34
J1-37
J1-56
J1-57
J1-58
J1-59
J1-60
J1-61
J1-62
J1-63
J1-64
J1-65
J1-66
J1-67
J1-68
J1-69
SIGNAL NAME
ARINC 429 HI, I/P NO. 1
ARINC 429 LO, I/P NO. 1
REMARKS
ARINC Input port 1 through 24 can be
configured to one of the equipment listed in
Section I sub-section 3.

34-61-14
Page 110
May 10, 2007

PLUG/PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
REMARKS
ARINC INPUTS
(contd)
J1-105
J1-106
J1-107
J1-108
J1-109
J1-110
J1-111
J1-112
J1-113
J1-114
J1-115
J1-116
J1-117
J1-118
J1-119
J1-120


ARINC OUTPUTS
J1-25
J1-26
J1-27
J1-28
J1-43
J1-44
J1-70
J1-71
J1-72
J1-73
J1-74
J1-75
J1-76
J1-77
J1-78
J1-79
ARINC 429 HI, O/P NO. 1

ARINC 429 LO, O/P NO. 1
ARINC Output port 1 through 8 can be

34-61-14
Page 111
May 10, 2007

The following figure illustrates the interwiring specifications.
PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
PIN AMERICAN
WIRE GAUGE
J1-1
28 VDC INTEGRAL LIGHTING HOT

(Sense or Power)
28 VDC INTEGRAL LIGHTING RETURN
(Sense or Power)
22
0.1/2 or 0.6/2
22
0.1/2 or 0.6/2
5 VDC AMLCD Display dimming

RETURN (hot on J-126)
22
0.1/2
+28 VDC I/P HI

+28 VDC I/P LO
22
22
2.0/1 (PER WIRE)

2.0/1 (PER WIRE)
5 VDC INTEGRAL LIGHTING HOT

5 VDC INTEGRAL LIGHTING RETURN
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
INPUT CURRENT/
RESISTANCE RATING
(Amps/Ohms)
See note on Sheet 5 of 5
J1-9
NOTE: Refer to Figure 4 Equipment

Identification
for
appropriate
hardware variation and Integral
Lighting Configuration.
J1-2
J1-4,5
J1-6,7
J1-8
J1-9
NOTE: Refer to Figure 4 Equipment

Identification
for
appropriate
hardware variation and Integral
Lighting Configuration.
J1-10
J1-11
ARINC 429 I/P NO. 1 HI

ARINC 429 I/P NO. 1 LO
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-12
J1-13

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-14
J1-15

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-16
DISCRETE I/P NO. 8
22
0.01/2
J1-17
J1-18

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-19
J1-20

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-21
J1-22

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-23
J1-24

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-25
J1-26
ARINC 429 O/P NO. 1 HI

ARINC 429 O/P NO. 1 LO
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
Figure 104 Interwiring Specifications (Sheet 1 of 5)
34-61-14
Page 112
May 10, 2007

PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
PIN AMERICAN
WIRE GAUGE
INPUT CURRENT/
RESISTANCE RATING
(Amps/Ohms)
J1-27
J1-28

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-29
J1-30

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-31
DISCRETE O/P NO. 4
22
0.3/2
J1-32
J1-33
RS-422 I/P NO. 2 HI

RS-422 O/P NO. 2 HI
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-34
J1-35

RS-422 I/P NO.2 LO
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-36
J1-37
RS-422 O/P NO. 2 LO

22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-38
DISCRETE I/P NO. 6
22
0.01/2
J1-39
DISCRETE O/P NO. 1
22
0.3/2
J1-40
DISCRETE I/P NO. 3
22
0.01/2
J1-41
DISCRETE I/P NO. 4
22
0.01/2
J1-42
DISCRETE I/P NO. 5
22
0.01/2
J1-43
22
0.1/2
J1-44
22
0.1/2
J1-45
DISCRETE O/P NO. 2
22
0.3/2
J1-46
DISCRETE O/P NO. 3
22
0.3/2
J1-47
DISCRETE I/P NO. 1
22
0.01/2
J1-48
DISCRETE I/P NO. 2
22
0.01/2
J1-49
DISCRETE RETURN
22
0.25/1
J1-50
DISCRETE I/P NO. 7
22
0.01/2
J1-51
GPS TIME MARK HI
22
0.01/2
J1-52
GPS TIME MARK LO
22
0.01/2
J1-53
CHASSIS GROUND
22
1.0/10
SHIELD RTN
22
N/A
J1-56
22
0.1/2
J1-57
22
0.1/2
J1-58
22
0.1/2
J1-54,55
34-61-14
Page 113
May 10, 2007

PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
PIN AMERICAN
WIRE GAUGE
INPUT CURRENT/
RESISTANCE RATING
(Amps/Ohms)
J1-59
22
0.1/2
J1-60
22
0.1/2
J1-61
22
0.1/2
J1-62
22
0.1/2
J1-63
22
0.1/2
J1-64
22
0.1/2
J1-65
22
0.1/2
J1-66
22
0.1/2
J1-67
22
0.1/2
J1-68
22
0.1/2
J1-69
22
0.1/2
J1-70
22
0.1/2
J1-71
22
0.1/2
J1-72
22
0.1/2
J1-73
22
0.1/2
J1-74
22
0.1/2
J1-75
22
0.1/2
J1-76
22
0.1/2
J1-77
22
0.1/2
J1-78
22
0.1/2
J1-79
22
0.1/2
J1-80
DISCRETE I/P NO. 9
22
0.01/2
J1-81
DISCRETE I/P NO. 10
22
0.01/2
J1-82
DISCRETE I/P NO. 11
22
0.01/2
J1-83
DISCRETE I/P NO. 12
22
0.01/2
J1-84
DISCRETE I/P NO. 13
22
0.01/2
J1-85
DISCRETE I/P NO. 14
22
0.01/2
34-61-14
Page 114
May 10, 2007

PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
PIN AMERICAN
WIRE GAUGE
INPUT CURRENT/
RESISTANCE RATING
(Amps/Ohms)
J1-86
DISCRETE I/P NO. 15
22
0.01/2
J1-87
DISCRETE O/P NO. 5
22
0.3/2
J1-88
DISCRETE O/P NO. 6
22
0.3/2
J1-89
DISCRETE O/P NO. 7
22
0.6/2
J1-90
DISCRETE O/P NO. 8
22
0.6/2
J1-91
J1-92
RS-422 I/P NO. 3 HI

RS-422 I/P NO. 3 LO
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-93
J1-94
RS-422 O/P NO. 3 HI

RS-422 O/P NO. 3 LO
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-95
RS-422 or RS-232 I/P NO. 1 LO
22
0.1/2
J1-96
RS-422 I/P NO. 1 HI
22
0.1/2
J1-97
RS-422 or RS-232 O/P NO. 1 LO
22
0.1/2
J1-98
RS-422 O/P NO. 1 HI
22
0.1/2
J1-99
RS-232 Ground NO 1
22
N/A
J1-100
DISCRETE I/P NO. 16
22
0.01/2
J1-101
J1-102
RS-422 I/P NO. 4 HI

RS-422 I/P NO. 4 LO
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-103
J1-104
RS-422 O/P NO. 4 HI

RS-422 O/P NO. 4 LO
22
22
0.1/2
0.1/2
J1-105
22
0.1/2
J1-106
22
0.1/2
J1-107
22
0.1/2
J1-108
22
0.1/2
J1-109
22
0.1/2
J1-110
22
0.1/2
J1-111
22
0.1/2
J1-112
22
0.1/2
J1-113
22
0.1/2
J1-114
22
0.1/2
34-61-14
Page 115
May 10, 2007

PIN NO.
SIGNAL NAME
PIN AMERICAN
WIRE GAUGE
INPUT CURRENT/
RESISTANCE RATING
(Amps/Ohms)
J1-115
22
0.1/2
J1-116
22
0.1/2
J1-117
22
0.1/2
J1-118
22
0.1/2
J1-119
22
0.1/2
J1-120
22
0.1/2
J1-121
RESERVED (SYNCHRO407)
N/A
Future Growth
J1-122
N/A
Future Growth
J1-123
N/A
Future Growth
J1-124
N/A
Future Growth
J1-125
N/A
Future Growth
J1-126
0.5V to 5VDC AMLCD Display dimming
22
0.1/2
J1-127
RESERVED (115 VAC, 400 Hz)
N/A
Future Growth
J1-128
RESERVED (115 VAC, 400 Hz)
N/A
Future Growth

NOTE: Use twisted and shielded cables for all digital interfacing. Wire gauge current and resistance rating
are per above information.
American Wire Gauge size 22 specifies a 16 ohms for a 1000 ft cable length. The resistance above
is provided for a 100 ft cable length.
34-61-14
Page 116
May 10, 2007

4.
HARNESS VOLTAGE CHECKOUT

Before installing equipment, perform a point-to-point resistance check on the cable harness and the
voltage checks given in Figure 105. Connector pin numbers refer to the aircraft side of the FMS
connector. Also make certain that circuit breakers are correctly identified for +28 Vdc. Set the
appropriate circuit breaker (DC) to on. FMS interwiring is shown in Figure 104.
CONNECTOR PINS
HI/HOT/LOW/COLD
J1-4,5
J1-6,7
J1-53
J1-8
J1-1
J1-9
J1-9
INDICATION
FUNCTION
+28 Vdc
Primary Power
0Vdc/0 ohms
Aircraft Ground
0 to 5.0 VDC
0 to 28.0 VDC
Integral Lighting
NOTE: Refer to Figure 4
Equipment Identification
for
appropriate
hardware variation and
Integral
Lighting
Configuration.
J1-126
J1-2
0 to 5.0 VDC
J1-38
ON = >18.5 VDC
OFF = <3.5 VDC
J1-16
GROUND/OPEN
AMLCD Display Dimming if

supported
Remote Lamp Test
(Configure LAMP_TEST on
discrete I/P No. 6)*
Weight on Wheels
(Determined by Configuration)
Figure 105 Input Wiring Checks for CMA-9000 hardware variation 100-601951-XXX
* Refer to Section X, Configuration Selection of this Manual.
5.
EGI INSTALLATION
If an EGI is installed with the CMA-9000 FMS, then lever arm and boresight corrections are required.
These corrections are entered after the FMS is configured. Please refer to Section X for FMS
configuration procedure.
To enter the lever arm corrections:
(1)
Press in sequence [INIT/REF] [NEXT] and <MAINT>. Enter maintenance password

(normally 1) and MAINTENANCE 1/2 page will appear.
34-61-14
Page 117
May 10, 2007

(2)
Press <EGI> and <LEVER ARM>. The EGI must be configured in the ARINC 429 SENSOR
before having accessed to the EGI setting page.
(3)
On the FMS parameters (e.g. left side of the display), enter, for each axis, the distance (in
meters) between the CG of the EGI and the CG of the aircraft. Please note that X is positive
forward, Y is positive right, and Z is positive down.
(4)
Press <FMS TO EGI UPDATE> and <CONFIRM>. After few seconds, the EGI parameters
(right side of the display) should be updated with the entered values.
To enter the boresight corrections:
6.
(1)

(2)
Press <EGI> and <BORESIGHT>. The EGI must be configured in the ARINC 429 SENSOR
before having accessed to the EGI setting page.
(3)
On the FMS parameters (e.g. left side of the display), enter, for roll, pitch, and yaw, the angle
(in degrees) between the center line of the EGI and the body center line of the aircraft. Please
note that roll is positive on right turn, pitch is positive climbing and yaw is positive clockwise.
(4)
Press <FMS TO EGI UPDATE> and <CONFIRM>. After few seconds, the EGI parameters
(right side of the display) should be updated with the entered values.
DOPPLER INSTALLATION
If a Doppler Velocity Sensor (DVS) is installed with the CMA-9000 FMS, then boresight corrections are
required. These corrections will be entered after the FMS is configured. Please refer to Section X for
FMS configuration procedure.
To enter the boresight corrections:
(1)

(2)
Press <DVS> and <BORESIGHT>. The DVS must be configured in the ARINC 429 SENSOR
before having accessed to the DVS setting page.
(3)
On the FMS parameters (e.g. left side of the display), enter, for roll, pitch, and yaw, the angle
(in degrees) between the centerline of the DVS and the body centerline of the aircraft. Please
note that roll is positive on right turn, pitch is positive climbing and yaw is positive clockwise.
(4)
Press <CONFIRM>. After few seconds, the DVS parameters (right side of the display) should
be updated with the entered values.
34-61-14
Page 118
May 10, 2007

7.
ANNUNCIATOR INSTALLATION
For a certified installation:
(1)
A Non-Precision Approach mode annunciator shall be installed in the pilots primary field of
view. Either a dedicated remote NPA annunciator, or an appropriate EFIS annunciation must
be installed.
(2) A GPS integrity annunciator shall be installed in the pilots primary field of view. Either a
dedicated remote GPS integrity annunciator, or an appropriate EFIS annunciation must be
installed.
34-61-14
Page 119
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 120
May 10, 2007

SECTION III
POST-INSTALLATION TEST
1.
GENERAL
This section contains the necessary information and procedures to test the installation of the CMA-9000
containing software variations S/W 169-614876-001 and its interfaces to other associated aircraft
systems.
2.
CONDITIONS
The aircraft should be located in an area where the Ground Power Unit (GPU) or Auxiliary Power Unit
(APU) and later engines may be run to supply aircraft power to the avionics and hydraulic systems. For
normal operation of the system use the procedures as given in the appropriate Operators Manual.
To verify and record the sensor tests it is necessary to position the aircraft in an area clear of
surrounding obstructions and electromagnetic interference. Refer to Operator's Manual for the proper
procedures to access the pages required for many of the following tests.
The FMS should be configured for the installation and navigation database loaded. (Refer to sections X
and XI).
3.
SYSTEM TEST PREPARATION

A.
Built-In Test
The system has a Built-In Test (BIT) capability that consists of an automatic test at Power-up,
periodic tests during operation and operator requested tests while in Maintenance mode.
The power-up test monitors the operational status of the internal circuitry and generates a message
when a malfunction is detected. The following operations are tested on power-up:
RAM test
CPU test
FPU test
Operational code FEPROM CRC
Bootstrap code FEPROM CRC
Database test (PSA)
Non volatile memory corruption tests
Loop tests of the ARINC 429 receivers/transmitters
Loop tests of RS 422 receivers/transmitters
Non volatile memory test
Real Time Clock test
Battery Test (monitors the battery capacity and gives at least a month warning of impending
failure
34-61-14
Page 201
May 10, 2007

The continuous BIT checks the following operations:
Validity of digital inputs

Operational code FEPROM CRC
Bootstrap code FEPROM PSA CRC
CRC checksum of installation configurable items
ACTIVE Navigation Database test (FEPROM PSA)
429 inputs (external equipment validation/availability)
Discrete I/O tests
Magnetic Variation Table CRC check
The Maintenance Mode Manually Activated BIT performs self-test upon operator request as
follows:
429 receivers/transmitters loop tests

422 receivers/transmitters loop tests
Discrete I/O tests
Keyboard tests
Time Mark input test
Annunciator activation tests
AMLCD/Video Generator functional/performance tests
Characters Font Test (Size 9*9 and 9*13)
Battery Voltage Level Checker
Non-Volatile data and DATABASE FEPROM sectors Test
Keyboard Test
Internal Annunciators Test (Individually or All in Sequence)
Colors Test
Video Test
Contrast Test
The Automatic tests will be part of the Acceptance Test Procedures (extensive tests performed
prior to FMS delivery) and the CMA-9000 will provide manual triggers for the following test:
ARINC 429 Bus Loopback Test (ARINC LOOP)

AMLCD Colors Test (All in Sequence)
LDR tests (enable/disable)
UART Loopback Test (UART LOOP)
Time Mark Loop Test (TIME MARK LOOP)
Discretes test (DISC O/P with DIP and DOP fields)
Radio Interface Board test
Colour Display test
Perform system testing of the FMS as follows:
34-61-14
Page 202
May 10, 2007

B.
Front panel brightness control

The front panel of the CMA-9000 is composed of three items: the display, 9 annunciators, and
integral lighting. The brightness range supported by each component is nominally:
(1)
Display:
In DAY mode: 1.5 to 120 fL
In NIGHT mode: 0.25 to 3.0 fL.
In NVG mode: 0.25 to 3.0 fL.
The brightness for the display can be controlled by either the combination of the BRT front
panel function key and the photosensitive Light Dependent Resistor (LDR) sensor or by the
combination of dimming curve and external 0-5 VDC external power DC voltage source. A
configuration option allows selecting the control source (e.g. BRT key + LDR or external DC
voltage ratio). The BRT key /LDR sensor are disabled while operating in the EXTERNAL
mode where the display brightness is controlled by an external voltage source and that source
is valid (e.g. > 0.3 VDC). When configured to, the FMS can use a default dimming curve,
hard-coded in the FMS software, or use a pre-loaded dimming curve (through data loading
capability). Refer to the configuration options of the DIMMING 1/1 configuration page.
(2)
Annunciators:
In DAY mode: constant at 110 fL.
In NIGHT mode: constant at 3.0 fL.
In NVG mode: constant at 1.0 fL.
(3)
Integral Lighting:
In DAY mode: Integral lighting turned off by the external 5VDC/28VDC voltage source
In NIGHT mode: controlled by the external 5VDC/28VDC voltage source.
In NVG mode: Integral lighting turned off by the external 5VDC/28VDC voltage source
The brightness of the keyboard (integral lighting) in NIGHT mode is to be supplied from an
external 5VDC/28VDC voltage source. The curve of the specification SP L330 M0901 Issue C
Annex A2, Dimming curve for 5V (the voltage is scaled down by a factor of 28VDC/5VDC =
5.3 for the 28VDC configuration in order to use the same curve) Components, dimming curve
down to 0 fL. is used. The keyboard brightness luminescence is switched off when an invalid
DC voltage signal is detected (less than 0.3VDC).
34-61-14
Page 203
May 10, 2007

Luminance vs Control Voltage

(LEDs reproduce incandescent lamp response curve)
100%
90%
80%
Brightness
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
5.00
4.75
4.50
4.25
4.00
3.75
3.50
3.25
3.00
2.75
2.50
2.25
2.00
1.75
1.50
1.25
1.00
0.75
0.50
0.25
0.00
10%
Control Voltage (0-5V)
Figure 201 Integral Lighting 5V Curve
C.
Configure the FMS (if the configuration for the aircraft was not previously done). The configuration
identification CFG NO is displayed on the FMSx IDENT 1/2 page. It is essential that the FMS
include the proper configuration for a specific installation. The methods of configuration are
described in Section X.
D.
Navigation Database Loading

Load the navigation, customer, and/or the user databases. The methods for loading the databases
are detailed in Section XI.
NOTE: In a dual installation:
For synchronized operation, the operator must ensure that the same navigation and user
databases are entered in each FMS.
34-61-14
Page 204
May 10, 2007

4.
PROCEDURE
The purpose of this test procedure is to ensure the installation of the CMA-9000 is operating correctly
and in no way affects the operation of other aircraft systems.
NOTE:
A.
In the key sequences shown to display pages, square brackets [ ] indicates a function key,
angle brackets < > indicates a line select key (left and right softkeys). Omit any test or
portion of a test which is not applicable to installation.
Power On
NOTE:
B.
Future Growth - Pin J1-03 provides the capability for an ON/OFF switch on CMA-9000
FMS. The CMA-9000 is activated (power is ON) when appropriate 28VDC circuit
breaker is set and this pin is left Open. See note in Section II Figure 103 of this manual.
(1)
Verify all relevant circuit breakers for the FMS and associated systems are set to ON.
(2)
If the display dimming is configured to internal control (DIMMING page software configuration
set to INTERNAL), pressing and holding the BRT key will adjust the display intensity. Adjust to
a comfortable level.
Annunciator Test and RADIO Page

(1)
During the start up sequence verify that an all white screen is displayed and the annunciators
(as selected by configuration) MENU, FAIL, MSG, POS, OFST, NPA, TX1, TX2 and EXEC
illuminate in sequence starting with MENU and proceeding left to right until the EXEC
annunciator is illuminated.
(2)
Verify that the FAIL annunciator remains extinguished. Depending on the configuration, the
RADIO 1/4 or the FMSx IDENT 1/2 MCDU page appears.
34-61-14
Page 205
May 10, 2007

(3)
If the FMS is to interface with radios as a radio control unit (ADF, ATC NAV,
COMconfigured) the RADIO 1/4 page appears. Otherwise the FMSx IDENT 1/2 appears as
illustrated in (7).
RADIO
(4)
1L
<VHF1
2L
<VHF2
3L
<NAV1
4L
<NAV2
5L
<ATC1
6L
<VOL
1/4
04
05
125.150
--151.000 1 2 4 . 6 5 0
YJN A
---115.80 1 1 6 . 7 0
YUL
109.30H
YQB
116.30 1 1 2 . 8 0
SBY
2200
1500
CTL C1 C2 IC N1 N2
FMS
7 6 4 3 3
118.400
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
Press [INIT REF], INT/REF INDEX 1/2 is displayed:
FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX 1/2

WPT DATA>
1L
<IDENT
2L
<POS INIT
WPT LISTS>
2R
3L
<CTR LEGS
NEAREST>
3R
4L
<DISPLAY
MARK ON TOP>
4R
5L
<SETUP
NAV STATUS>
5R
6L
<MSG RECALL
DES+SAR>
6R
1R
34-61-14
Page 206
May 10, 2007

(5)
Press <IDENT>. The IDENT 1/2 page appears:
FMS1 IDENT
1/2
5L
NAV DATABASE
ACTIVE
K L M W W 0 6 9 7 OCT10-NOV06/03
SECOND
KLMWW0697 NOV07-DEC04/03
OP PROGRAM
CFG NO
614876-xxx xx
23253
CUSTOM DATABASE
DATE
EC-RTEST
MAR21/04
USER DATABASE
DATE
EC-UDTEST
MAR21/04
6L
<SETUP
1L
2L
3L
4L
POS INIT>
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
(6)
Verify and record the software and configuration identifications. These are as specified in the
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement.
Press <POS INIT>.
(7)
The POS INIT 1/2 page appears.
POS INIT/REF
1/2
FMS POS DR
1L
2L
3L
N47o26.28 W122o18.67
REF WAYPOINT
KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0
INS MODE
SET ALT
-----F T
STANDBY
ALIGN
SET INS POS
o
4L
>GND
5L
1757:04z
6L
<SETUP
UTC
DATE
1R
2R
3R
4R
OCT20/04
5R
START ALIGN>
6R
34-61-14
Page 207
May 10, 2007

(8)
Press [RTE], the ACT ROUTE 1/X page appears:
ACT
C.
1/2
DEST
RUNWAY
FLT NO
1L
KSEA
2L
-----
3L
>OFF
4L
<ERASE RTE1
5L
<BACKTRACK
6L
(9)
RTE 1
ORIGIN
DMAP APPEND
PANC
KL007
ROUTE
1R
2R
KSEAPANC1
3R
CO ROUTES>
4R
USER ROUTES>
5R
OFFSET
<RTE 2
R0.0N M
6R
This completes the initialize sequence and from this point on the operator may access any of
the screens necessary for this test procedure. Ensure there are at least four waypoints in the
active route to enable the discrete output tests.
Heading Input Verification

(1)
Press [PROG], [PREV]. PROGRESS 4/4 page appears.

NOTE: PROGRESS 3/3 might appear depending on the configuration.
ACT PROGRESS
HEADWIND
1L
2L
3L
027K T
HDG/DA
290o/ L11o
MAGVAR
E019.9o
4L
ALT (GPS)
5L
6L
QNH SET
28.63
FT
4/4
CROSSWIND
R44K T
TAS
240K T
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
(2)
Verify the Heading as displayed on the HDG/DA line and HSI or EFIS agree within 2
degrees.
(3)
Slew the compass system in 30 degrees increment and verify the HDG/DA readout changes
in the same direction and remains within 2 degrees at each stop.
34-61-14
Page 208
May 10, 2007

(4)
Fail the compass system (by pulling applicable circuit breaker) and verify the FMS indicates a
heading failure. The MSG annunciator and one of the following scratchpad message will
appear:
if no heading information is available: HEADING INPUT LOST.
if only the AHRS was unpowered : AHRS FAILED.
The message will also be displayed on MESSAGE RECALL 1/1 page. This page may be
displayed by pressing [INIT REF], <MSG RECALL> or by pressing [MSG] or by pressing and
maintaining [INIT/REF] for more than one second.
FMS1 MESSAGE RECALL 1/1

1L
2L
3L
*VUHF1 CONTROL LOST1

*TACAN NAV LOST
1
DATABASE OUT OF DATE1
VUHF2 CONTROL LOST 1
INDEPENDENT OP
1
2R
3R
4L
4R
5L
5R
6L
D.
1R
MAINT MSG>
6R
(5)
Re-activate the compass system and verify the heading failure message disappears and the
MSG annunciator extinguishes.
(6)
Repeat above test if dual Heading System is installed.
True Airspeed Verification

When no TAS inputs are available, Manual TAS may be entered if TAS source in configuration is
set to Manual. (Refer to AIRCRAFT CONFIG 2/2 page).
(1)
Press [PROG], [PREV]. ACT PROGRESS 4/4 (or 3/3) page appears.
(2)
Connect a Pilot/Static test set to the aircraft. Input values of Airspeed of 50, 150, 200 knots.
(3)
Verify that the TAS reads within 4 knots.
(4)
Fail the ADC system and verify the FMS indicates an ADC failure. AIR DATA LOST or ADC1
FAILED or ADC2 FAILED for digital type ADC will appear on the scratchpad and the MSG
annunciator is illuminated (for the AIR DATA LOST System Alert message only). The
message will also be displayed on the FMS MESSAGE RECALL 1/1 page accessed as
above.
(5)
Re-activates the ADC system and verify the MSG annunciator extinguishes and the message
disappears from the scratchpad and MESSAGE RECALL page.
(6)
Repeat above test if dual TAS System is installed.
34-61-14
Page 209
May 10, 2007

E.
GPS Sensor Unit

NOTE: There are two options available which are selectable by Configuration entry. One option is
using an external ARINC 743A compatible GPS receiver (CMA-3012 or CMA-3024 or
CMA-3112) or an external ARINC 743 compatible GPS receiver (HONEYWELL,
HG2021GD02, HG2021GD03 and TRIMBLE TASMAN TA-12) or the embedded GPS in
the EGI (LN_100GT, SIGMA50H). The displays are different but overall the same
information is available.
(1)
EGI (If LN_100GT is installed)

(a) Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page appears:
NAV STATUS INDEX
1/1
1L
GPS>
2L
DME>
2R
VOR/DME/TCN>
3R
3L
<DVS
4L
<INS/GPS
5L
<INS/DVS
6L
<INIT/REF
1R
4R
X-FMS>
5R
DESELECT>
6R
(b) Press <GPS>
GPS STATUS
1/2
5L
POSITION
N45o34.25 W073o38.0
MODE
HOR ACCURACY
INIT
0.45N M
TK/GS
GPS ALT
072o/150K T
5000F T
VER SPD
VER ACCURACY
220
FT/MIN
36F T
UTC
DATE
JUL11/04
1506:24Z
6L
<NAV STATUS
1L
2L
3L
4L
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
Ensure MODE is indicating 3D. If the system is not in 3D, ensure aircraft is located outside in
an unrestricted area.
Record the displayed parameters.
34-61-14
Page 210
May 10, 2007

(c) Press [NEXT]
GPS STATUS
1L
2L
KEY STATUS
KEY VER
5L
GDOP
11.0
HOR DOP
2.1
RAIM HIL
0.34N M
6L
<NAV STATUS
3L
4L
2/2
FAIL CODE
0000
SAT TRK
5
PDOP
40.3
VER DOP
1.0
WIND
120T/15K T
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R

(2)
EGI (If SIGMA50H is installed)

(a) Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page appears:
NAV STATUS INDEX
1/1
1L
GPS>
2L
DME>
2R
VOR/DME/TCN>
3R
3L
<DVS
4L
<INS/GPS
5L
<INS/DVS
6L
<INIT/REF
1R
4R
X-FMS>
5R
DESELECT>
6R
(b) Press <GPS>
GPS STATUS
1/2
5L
POSITION
N45o34.25 W073o38.0
MODE
HOR ACCURACY
INIT
0.45N M
TK/GS
GPS ALT
072o/150K T
5000F T
VER SPD
VER ACCURACY
FT/MIN
36F T
220
UTC
DATE
1506:24Z
JUL11/04
6L
<NAV STATUS
1L
2L
3L
4L
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
34-61-14
Page 211
May 10, 2007

Ensure MODE is indicating OPER. If the system is not in OPER, ensure aircraft is located
outside in an unrestricted area.
(c) Press [NEXT]
GPS STATUS
1L
2L
KEY STATUS
KEY VER
5L
GDOP
11.0
HOR DOP
2.1
RAIM HIL
0.34N M
6L
<NAV STATUS
3L
4L
2/2
FAIL CODE
0000
SAT TRK
5
PDOP
40.3
VER DOP
1.0
WIND
120T/15K T
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R

(3)
ARINC 743A/ARINC 743 compatible GPS receiver

(a) Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>. NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page appears:
NAV STATUS INDEX

1L
<PREDICT RAIM
2L
3L
<DVS
4L
1/1
GPS>
DME>
2R
VOR/DME/TCN>
3R
KALMAN>
4R
5L
6L
1R
5R
<INIT/REF
DESELECT>
6R
34-61-14
Page 212
May 10, 2007

(b) Press <GPS>. GPS STATUS 1/2 page appears.
GPS STATUS
5L
OP MODE
NAV
SAT VIS
8
HOR FOM
20
M
HOR DOP
1
HOR INT
O.20N M
6L
<NAV STATUS
1L
2L
3L
4L
1/2
SAT TRK
5
VER FOM
65M
VER DOP
2
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
(c) Ensure the mode status is NAV. If not, ensure the aircraft is located outside in an area
that is not obstructed from receiving satellite transmissions.
(d) Record the following parameters:
SAT VIS (Satellites Visible)
SAT TRK (Satellites Tracked)
HOR FOM (Horizontal Figure of Merit)
VER FOM (Vertical Figure of Merit)
HOR DOP (Horizontal Dilution of Precision)
VER DOP (Vertical Dilution of Precision)
HOR INT (Horizontal Integration)
(e) Press [NEXT], GPS 2/2 page appears.
GPS STATUS
1L
2L
072o/600K T
+220F T / M I N
ALT
+1 2 0 0 0 F T
3L
4L
2/2
POSITION
N45o30.91 W073o38.02
TK/GS
VER SPD
5L
UTC
1506:24Z
6L
<NAV STATUS
DATE
JUL11/99
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
34-61-14
Page 213
May 10, 2007

Record the following parameters:

POSITION (GPS position of Latitude and Longitude)
TK/GS (Track Angle and Ground Speed)
VERT SPD (GPS Vertical Velocity)
ALT (Altitude)
UTC (GPS Universal Coordinated Time)
DATE (GPS Date)
(f)
Press <NAV STATUS>. NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page appears as shown in (a).
Press <PREDICT RAIM>. GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1 page appears.
NOTE: GPS PREDICT RAIM is not present when EGI is selected in configuration
pages.
GPS PREDICT RAIM

IDENT
1L
PANC
2L
1200Z
ETA
3L
1145Z
1150Z
1155Z
1200Z
1205Z
1210Z
1215Z
1/1
NONE
ENRT
TERM
APPR
APPR
TERM
NONE
1R
2R
3R
4L
4R
5L
5R
6L
<NAV STATUS
SAT DESEL>
6R
Enter a valid waypoint identifier and press LSK 1L to transfer scratchpad entry into the
IDENT display area.
Enter an estimated time of arrival number and press LSK 2L to transfer scratchpad entry
into the ETA display area.
After a short delay, the results of the predictive RAIM computation are displayed. If the
predictive RAIM for all times displayed is ****, verify the FMS configuration or check the
connection from the FMS to the GNSSU. If the FMS is configured correctly, wait at least
25 minutes to ensure that the GPS has obtained the latest almanac, and then try again.
34-61-14
Page 214
May 10, 2007

F.
DME Status
(1)
Press [INIT/REF]. <NAV STATUS>, <DME>, DME STATUS 1/1 page is displayed. The DME
stations which are automatically tuned by the CMA-9000 are displayed.
With Lat_Long coordinates:
DME STATUS
1L
2L
3L
ID
YUL
IJFK
YJN
PLB
YQA
YUD
4L
N/A
REJ
REJ
FREQ
116.30
109.50
118.00
118.80
119.00
120.25
1/1
DIS
25.5N M
NM
64.5N M
12.5N M
39.0N M
99.5N M
POSITION
N46o43.31 W078o46.07
5L
6L
STAT
<NAV STATUS
DME DESEL>
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
With UTM coordinates:
DME STATUS
1L
2L
3L
4L
5L
6L
ID
YUL
IJFK
YJN
PLB
YQA
YUD
STAT
N/A
REJ
REJ
FREQ
116.30
109.50
118.00
118.80
119.00
120.25
1/1
DIS
25.5N M
NM
64.5N M
12.5N M
39.0N M
99.5N M
POSITION
10T ET 5200 5529
<NAV STATUS
DME DESEL>
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
Record the ID, STAT, FREQ and DIS parameters.

NOTE:
With aircraft on the ground reception of DME stations may be impaired.
34-61-14
Page 215
May 10, 2007

G.
VOR/DME/TCN Status
(1)
Press <NAV STATUS>, <VOR/DME/TCN>. The VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 page display
the stations used by the FMS in VOR DME Navigation.
NOTE: The title will change to VOR/DME or TACAN, as applicable, if some of the equipment
is not configured.
When LAT/LONG selected via [INIT REF], <SETUP>, <COORD>:
VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1

1L
SOURCE/ID FREQ RAD/DME

VOR1 YJN
115.80
260
DME
YJN
115.80
130NM
2L
3L
2R
TCN
UHU 99X 150/ 110NM
4L
N4500.00
5L
6L
1R
POSITION
W07200.00
<NAV STATUS
3R
4R
5R
6R
When UTM selected via [INIT REF], <SETUP>, <COORD>:

1L
2L
3L
4L
5L
6L

VOR1 YJN
115.80
260
DME1 YJN
115.80
130NM
VOR2 YUL
116.30
180
DME2 IABC 109.30H 12.0NM
TCN
UHU 99X 150/ 110NM

POSITION
19T 263560 04987374
<NAV STATUS
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
NOTE: Right side data is displayed if dual VOR/DME is installed.
34-61-14
Page 216
May 10, 2007

H.
Radio Test
(1)
Press [RADIO], [NEXT], [NEXT], the page RADIO TEST 3/4 should appear. The self-tests
are available only if enabled by RADIO CONFIG pages.
RADIO TEST
VHF1
1L
>OFF
2L
>OFF
3L
>OFF
4L
>OFF
5L
>OFF
3/4
VHF2
OFF<
VUF1
VUF2
OFF<
ATC1
ATC2
NAV1
NAV2
DME1
DME2
6L
OFF<
OFF<
1R
2R
3R
4R
OFF<
5R
TEST ALL>
6R
Using the LSKs the radio self-test can be initiated. The LSK options are OFF, ARMED,
STARTED, INIT, TIMEOUT. LSK 6R executes all tests.
I.
Discrete Output Test

NOTE:
(1)
These tests are for discrete outputs only. These tests are not applicable for aircraft
equipped with an EFIS system interfaced with the FMS via digital bus.
Press [INIT REF], [NEXT], <MAINT>, <O/P TEST>, [NEXT] and [NEXT]. Annunciator Test 3/4
page appears.
O/P ANNUN TEST

WPT
1L
>ON
OFFSET
>ON G P S I N T
3/4
MSG
OFF<
GPS INT
3L
<OFFOFF<
ARM -APPROACH--ENABLE
>ON
<OFF
OFF<
4L
>ON
2L
LEGCHG
5L
6L
MCAUTION
OFF<
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
<RETURN
6R
34-61-14
Page 217
May 10, 2007

(2)
Press <MSG>. Disregard any indication not applicable to the specific aircraft installation.
O/P ANNUN TEST

WPT
1L
>ON
OFFSET
>ON G P S I N T
3/4
MSG
ON<
GPS INT
3L
<OFFOFF<
<OFF
OFF<
>ON
4L
>ON
2L
LEGCHG
MCAUTION
OFF<
5L
6L
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
<RETURN
6R
ANNUNCIATORS:- MSG ANNUNCIATOR = ON

(3)
Press <MSG>. Disregard any indication not applicable to the specific aircraft installation.
O/P ANNUN TEST

WPT
1L
>ON
OFFSET
>ON G P S I N T
3/4
MSG
OFF<
GPS INT
3L
<OFFOFF<
<OFF
OFF<
>ON
4L
>ON
2L
LEGCHG
5L
6L
MCAUTION
OFF<
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
<RETURN
6R
ANNUNCIATORS:- MSG ANNUNCIATOR = OFF

J.
EFIS Interface Test

NOTE:
For EFIS equipped aircraft refer to the appropriate Operators Manuals for the proper
procedures to access the pages required for the following tests:
(1)
On the EFIS Controller select MAP MODE, and if applicable, select the RAD/NAV switch to
NAV.
(2)
Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <DESELECT>. Deselect GPS by pressing LSK 1R until
DESEL appears.
(3)
Press [RTE] to display ROUTE 1/1 page.
34-61-14
Page 218
May 10, 2007

(4)
Enter any valid airport identifier for both ORIGIN and DESTINATION fields.
(5)
Press [INIT REF], <POS INIT> and LSK 1R, the Present Position LAT-LONG is transferred to
the scratchpad. Press [LEGS] and enter Present Position as the active waypoint, WPT01 by
pressing LSK 1L.
(6)
Using WPT01, create WPT02 by entering WPT01000/10 and insert after WPT01 by pressing
LSK 2L.
(7)
LSK 3L.
(8)
LSK 4L.
(9)
LSK 5L.
(10) Press [EXEC].

(11) Set range of EFIS Nav display to 20 miles range.
(12) Slew aircraft heading to 000 degrees to verify the display of the created course, DTG and
ETA. Figure 201 is a typical simplified Map Mode display.
(13) Press [LEGS] and perform 30 course intercept of WPT02 by pressing LSK 2L and then
LSK 1L.
(14) Enter course intercept of 30 into scratchpad and press LSK 6R.
(15) Press [EXEC].
(16) On the EFIS Controller switch to ARC Mode.
(17) Verify that the Deviation Bar is to the left on the second dot. Figure 202 is a typical ARC
Mode display.
(18) Slew compass to proper setting.
34-61-14
Page 219
May 10, 2007

TRK UP
MODE
TRK
HDG
HEADING
BUG
DTW
ETA
XX.X
DTW
15
12
18
XXXX.Xz
ETA
TRK
BEARING
TO ADF1
WPT/
IDENTIFIERS
20
ADF1
G706086
Figure 202. Typical Map Mode Display
Figure 203. Typical ARC Mode Display
34-61-14
Page 220
May 10, 2007

K.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Test

(1)
Purpose
The purpose of this test is to demonstrate the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the FMS
subsystems with each other, with all other subsystems, and electronic equipment installed on
the aircraft.
(2)
Test Prerequisites
(a) All existing and new aircraft systems have been correctly installed and are fully
operational.
(b) All aircraft subsystems are switched on and set for normal operation. Normal monitoring
conditions have been established.
(c) All receivers have been adjusted for standard operation in accordance with the
requirements of the appropriate specifications. All squelch circuits have been adjusted to
provide maximum sensitivity.
(d) Electrical power will be supplied by the aircraft's engine driven generators during the
EMC test.
(e) The aircraft is located in an area of low externally (to the aircraft) generated electrical
emissions. If high ambient electrical noise levels exist, caution will be taken during
evaluation so as not to confuse externally generated electrical interference with normal
internal aircraft electrical noise levels.
(3)
Evaluation Criteria
System performance and operation within the interference environment will be evaluated
based on the following criteria:
(a) MALFUNCTION: A failure of a subsystem due to electromagnetic interference that
results in a flight safety situation, a mission abort, or a failure to accomplish the mission.
(b) UNACCEPTABLE CONDITION: An abnormality in the expected operation or output of a
receiver or subsystem due to electromagnetic interference which usually cannot be
termed a malfunction, but which is detrimental to system performance.
(c) UNDESIRABLE CONDITION: A recognizable interruption of normal output which cannot
be designated as an unacceptable condition or malfunction and which is considered
tolerable.
34-61-14
Page 221
May 10, 2007

(4)
Test Procedure
The attached matrix Figure 203 is to be used as a guide in performing the EMC test.
(a) RECEIVERS WITH AUDIBLE OUTPUTS: With each receiver operating from its normal
receiver antenna, a background noise level will be observed with minimum electrical and
electronic equipment in operation. All potential interference producing equipment will
then be operated while monitoring the receiver for an increase in receiver noise. Each
receiver will be tuned throughout its operating range and monitored for interfering signals
generated from the FMS electronic equipment.
(b) RECEIVERS WITH VISUAL OUTPUTS: Receivers that fall into this category include
MLS, TCAS, SATCOM, GLIDE SLOPE, MARKER BEACON, RADAR ALTIMETER,
DME, FMS, GPS, ADF, WEATHER RADAR and VHF navigation. The visual outputs of
each system will be monitored with minimum equipment operating to determine proper
operation.
Those outputs will then be monitored continuously as the potential
interference sources are energized.
(c) ATC/DME: Interference within these systems will be monitored in flight to determine if
performance is satisfactory during routine flight operations.
(d) TRANSMITTERS: communication tests will be made to determine if any transmitted
signal is affected by the operation of the FMS equipment in the aircraft or if the
transmitted signal affects the operation or displays of the FMS.
The VHF
communications transceivers (AM and FM) will be tuned to and transmitted on the
frequencies listed below for a period of 30 seconds while observing the GPS
signal-to-noise ratio of each satellite being received.
121.150 MHz
121.175 MHz
121.200 MHz
131.250 MHz
131.275 MHz
131.300 MHz
Record any degradation in the received signal-to-noise ratio from any satellite where
navigation using GPS is no longer reliable.
Repeat above test for the UHF communication transceivers. Use frequencies 211.55,
218.55, 304.55 and 397.55 MHz.
(e) ENGINES: During a ground engine run, potential EMI to engine controls, fuel feed and
related circuits will be evaluated. Operation of the engines will be monitored to show that
EMI does not cause inadvertent operation which could result in engine shutdown,
overspeed, thrust reverser operation or any other detriment to flight safety.
34-61-14
Page 222
May 10, 2007

(f)
INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM:

System compatibility will be demonstrated
qualitatively by carefully monitoring the displays while operating the FMS equipment
which are judged to be potential interference sources. The displays will be made
operable either by actual data input, or simulated with test sets or other means used
during the system functional checkout.
(g) AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM: Pitch, roll and yaw signals to the control
surface movement while the autopilot is operated within the aircrafts EMI environment.
Monitoring will take place during routine flight operations as well as the Lateral and
Vertical Modes.
(h) AIR DATA COMPUTER: A ground test set will be used to provide altitude and airspeed
inputs. The flight instruments will be observed for abnormal changes while the potential
interference producing subsystem is operated.
(i)
Flight Management System: The FMS will be on either a DATA or NAV page and will be
monitored throughout the EMC test.
(j)
IN-FLIGHT EVALUATION: Some tests may not be accomplished while the aircraft is on
the ground, these tests in which problems have been detected during the ground test will
be deferred to the flight test. For more on the IN-FLIGHT EMI TESTING, refer to the
FLIGHT FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURE DOCUMENT FOR CMC ELECTRONICS
INC. FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CMA-9000 contained in Appendix B.
LIST ALL DEFERRED EMC TESTS
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
34-61-14
Page 223
May 10, 2007
MONITOR
OPERATE
34-61-14
FMS
UHF
REC
EIVE
RS
FM R
ECE
IVER
GSM
S
PHO
NE
MOD
EST
RAN
SPO
NDE
R
ENG
INE
INST
RUM
AUT
ENT
OPIL
S
OT
FLIG
HT R
ECO
RDE
MAS
R
TER
CAU
TION
INTE
RCO
M
HEA
DING
SYS
TEM
STAL
L WA
RNIN
FUE
G
L QU
ANT
ITY
FIRE
WAR
NING
INTE
GRA
TED
AVIO
HF R
NICS
ECE
IVER
S
LOW
LEVE
L WI
WEA
NDS
THE
HEA
R RA
R SY
DAR
S
TCA
S
VHF
N
OMM
REC
EIVE
AV R
RS
E
CEIV
ILS R
ERS
ECE
IVER
S
MLS
REC
EIVE
RS
DME
REC
EIVE
RS
ADF
REC
EIVE
RS
SATC
OM
RAD
IO A
LTIM
ETE
ADC
RS
VHF
C

FMS
TUNE VHF
COMM REC'S
TUNE ADF REC'S
TUNE & XMIT

HF REC'S
XMIT SATCOM
COMMENTS:
NOTE: Enter N/A for any non-applicable systems. All entries must be completed.
9810013
Figure 204 EMC Matrix Chart
Page 224
May 10, 2007

L.
IRS to FMS to IRS Ground Check

The following tests are predicated on there being a triple IRS, triple FMS installed, however, the
tests may be adapted to accommodate the number of systems interface to each other.
The FMS uses the LTN-92, LTN-101, Laseref V or ADIRU as IRSs. As such the MCDU pages for
IRS and IRS have slight differences but the pertinent information will be displayed but not
necessarily on the same pages as described in these test procedures.
Conditions for testing:
FMS in DR mode (disconnect GPS Antenna cable from all FMSs if necessary).
ensure each MCDU logs onto the ONSIDE FMU.
ensure each FMS is in INDEPENDENT mode.
(1)
Power Check
(a) Set Mode Select Switch to NAV.
(b) Ensure IRS1 MSU ALIGN annunciator illuminates.
(2)
High Speed outputs to all FMUs

(a) On each MCDU press [INIT REF], <POS INIT>, [NEXT].
(b) Ensure IRS1 is displayed on page POS REF 3/3 LSK 3L.
(3)
Retrieve IRS Program Number (LTN-92 only)

(a) For LTN-92
(4)
Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <IRS>.
Ensure IRS1 NAV STATUS 1/3 page displays the PGM NUMBER, (e.g. 92-0413).
INS1 Position Initialization

(a) Press [INIT REF], <POS INIT>.
adjacent LSK 4R.
On POS INIT 1/3 page, enter the present position
(b) Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <IRS>.

present position is displayed adjacent LSK 2L.
On IRS1 NAV STATUS 1/3 page the
(c) Within 5 to 15 minutes NAV shows adjacent to LSK 2L.

(5)
Repeat above tests substituting IRS2 and FMS2 and again for IRS3 and FMS3
(6)
Reconnect GPS antenna cables if necessary
34-61-14
Page 225
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 226
May 10, 2007

SECTION IV
FLIGHT LINE TEST/TROUBLESHOOTING
1.
GENERAL
This section contains Flight Line Test/Troubleshooting procedures for the CMA-9000 Flight
Management System (FMS). In the case of a new installation, the operational test should only be
initiated following successful completion of the aircraft wiring check as specified in Section II,
Installation, of this manual. These procedures should be used in conjunction with the Aircraft Flight
Manual (AFM) to determine the options available and the associated selections.
2.
ALERT MESSAGES
When a system failure occurs, a system alert message is generated and displayed on the FMS. These
messages have the highest priorities and identify a condition that should be cleared before further FMS
navigation is possible or advisable.
Alert messages causes both the FMS MSG annunciator and the remote MSG annunciator to illuminate
until all the messages have been cleared from the scratchpad (e.g. acknowledged) by operator. These
messages are cleared from the scratchpad by pressing the [CLR] key, which also turns off the remote
MSG annunciator and the FMS MSG annunciator. New (e.g. not acknowledged) system alerting
messages are displayed in the scratchpad in amber. All existing messages can be recalled from the
FMS MESSAGE RECALL page, the messages are automatically removed when the causing condition
is corrected.
Figure 301 provides a list of messages available, the cause and recommended action.
For reference and completeness, in addition to the messages related to troubleshooting and
maintenance, the list also contains alert messages not related to maintenance or troubleshoting.
3.
TROUBLESHOOTING PHILOSOPHY
The troubleshooting information given in this section enables a flight line maintenance technician to
rapidly isolate a FMS malfunction down to a defective unit (black box). The troubleshooting information
is presented in the form of charts comprising a series of logical (rational) progressions, which guide the
technician to the malfunctioning unit. Refer to Figure 305, Testing and Troubleshooting Flow Chart.
The instructions regarding the removal and replacement of units are given in Section IX,
Installation/Removal, of this manual.
When a faulty unit is located and replaced, it is mandatory that the system testing procedures be
performed.
Maintenance pages and typical displays are provided in Figure 305 through 312.
34-61-14
Page 301
May 10, 2007

4.
FAULT LOG
All fault events are recorded in the non-volatile memory. The events are accessed via the LOG 1/X
page(s). The fault messages associated to a given event are found in the FILEx 1/X page(s). These
pages allow the operator to transfer (download) the content of the page through the RS-422 port. If the
saved data exceeds the allocated non-volatile memory space, the message MAINTENANCE LOG
FULL will be displayed in the scratchpad. The unit remains operational but additional faults will not be
logged anymore until the fault date is deleted.
A.
SYSTEM ALERT MESSAGES

NOTE:
System Alert Messages are messages, which require immediate pilot action:
Displayed in amber on the MESSAGE RECALL page (only if the associated collector
message is inactive) and the scratchpad
Displayed in the scratchpad until acknowledged (unless the associated collector
message is active)
Can be collector messages for Maintenance Advisory Messages or other alert
messages (e.g. Can inhibit the display of other messages)
Alert Messages are the highest priority scratchpad messages (cannot be typed over or
overwritten by any other message type)
Unless otherwise noted, the CMA-9000 Master Caution is inactive (e.g. FMS is still
functional) for all the System Alert messages.
Collector messages are messages that combine several fault conditions into a single
alert message (e.g. AIR DATA LOST combines ADC1 FAILED and ADC2 FAILED
Maintenance Advisory messages).
MESSAGE
2 HOURS GPS KEY ALERT
ADF CONTROL LOST
ADF1 CONTROL LOST
ADF2 CONTROL LOST
ADF CONTROL LOST
ADF1 CONTROL LOST
ADF2 CONTROL LOST
AIR DATA LOST
AMU CONTROL LOST
DESCRIPTION
The SA/AS GPS key will expire in
two hours.
The FMS cannot control the
identified ARINC 429 ADF radio.
identified DF-206 ADF radio.
The FMS detects a total loss of ADC
data on the onside and offside
FMSs .
The FMS cannot set a radio volume

level or has detected a failure of the
AMU or the AMU communication
bus.
ACTION
Enter the new key to avoid the loss of the
GPS navigation.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 input.
Control ADF from another source. Advise
maintenance.
Check serial bus connections to/from radio.
Control DF-206 ADF from another source.
Advise maintenance.
Ensure that ADC is powered.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 ADC
input(s).
Verify if the ADC(s) operate(s) normally.
Advise maintenance.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 AMU
input. Control the AMU from another source.
Advise maintenance.
Figure 301 System Alert Messages (Sheet 1 of 10)
34-61-14
Page 302
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
ARM APPROACH
ATC CONTROL LOST

ATC1 CONTROL LOST
ATC2 CONTROL LOST
CDU1 INPUT LOST
CDU2 INPUT LOST
CDU3 INPUT LOST
CHECK ANP
CHECK TRUE/MAG REF
COM CONTROL LOST

COM1 CONTROL LOST
COM2 CONTROL LOST
COM CONTROL LOST

COM3 CONTROL LOST
COM4 CONTROL LOST
DATABASE OUT OF DATE

DISCONTINUITY
DMAP INPUT LOST
DME/DME NAV LOST
DESCRIPTION
When the approach mode arming is
configured to MANUAL,
the FMS detects that at 30 nm to the
destination airport, that the approach
mode has not been enabled (armed).
The FMS repeats the check at 3 nm
to the FAF.
transponder (transponder name
configured as ATC).
Communication with external CDUx
is not available.
ACTION
Arm the destination airport at 30 nm. Arm the
FAF at 3 nm.
The FMS ANP (Actual Navigation

Performance) value exceeds the
RNP (Required Navigation
Performance) value.
Verify RNP/ANP values on PROGRESS 1/3 or

1/4 page.
Monitor FMS position, perform manual position
update if necessary (not possible in GPS Nav
mode).
Otherwise revert to an alternate means of
navigation.
If required, change Angle reference to MAG via
FMS SETUP page (or alternatively via external
switch).
Check connection on the ARINC 429
COM/VUHF input.
Control COM/VUHF from another source.
Advise maintenance.
Phase of flight is Approach or

Terminal and the angle reference is
TRUE.
The FMS cannot control the COM
radio (if the COM radio name is
configured as COM1) or the VUHF
radio (if the VUHF radio name is
configured as COM1).
The FMS cannot control the COM
radio (if the COM radio name is
configured as COM3) or the VUHF
radio (if the VUHF radio name is
configured as COM3).
Navigation Database selected is not
the current cycle.
Passing the last waypoint in the flight
path prior to a route discontinuity.
FMS steering becomes invalid.
The FMS detects a total loss of
DMAP input data on the onside and
offside FMSs .
DME-DME navigation can no longer

be used as a means of navigation.
If FMS was in DME-DME navigation
mode, it automatically reverts to the
next available navigation mode.

Control transponder from another source.
Advise maintenance.
Use another CDU. Advise maintenance.

COM/VHF input .
Control COM/VUHF from another source.
Advise maintenance.
Select correct database or advise maintenance
crew to load current database cycle.
Select RTE LEGS page to enter next waypoint
or close up route discontinuity.
Ensure that DMAP is powered.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 DMAP
input.
Verify if the DMAP operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Verify if identified DME transceiver operates
normally.
Use another navigation sensor as a means of
primary navigation.
Advise maintenance.
Figure 301 Messages (Sheet 2 of 10)
34-61-14
Page 303
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
DME CONTROL LOST
DME1 CONTROL LOST
DME2 CONTROL LOST
DVS NAV LOST
EFIS INPUT LOST
END OF ROUTE
ENTER POS/DATE/TIME
FMS ALTITUDES
DISAGREE
FMS DEGRADED
FMS FAILED
FUEL INPUT LOST
DESCRIPTION
The FMS cannot control the DME
which is paired with the NAV radio.
or
The FMS detects a failure with the
DME channel used for manual
tuning via the NAV radio.
The FMS detects a total loss of DVS
input data on the onside and offside
FMSs.
DVS sensor can no longer be used
for navigation.
The FMS detects a total loss of
EFIS input data on the onside and
offside FMSs .
Passing the last waypoint in the

route. FMS steering becomes invalid.
The FMS battery failure detected
invalidating the RTC date/time and
current position.
Master Caution is active.
Excessive difference between two
baro-corrected altitude inputs, two
FMS-calculated barocorrected
altitudes or two pressure altitude
inputs
The FMS has detected an internal
hardware fault related to its I/O
interface. The fault prevents full
function of the FMS. This fault is not
critical to the operation of the FMS
user interface or processing.
The FMS has detected an internal
hardware fault
The FMS detects a total loss of Fuel
Computer data on the onside and
offside FMSs .
ACTION
Control DME from another source.
DME receiver is no longer operational, use
other navigation aids.
Advise maintenance.
Ensure that DVS is powered.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 DVS
input.
Verify if the DVS operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Ensure that EFIS is powered.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 EFIS
input(s).
Verify if the EFIS(s) operate(s) normally.
Advise maintenance.
Select RTE LEGS page to enter additional
waypoints to resume FMS steering.
Enter date, time and position.
Advise maintenance.
Verify altimeter setting on all systems
Continue to use the FMS user interface.

Backup systems shall takeover the affected
operations. See MAINT MESSAGE page for
fault trouble shooting.
Advise maintenance.
Do not use the FMS for radio tuning or
navigation. See MAINT MESSAGE page for
more details.
Advise maintenance crew.
Manually enter fuel quantity and fuel flow on
FUEL 1/1 page.
Check connection(s) on the ARINC 429 input.
Verify if Fuel Computer(s) operate(s) normally.
Advise maintenance.
FUEL RESERVE
Reserve fuel is being used.
Plan to land before the fuel is exhausted.
34-61-14
Page 304
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
GPS-GPS POS DISAGREE
DESCRIPTION
The position difference between the
two/three GPS exceeds the position
check limit defined in Operators
Manual Section 15 (RNP Capability),
even though each GPS position
respects the position check limit.
GPS NAV LOST
Neither the GPS nor the INS/GPS

sensor is being used for the active
navigation.
No IFR approved navigation sensor
(including GPS) meets requirements
for the phase of flight.
The FMS is using GPS position data
for which the GPS integrity does not
meet requirements for the phase of
flight.
This message does not imply that
the GPS position is in error, only
that confidence in the position
accuracy is reduced.
GPS integrity is lost. GPS INT
remote annunciator (if installed)
illuminates.
GPS POS UNCERTAIN is mutually
exclusive with GPS NAV LOST.
This message is enabled only when
the POF (Phase of Flight) error limits
are selected in the configuration.
FMS has detected a significant
difference between the gross weight
received from the IFDS EFIS and the
gross weight computed by the FMS.
Total loss of heading input. When not
in GPS navigation, the FMS builds
up an error during rapid turns, and
should be used with caution. No
wind computation is available.
The combination of current TAS and
computed wind may cause the
aircraft to overshoot the next flight
plan leg.
GPS POS UNCERTAIN
GROSS WT
DISCREPANCY
HEADING INPUT LOST
HIGH ARC EXIT SPEED
ACTION
If during approach, perform missed approach.
On each FMS, access the onside FMS GPS
STATUS 2/2 page.
Compare the two/three GPS positions and
determine which position is the most probable
one.
Select Independent Mode and ensure that the
A/P in command is being driven by the FMS
with the most probable position.
Synchronized Mode can be re-established
when the message disappears from each
FMS MESSAGE RECALL page.
Report problem to maintenance.
Maintain the flight path within the range of
NAVAIDS.
GPS approaches cannot be flown.
Verify GPS position and monitor Horizontal
Integrity Limit (HIL).
Revert to an alternate navigation means if GPS
position becomes too unreliable.
One of the weight fields on the FUEL 2/2 page

has to be updated in order to clear the
message.
Refer to Operators Manual Section 15 for
operation with a failed heading input.
Reduce speed prior to exiting the arc.
34-61-14
Page 305
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
HIGH GLIDEPATH ANGLE
HIGH HOLDING SPEED
INDEPENDENT OP
INS NAV LOST

INS/DVS NAV LOST
INS/GPS NAV LOST

INS-GPS POS DIFF
INS/GPS POS UNCERTAIN
DESCRIPTION
Computed glide-path angle for the
selected runway exceeds 3.77
degrees.
The combination of current TAS and
computed wind may cause the ICAO
holding pattern protected airspace to
be exceeded. This message is
displayed one (1) minute prior to
reaching the holding fix and on
passage over the fix.
In a dual/triple-FMS installation, the
identified FMS is now operating
independently of the off-side FMS(s),
because of at least one of the
following reasons:
1. Independent mode manually
requested on SETUP 1/1 page.
2. An inter-FMS communication
failure has occurred.
3. The Operational Software
programs are not the same in all
FMSs.
4. The active navigation database is
not the same in all FMSs.
5. The FMSs have been in a
different phase of flight for more
than thirty seconds.
INS function in EGI has failed on the
onside and offside FMSs.
No INS/DVS navigation solution is
available due to an INS and a DVS
failure (SIGMA50H EGI only).
Communication failure with the EGI
on the onside and offside FMSs.
Excessive drift of the INS position
with respect to the GPS position.
The FMS is using embedded
INS/GPS (EGI) sensor position data
for which the sensor integrity does
not meet requirements for the phase
of flight and there are no other IFR
approved navigation sensors
available to cross check the EGI
position. This message does not
imply that the EGI position is in
error, only that confidence in the
position accuracy is reduced. This
message is enabled only when an
EGI other than the Litton LN-100GT
is configured and POF (Phase of
Flight) error limits are selected in
the configuration.
ACTION
No vertical guidance is provided for this
approach.
Reduce speed prior to reaching the holding fix.
Any automatically synchronized item listed in

Section 3-5 of the Opertors Manual, dual-FMS
Operations, must be now performed
independently on each FMS.
1. Clear message.
2. See MESSAGE RECALL and/or MAINT
MESSAGE page(s) for more details.
Advise maintenance.
3. Verify Op Program on IDENT 1/1 page and
advise maintenance if different.
4. Verify active navigation database on IDENT
1/1 page, select appropriate database if
possible, otherwise advise maintenance.
Verify consistency of altitude input of each
FMS.
INS cannot be used for navigation.

Advise maintenance .
INS/DVS solution cannot be used for
navigation.
INS/GPS cannot be used for navigation.
Verify aircraft position with a different sensor.
Deselect this sensor if necessary.
Advise maintenance.
Verify INS/GPS position and monitor HIL
(Horizontal Integrity Limit).
34-61-14
Page 306
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
IRSx ALIGN FAIL
DESCRIPTION
INS/IRS reports alignment failure.
Message enabled for LTN-92 and
ADIRS interfaces.
IRSx CHECK ACCURACY
INS reports that some of its

navigation parameters may have
become unreliable.
or
FMS determined that INS inertial
position drift exceeds 3+3T nm,
where T is the INS Time in Nav in
hours.
Message enabled for ADIRS
interfaces.
ADIRS alignment fault.
IRSx CYCLE OFF/NAV

IRSx ENTER HEADING
IRSx ENTER PPOS
IRSx ON BAT
IRSx SELECT ATTITUDE
In Attitude mode, magnetic heading

must be manually updated.
Message enabled for ADIRS
interface.
INS requests position initialization.
ADIRS interfaces.
INS/IRS reports that AC power is too
low and is operating on DC backup
power. If the backup power source is
a battery unit, 15 to 30 minutes of
operation are available with a fully
charged battery. If primary power is
not restored promptly, the battery
voltage will fall below the level
required to operate the INS/IRS.
ADIRS interfaces
LTN-92 INS reports invalid
navigation data. INS outputs still
valid: pitch, roll and platform heading.
INS cannot be used in FMS-based
inertial navigation mode.
FMS-based inertial navigation mode,
heading and altitude inputs still
available as long as one inertial
sensor is still operating normally.
ACTION
LTN-92: Ensure that entered position meets
LTN-92 latitude check and 3+3T check. Retry
INS initialization on POS INIT page.
ADIRS: Ensure that entered position meets
Reasonableness Test and System
Performance Test. Retry IRS initialization on
POS INIT page.
Move appropriate INS/IRS Mode Selector Unit
to ATTitude position.
If attitude data of INS/IRS seems unreliable,
switch this INS/IRS to OFF.
Cycle Mode Selector Unit through OFF and

back to either NAV or ALIGN.
Magnetic heading must be manually entered in
SET IRS HDG field of POS INIT 1/2 page every
15 minutes.
Perform INS/IRS initialization on POS INIT
page. Enter position on POS INIT page.
Verify IRS AC power.
Move appropriate INS Mode Selector Unit

switch position to ATT position.
34-61-14
Page 307
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
KALMAN NAV LOST
LOW BATTERY POWER
MANUAL WPT
SEQUENCE
MC FAILED
NAV CONTROL LOST
NAV1 CONTROL LOST
NAV2 CONTROL LOST
NO APPR INTEGRITY
NO NAV DATABASE
NOT ENOUGH FUEL
NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG
NOT ON INTERCEPT TRK
DESCRIPTION
Kalman filter navigator is not
available as a backup navigation
source. or
The APIRS measurements for the
Kalman filter are not ready. or
The APIRS measurements for the
Kalman filter are out of range.
The power level of the internal
battery is low. Manually-entered data
may be lost if there is a primary
power interruption during flight.
Sequencing to the next waypoint
needs to be manually initiated by the
pilot.
This message is displayed in
conjunction with the NEXT WPT
prompt with legs requiring a manual
termination.
This message also appears when
the FMS is flying an altitudeterminated leg and a baro-corrected
altitude is not available.
Mission Computer.
The FMS detects that it cannot
control the ARINC 429 NAV
(VOR/ILS) radio (NAV radio name
configured as NAV).
The predicted or actual GPS integrity
does not meet the requirements for
approach.
No navigation database has been
loaded.
Not enough fuel to get to destination.
(Endurance Reserve not included) is
below Time To Go (TTG).
Current aircraft heading does not
intercept desired course to fix.
This alert message appears after
executing a Direct-To with InterceptCourse, or when flying a Heading-toIntercept leg of a NavDataBase
procedure (SID/STAR).
Current aircraft track does not
intercept desired course to fix.
This alert message appears after
executing a Direct-To with InterceptCourse, or when flying a Course-toIntercept leg of a NavDataBase
procedure (SID/STAR).
ACTION
Avoid conducting low level altitude mission
where GPS signal may be affected.
After any power interruption, monitor system

performance and re-enter data as required.
Advise maintenance.
Press NEXT WPT prompt (LSK 6R) when
required on the PROGRESS 1/4 or LEG 1/X
pages.
AMU radio volume control must be performed

from the FMS.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 NAV
radio input .
Control NAV radio from another source.
Advise maintenance.
Activate the missed approach or use alternate
means of navigation (if available) to perform the
approach.
Advise maintenance to reload navigation
database.
Re- route to a closer destination.
Fly the aircraft to an appropriate intercept

heading. Re-engage LNAV.
Fly the aircraft to an appropriate intercept

course. Re-engage LNAV to capture new active
leg.
34-61-14
Page 308
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
QNH DISAGREE
PLS INPUT LOST
RENDEZVOUS
UNACHIEVABLE
ROUTE CORRUPTION
SET FMS ALTIMETER
SET INS POS

TACAN NAV LOST
TDN FUNCTION LOST
TDN NOT POSSIBLE
TIMER ALARM
DESCRIPTION
Difference between the onside
external QNH source and the offside
external QNH source (from crosstalk) exceeds 0.07 inch of mercury.
The FMS has detected a total loss
of PLS input data on the onside and
offside FMSs.
The moving waypoint is the active

waypoint and interception of the
moving waypoint is not possible
within a traveling distance of 500
nautical miles of the current position
because conditions have changed.
Current route is corrupted.
On the ground when selecting a
runway and/or a SID
or
Entering airport terminal area without
baro-corrected altitude input
available.
Message disabled when FMS
configured for enroute only
operations.
Manual alignment of the INS (EGI) is
required.
No TACAN sensor data is available
for the onside and offside FMSs.
TACAN navigation mode is no longer
available.
If FMS was in TACAN navigation
No Radio Altimeter data is available
for the onside and offside FMSs. As
a result, the TDN functionality has
been lost.
During a hover maneuver, when

over-flying the TDN waypoint one of
the two conditions occurs: cross
track value greater than 0.2 nm or
cross track error value greater than
20. This message appears in order
to protect the autopilot against
excessive maneuvers.
Timer has expired.
ACTION
Adjust QNH to same level on both sides.
Ensure that PLS is powered.

Verify if PLS operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Take alternate means for location missions.
Change flight parameter to reach this moving
waypoint.
Reload route from Custom Route Database.

Enter ALTIMETER SETTING (current pressure
in inches of mercury (in Hg) or in millibars (mb)
on PROGRESS 4/4 (or 3/3) page.
The FMS will correct its pressure altitude input
accordingly.
Perform alignment.
Ensure that identified TACAN receiver is
powered.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 TACAN
input or control the TACAN from another
source.
Verify if TACAN receiver operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Ensure that Radio Altimeter is powered.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 Radio
Altimeter input
Verify if Radio Altimeter operates normally.
Control the Radio Altimeter from another
source.
Advise maintenance.
The roll steering command is automatically
disabled and the hover has to be re-activated
and re-executed.
Perform required post-timeout action.
34-61-14
Page 309
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
TPDR CONTROL LOST
TPDR1 CONTROL LOST
TPDR2 CONTROL LOST
DESCRIPTION
configured as TPDR).
VERIFY RNP VALUE
A manually entered RNP value

greater than that approved for the
phase of flight is used.
VHF CONTROL LOST

VHF1 CONTROL LOST
VHF2 CONTROL LOST
The FMS cannot control the ARINC

429 COM radio (if the COM radio
name is configured as VHF).
VHF CONTROL LOST

VHF1 CONTROL LOST
VHF2 CONTROL LOST
VIR CONTROL LOST
VIR1 CONTROL LOST
VIR2 CONTROL LOST

identified ARC-186 VHF radio.
The FMS cannot tune the ARINC
429 NAV (VOR/ILS) radio (NAV
radio name configured as VIR).

radio input
Advise maintenance..
VIR CONTROL LOST

VIR1 CONTROL LOST
VIR2 CONTROL LOST
VOR CONTROL LOST
VOR1 CONTROL LOST
VOR2 CONTROL LOST
The FMS cannot tune the identified

VIR-31 VOR radio.
Control the VIR-31 radio from another source.
The FMS detects that it cannot

control the ARINC 429 NAV
(VOR/ILS) radio (NAV radio name
configured as VOR).
The FMS has detected a VOR and/or
DME receiver failure on the onside
and offside FMSs.
VOR-DME navigation mode is no
longer available.
If FMS was in VOR-DME navigation
NC-12B TACAN failure has been
detected in addition to a VOR and/or
DME receiver failure on the onside
and offside FMSs.
VOR-DME-TCN navigation mode is
no longer available.
If FMS was in VOR-DME-TCN
navigation mode, it automatically
reverts to the next available
navigation mode.
FMS cannot control the identified
SRT-651 VUHF radio (VUHF radio
name configured as VUHF).

radio input .
Advise maintenance.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 inputs or
control the VOR or DME receivers from another
source.
Advise maintenance
Verify if VOR and DME receivers operate
normally.
VOR/DME NAV LOST
VOR/DME/TCN NAV LOST
VUHF CONTROL LOST

VUHF1 CONTROL LOST
VUHF2 CONTROL LOST
ACTION
transponder input.
Control transponder from another source.
Advise maintenance.
The crew is responsible for monitoring
navigation performance and ensuring that the
aircraft remains within protected airspace at all
times.
Verify that the RNP value is appropriate for the
phase of flight. Modify as necessary.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 COM
input.
Advise maintenance.
Control COM radio from another source.
Control the ARC-186 VHF radio from another
source.

powered.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 inputsor
control the VOR or DME receivers from another
source.
Verify if TACAN, VOR and DME receivers
operate normally.
Advise maintenance.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 VUF input
.
Control VUHF radio from another source.
Advise maintenance.
34-61-14
Page 310
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
VUHF CONTROL LOST
VUHF1 CONTROL LOST
VUHF2 CONTROL LOST
WXR INPUT LOST
XPDR CONTROL LOST

XPDR1 CONTROL LOST
XPDR2 CONTROL LOST
DESCRIPTION
FMS cannot control the identified
ARC-182 VUHF radio.
No Weather Radar data is available
for the onside and offside FMSs.

configured as XPDR).
ACTION
Check serial bus connections to/from radio.
Control the ARC-182 VUHF radio from another
source.
Ensure that WXR is powered.
Verify if WXR operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
transponder input.
Control the transponder from another source.
Advise maintenance
34-61-14
Page 311
May 10, 2007

B.
MAINTENANCE ALERT MESSAGES

NOTE: Maintenance Alert messages are messages, which indicate a particular FMS failure
condition:
Displayed in yellow on the MAINT MESSAGES page
Never displayed on the scratchpad
Always associated with a specific system alert message
Unless otherwise noted, the CMA-9000 Master Caution is active (e.g. FMS is not
functional) for all the Maintenance Alert messages.
MESSAGE
BOOT CHECKSUM
FAILED
H/W A429 IP# FAILED
H/W A429 TX# FAILED
H/W CPU CLKMUL FAILED
H/W CPU FAILED
H/W FLASH FAILED
H/W FPU FAILED
H/W PIT FAILED
DESCRIPTION
Boot software failure.
the unit cannot be reprogrammed
with new operational software.
ARINC 429 receiver failure detected.
Where # is 1 to 24.
SYSTEM DEGRADED displayed on
MESSAGE RECALL page.
ARINC 429 transmitter failure
detected.
Where # is 1 to 8.
K6 CPU frequency is not 220 MHz.
SYSTEM FAILED displayed on
CPU failure detected.
The the unit detects a failure during
the internal flash test.
FPU failure detected. SYSTEM
FAILED displayed on MESSAGE
RECALL page.
Programmable Interval Timer failure
detected. SYSTEM FAILED
displayed on MESSAGE RECALL
page.
ACTION
Replace the unit prior to any operational
software loading.
Verify with installation wiring diagram what LRU

is connected to this the unit port.
Do not use the FMS.
Verify with installation wiring diagram what LRU

is connected to this unit port.
Do not use the FMS.
Replace the unit.

Do not use the FMS.
Replace the unit.
Do not use the FMS.
Replace the unit.
Do not use the FMS.
Replace the unit.

Do not use the FMS.
Replace the unit.
Do not use the FMS.
Figure 302 Maintenance Alert Messages (Sheet 1 of 2)
34-61-14
Page 312
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
H/W PWR SUPP FAILED
+5
H/W PWR SUPP FAILED
+12
H/W PWR SUPP FAILED 12
H/W RAM FAILED
H/W RTC FAILED
H/W SERIAL I/O FAILED
H/W UART RX# FAILED
H/W UART TX# FAILED
MAG VAR CRC FAILED
OP CHECKSUM FAILED
DESCRIPTION
The the unit detects a supply
voltage out of limit on the 5, 12 or 12 Volts supplies.
The unit random access memory
(RAM) test failure.
Real Time Clock failure detected.
Time cannot be retained during the
unit power-off.
Master Caution is inactive.
The unit detects a failure with the
SERIAL I/O Controller.
Where # is 1 to 4.
Where # is 1 to 4.
Magnetic Variation Tables checksum
failure.
Operation Program checksum
failure. The unit is unreliable for
communication.
ACTION
Replace the unit.
Do not use the FMS.
Replace the unit.

Do not use the FMS.
Service unit whenever possible.
CDU keyboard, discretes and annunciators

may no longer operate.
Targa DLU may no longer communicate.
Targa DLU may no longer communicate.
Replace the unit.

Do not us the unit for navigation.
Replace the unit.

Do not use the FMS.
Figure 302 Maintenance Alert Messages (Sheet 2 of 2)
34-61-14
Page 313
May 10, 2007

C.
MAINTENANCE ADVISORY MESSAGES

NOTE: Maintenance advisory messages are messages, which do not require immediate pilot
action but which indicate a particular equipment failure condition:
Displayed in white on the MAINT MESSAGES page and on the scratchpad
Displayed on the scratchpad unless an associated collector message exists and is active
(until acknowledged)
Lowest priority scratchpad messages (can be typed over and overwritten by any other
message type)
Unless otherwise noted, the CMA-9000 Master Caution is inactive (e.g. FMS is still
functional) for all the Maintenance Advisory messages.
Collector messages are messages that combine several fault conditions into a single alert
message. (e.g. AIR DATA LOST combines ADC1 FAILED and ADC2 FAILED
Maintenance Advisory messages).
MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
AAIM ALT FAILED
Out of bounds GPS altitude failure

(SAGEM EGI installation only).
AAIM SAT FAILED
Non-isolated satellite failure.
ADC1 FAILED
ADC2 FAILED
The FMS has detected a failure of

the ADC receiver or the ADC
communication BUS.
ADF FAILED
ADF1 FAILED
ADF2 FAILED

the identified ARINC 429 ADF
receiver or a failure of the ADF
receiver communication BUS..
ADF FAILED
ADF2 FAILED
AHRS1 FAILED
AHRS2 FAILED
AHRS3 FAILED

the identified DF-206 ADF radio.
AHRS input failure or a failure of the
AHRS communication bus.
When this message is present,
another heading source is available.
Otherwise HEADING FAILED is
displayed.
ACTION
If in TERMINAL or ENROUTE phase of flight the
INS/GPS navigation mode is kept, but the pilot
can manually deselect this mode.
Advise Maintenance to verify the SAGEM EGI
If in TERMINAL or ENROUTE phase of flight the
INS/GPS navigation mode is kept, but the pilot
can manually deselect this mode.
Advise Maintenance to verify the SAGEM EGI
Ensure that ADC is powered. Verify that ADC
operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Refer to Section 15 of the Operators Manual
for operation with a failed TAS/Altitude input if
an alternate TAS/Altitude source is not
available.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 input or
Tune ADF from another source.
ADF receiver is no longer operational, use
other navigation aids.
Tune ADF from another source. Check serial
bus connections to /from radio.
Ensure that AHRS is powered. Verify if AHRS
operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Figure 303 Maintenance Advisory Messages (Sheet 1 of 7)
34-61-14
Page 314
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
AMU FAILED
The FMS has detected a failure of the

AMU or a failure of the AMU
communication bus.
AMU CH1 FAILED

AMU CH2 FAILED
AMU CH3 FAILED
APIRS FAILED
The FMS has detected a failure of a

particular AMU Audio Board.
ATC1 ALT FAILED

ATC2 ALT FAILED

transponder altitude bus (TDR-94D005 only transponder name
configured as ATC).
transponder or a failure of the
transponder communication bus
(transponder name configured as
ATC).
Upon an exceptional fault the FMS
has restarted.
ATC1 FAILED
ATC2 FAILED
AUTO RESET
BORESIGHT
DISCREPANCY
CAPT EHSI FAILED
COM1 FAILED
COM2 FAILED
COM3 FAILED
COM4 FAILED
CONC1 FAILED
CONC2 FAILED

identified APIRS or a failure of the
APIRS communication bus.
Discrepancy between the boresight

values of the EGI and the newly
entered FMS INS values.
Failure of the Capt. EHSI or failure of
the Capt. EHSI communication bus.

COM radio or its communication bus
(if the COM radio name is configured
as COM1) or the VUHF radio or its
communication bus (if the VUHF
radio name is configured as COM1).
COM radio or its communication bus
(if the COM radio name is configured
as COM3) or the VUHF radio or its
communication bus (if the VUHF
radio name is configured as COM3).
CONCENTRATOR or its
communication bus.
ACTION
Control the AMU from another source.
Advise maintenance.
Use another channel to control the AMU.

Refer to Section 15 of the Operators Manual for
operation with a failed heading input unless an
alternate source of heading is available.
Do not use transponder Mode C capability.

control the transponder from another source.
The unit has detected a problem and has

attempted to restart. No action required except
to verify it is functioning as expected.
Enter new values for the roll, pitch, and yaw
boresight in the EGI - BORESIGHT 1/1
maintenance page.
Ensure that Capt EHSI is powered. Verify if
EHSI operates normally.
Map display available on F/O EHSI.
Advise maintenance.
control the COM/VUHF radio from another
source.
COM/VUHF radio is no longer operational, use
other communication radios.
control the COM/VUHF radio from another
source.
COM/VUHF radio is no longer operational, use
other communication radios.
control the CONCENTRATOR from another
source.
Loss of the CONCENTRATOR input alone does
not cause any adverse effect, the specific
equipment affected will be annunciated directly.
34-61-14
Page 315
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
CONFIG INVALID
DMAP FAILED
DESCRIPTION
The FMS detects an installation
configuration failure.
This message automatically
generates an associated FMS
FAILED alert message.
DMAP failure or DMAP
communication bus failure.
DME1 FAILED
DME2 FAILED

DME communication bus.
DVS/GPS SPEED DIFF
A difference of more than 15 knots

has occurred for more than two
minutes between the GPS and the
Doppler North-East velocities.
Doppler velocity sensor failure or a
DVS communication bus failure
detected.
DVS FAILED
DVS CTRL FAILED
Missing control data from the Doppler

velocity sensor (applicable only for
the ANV-353 DVS).
EFIS1 FAILED
EFIS2 FAILED
EFIS failure or EFIS communication

bus failure detected.
FMS CLOCK FAILED
FMS1 X-TALK FAILED

FMS2 X-TALK FAILED
FMS3 X-TALK FAILED
The FMS detected failure of its real

time clock.
1. Offside FMS input failure.
2. In a dual/triple configuration, the
synchronized mode of operation and
manual flight plan synchronization
are not possible.
3. Possible loss of ATC or DME Hold
channel control.
4. Failure of the cross-talk bus
detected.
ACTION
Do not use system for any function. Advise
maintenance crew to load a valid configuration

Do not use DMAP.
Advise maintenance.
Tune DME from another source. Check
connection on the ARINC 429 input from the
DME receiver.
None.

Ensure that DVS is powered.
Verify if the DVS operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Degraded mode of operation may still be
available.
Advise maintenance.
Ensure that EFIS is powered.
Verify if the EFIS operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Manually enter date and time.
1. Ensure that identified FMS is powered.

Verify if identified FMS operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
2. Any automatically synchronized item listed in
Section 3 of the Operators Manual, dual-FMS
Operations, must be performed independently
on each FMS.
3. Verify if ATC is still operational. Navigate
without the ATC and the DME HOLD function.
4. Check connections on the ARINC 429
input/outputs
Advise maintenance
34-61-14
Page 316
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
FUEL1 FAILED
FUEL2 FAILED

the Fuel Computer or a failure of
Fuel Computer communication bus.
ACTION
Ensure that identified Fuel Computer is
powered.
Verify if Fuel Computer operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
FUEL FLOW FAILED
Fuel Computer input failure.
FUEL QTY FAILED
Fuel quantity from fuel computer is

not available or valid.
The FMS has detected a F/O EHSI
input failure or a F/O EHSI
communication bus failure.
F/O EHSI FAILED
GPS ANTENNA FAILED
INS FAILED
The EGI GPS in DR mode and not

using satellite data for navigation as
it is not tracking any satellite for
more than 5 seconds.
The EGI GPS battery is low or has
failed.
FMS detected a failure of the GPS in
the identified EGI sensor.
the GPS unit or a failure of the GPS
unit communication bus.
NOTE: GPSx is displayed when the
FMS is configured for x-talk.
Failure in the zeroization process of
the SA/AS key.
The FMS automatically selects the
next best sensor for navigation.
INS function in EGI Has failed.
INS/GPS FAILED
Communication failure with the EGI.
IRSx BAT WARN

IRSx CHECK ADC
ADIRS DC input power out of range.

LTN-92 INS or ADIRS reports invalid
ADC inputs. No usage of some or all
ADC info.
INS/IRS may not be able to provide
baro-inertial altitude data.
Depending of the installation, the
FMS may have lost its only source of
altitude. The ALTITUDE FAILED
message would then also be
displayed.
GPS BATTERY LOW

GPS (EGI) FAILED
GPS FAILED
GPS1 FAILED
GPS2 FAILED
GPS3 FAILED
GPS ZEROIZE FAILED
Verify Fuel Computer operation. Advise

Maintenance.
Advise maintenance.
Ensure that F/O EHSI is powered.
Verify F/O EHSI operates normally.
Map display available on Capt. EHSI.
Advise maintenance.
Advise maintenance.
Advise Maintenance.
Advise Maintenance.
Check connection on the ARINC 429 input from
the GPS unit.
Entry of date and time may be required.
Functions requiring GPS position/time will not
operate.
GPS cannot be used for navigation.
Advise maintenance if the message is
persistent.
INS cannot be used for navigation.
Advise maintenance if the message persist.
INS/GPS cannot be used for navigation.
Advise maintenance if the message persist.
Advise maintenance.
LTN-92: Take note of INS maintenance word
contents on appropriate INS MAINT MESSAGE
page.
Advise maintenance.
34-61-14
Page 317
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
IRSx CHECK REF
INS reports analog output failure.
IRSx COOL FAIL
ADIRS overheat detected.

Internal temperature exceeds 72
degrees C.
LTN-92 INS reports an internal soft
failure.
IRSx DELAYED MAINT
IRSx EXCESS MOTION
IRSx FAILED
LEVER ARM
DISCREPANCY
MAG VAR OUT OF DATE
NAV1 FAILED
NAV2 FAILED
GPS ANTENNA FAILED
PLS FAILED
RALT FAILED
LTN-92 INS or ADIRS reports

excessive motion during alignment
phase. ALIGN mode automatically
re-sequences to 10 minutes (32
seconds if in rapid re-align mode).
Inertial sensor input failure.
Inertial Navigation mode, heading
and altitude inputs (if applicable) still
available as long as one inertial
sensor is still operating normally.
Discrepancy between the lever arm
values in the EGI and the new values
in the FMS.
Magnetic variation tables out of date
(more than 5 years old).
Message displayed at power-up, or
after loading tables via data loader.
NAV (VOR/ILS) radio or the NAC
radio communication bus (NAV
radio name configured as NAV).
The GPS sensor detects a GPS
antenna failure and goes in GPS DR
navigation.
The FMS detects a failure of the
PLS range or the PLS steering or a
failure of the PLS communication
bus.
Radio Altimeter or a failure of the
Radio Altimeter communication bus
(single installation).
ACTION
Verify following INS analog outputs: attitude,
heading, drift angle, platform heading.
LTN-92: Take note of INS maintenance word
contents on appropriate INS MAINT MESSAGE
page.
Advise maintenance.
Cycle Mode Selector Unit through OFF.
Advise maintenance.
Take note of INS maintenance word contents
on appropriate INS MAINT MESSAGE page.
Advise maintenance to service INU when
convenient.
Ensure that aircraft remains stationary during
alignment period.
Ensure that inertial sensor is powered.

Verify if inertial sensor operates normally.
Turn off INU/IRU and advise maintenance.
LTN-92 INS:
Take note of INS maintenance word contents
on appropriate INS MAINT MESSAGE page.
Verify the lever arm values and re-enter if
necessary.
Load up-to-date magnetic variation tables.

the NAV receiver.
Try to tune NAV from another source. NAV
receiver is no longer operational, use other
navigation aids.
Advise Maintenance.

Take alternate means for location missions.
Ensure that RALT is powered.

Verify if the RALT operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
34-61-14
Page 318
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
RALT1 FAILED
RALT2 FAILED

Radio Altimeter or a failure of the
Radio Altimeter communication bus
(dual installation).
TACAN FAILED
NC-12B TACAN receiver input

failure, or a failure of the TACAN
receiver or a failure of the NC-12B
receiver communication bus has
been detected.
TACAN FAILED
TPDR1 ALT FAILED

TPDR2 ALT FAILED
TPDR1 FAILED
TPDR2 FAILED
UNABLE FMS-FMS SYNC
VHF1 FAILED
VHF2 FAILED

the identified TACAN TCN-118
receiver or a failure of the TACAN
TCN-118 receiver communication
bus.
the transponder altitude bus (TDR94D-005 only transponder name
configured as TPDR).
the ATC transponder or a failure of
the transponder communication bus
TPDR).
In a dual-FMS installation, operators
or automatic attempt to synchronize
FMSs failed because:
1. An inter-FMS
communication failure has
occurred.
2. The Operational Software
programs is not the same in
all FMSs.
3. The active navigation
database is not the same in
all FMSs.

the COM radio or a failure of the
COM radio communication bus (if the
COM radio name is configured as
VHF).
ACTION
Ensure that RALT is powered.
Verify if the RALT operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
powered.
control the TACAN from another source.
Verify if TACAN receiver operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
Check serial bus connections to /from radio.
TACAN transceiver is no longer operational,
use other navigation aids.

Any automatically synchronized item listed in

Section 3 of the Operators Manual, dual-FMS
Operations, must be now performed
independently on each FMS.
1. See MESSAGE RECALL and/or
MAINT MESSAGE page(s) for more
details. Advise maintenance.
2. Verify Op Program on IDENT 1/1
page and advise maintenance if
different.
3. Verify active navigation database on
IDENT 1/1 page, select appropriate
database if possible, otherwise advise
maintenance.
control the COM radio from another source.
COM radio is no longer operational, use other
communication radios.
34-61-14
Page 319
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
ACTION
VIR1 FAILED
VIR2 FAILED
The FMS has detected a failure with

the ARINC 429 NAV (VOR/ILS)
radio or a NAV radio communication
bus failure (NAV radio name
configured as VIR).
VIR FAILED
VIR2 FAILED
The FMS has detected a failure with

the VIR-31 radio.
VUHF1 FAILED
VUHF2 FAILED

the identified SRT-651 VUHF
receiver or a failure of the radio
communication bus (VUHF radio
name configured as VUHF).
VUHF FAILED
VUHF2 FAILED

the identified ARC-182 VUHF
receiver or a failure of the VUHf
receiver input bus.
VOR1 FAILED
VOR2 FAILED

ARINC 429 NAV (VOR/ILS) radio or
a failure of the radio communication
bus (NAV radio name configured as
VOR).
WXR FAILED
A communication failure has

occurred with the weather radar.
XPDR1 ALT FAILED

XPDR2 ALT FAILED

the transponder altitude bus (TDR94D-005 only transponder name
configured as XPDR).
the ATC transponder or a failure of
the transponder communication bus
XPDR).

the NAV receiver.
Try to tune NAV from another source. NAV
navigation aids.
Try to tune VIR from another source. VIR radio
is no longer operational, use other navigation
radios.
the VUHF radio.
Try to control the VUHF from another source.
VUHF radio is no longer operational, use other
Check serial bus connections to /from radio.
Try to control the VUHF from another source.
VUHF radio is no longer operational, use other
the NAV receiver.
Try to control NAV from another source. NAV
navigation aids.
Ensure that WXR is powered.
Verify if WXR operates normally.
Advise maintenance.
XPDR1 FAILED
XPDR2 FAILED

34-61-14
Page 320
May 10, 2007

D.
STATUS ADVISORY MESSAGES
Status Advisory messages are messages which do not require immediate pilot action but require
pilot notification: Displayed in white on the scratchpad (until acknowledged).
Never displayed on the MESSAGE RECALL or MAINT MESSAGES page.
Second lowest scratchpad priority (can be typed over and overwritten by any message type except
maintenance advisory messages).
MESSAGE
AIR TEMP NOT VALID
AUTOMATIC HOLD EXIT
BARO ALTITUDE NOT

VALID
BACKTRACK ROUTE
FULL
CDU ENTRY CONFLICT

CHECK UPDATE
DIMMING INTERNAL
MODE
DESCRIPTION
Air temperature is invalid or out of
bounds (valid range: -40C to 50C).
NOTE: This message is enabled
only on the SIMUL FLY
AWAY 1/3 and SIMUL OEI
CRUISE 2/3 pages.
A holding pattern will be exited
automatically by the FMS
Note: Applicable to HA, HF leg
types (holding patterns from Nav
Database).
Baro altitude is either invalid or out
of bounds (valid range: -455ft to
12000ft).
CRUISE 2/3 pages.
The backtrack route has been filled
up to its maximum of 199 waypoints
and there is an attempt to record the
200th waypoint in the backtrack
route flight plan (first waypoint
entered manually by the operator or
waypoint overflown in the active
route).
The OP CSCI detects conflict of
entry in dual/triple-FMS operations.
The FMS detects that the position
difference between the sensor to be
updated and the reference position
is greater than the accuracy of the
sensor to be updated. This
message is only available on the
UPDATE POS 1/1 page.
External control source for display
dimming is providing a signal of less
than 0.3 VDC for more than 2
seconds.
ACTION
Verify and reload OEI_FLYAWAY file
N/A
Check the route and reduce number of

waypoints.
Insure no conflicting action between flight

crew members.
Review the position update.
Use internal dimming mode.
Figure 304 Status Advisory Messages (Sheet 1 of 5)
34-61-14
Page 321
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
DIRECT HOLD ENTRY
DIRECT TO FIX
DMAP WPT LIST FULL

DMAP XFER FAILED
DME NAV DESELECTED
EMERGENCY ENGAGED
END OF OFFSET
END OF SEARCH
FLY AWAY HT NOT VALID
FMS NAV IN DR
FUNCTION NOT
COMPUTED
DESCRIPTION
The FMS detects holding pattern
entry procedure to be used on
crossing of holding fix (displayed 10
seconds to holding fix).
The FMS detects during an
intercept course capture that the
predicted intercept point is so close
to the leg's termination waypoint
such that the intercept path cannot
be calculated.
NOTE: The FMS then calculates
a path direct to the
waypoint.
DMAP Reserved Waypoint List is
full.
Loss of communication with Digital
Map Display System Interface
DME Sensor manually de-selected
by pilot (if DESELECT page
configured)
Emergency Tuning switch has been
engaged.
NOTE: The radios are set to
emergency frequencies
End of offset navigation.
End of search
Fly away height out of tabular
bounds.
Note: This message is enabled only
on the SIMUL FLY AWAY 1/2 and
SIMUL OEI CRUISE 2/2 pages.
The FMS is receiving insufficient
navigation information from
other sensors.
NOTE: The FMS is in dead
reckoning navigation mode
using heading and speed
inputs and last computed
value of wind.
Weight index out of tabular bounds.
CRUISE 2/2 pages.
ACTION
Acknowledge the holding pattern entry.
Review the intercept course entered.
Limit the DMAP list to ten waypoints

Verify the DMAP power and self-test status.
Advise maintenance.
Ensure DME navigation sensor should be
deselected.
Acknowledge emergency status
Acknowledge the end of the offset

Acknowledge end of search pattern.
Take appropriate measure to fly in manual

mode. Verify sensors power status and selftest status.
34-61-14
Page 322
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
GPS INTEGRITY VALID
GPS NAV DESELECTED
GROSS WEIGHT NOT

VALID
HSI SCALE CHANGING
HSI SCALE TO CHANGE
INS/DVS NAV
DESELECTED
INS/GPS NAV
DESELECTED
IN INERTIAL MODE
DESCRIPTION
GPS sensor has just acquired
integrity that satisfies the limit
requirement for the phase of flight.
NOTE: This message is turned on
when the integrity lamp
goes from ON to OFF.
Similarly, the message is
turned off when the lamp
comes ON.
NOTE: Not applicable when a
Litton LN-100GT EGI is configured.
GPS sensor has been de-selected
by the pilot.
NOTE: Message enabled only
when DESELECT page
configured.
Gross weight invalid or out of
bounds (valid range: 6000kg to
11000kg).
CRUISE 2/3 pages.
The FMS is commanding HSI lateral
scale deviation sensitivity change
from 5 nm to 1 nm full scale when
entering the terminal area, or from 1
nm to 5 nm full scale when leaving
the terminal area.
At 3 nm inbound to the FAF, the
FMS detects that the GPS
approach is enabled (armed).
The HSI lateral deviation sensitivity
will change from 1 nm to
0.3 nm full scale at 2 nm to
the FAF waypoint.
INS/DVS navigator has been deselected by the pilot.
when DESELECT page
configured.
INS/GPS navigator has been deselected by the pilot.
when DESELECT page
configured.
Reversion to Inertial navigation
mode.
Note: applicable only when an EGI
is configured.
ACTION
Acknowledge GPS navigation mode.
Ensure GPS navigation mode should be

deselected.
Acknowledge HSI scale change (change of

POF).
Acknowledge HSI scale change (change of

POF).
Ensure INS/DVS navigation mode should be

deselected.
Ensure INS/GPS navigation mode should be

deselected.
Acknowledge interial navigation mode. Verify

GPS integrity by monitoring the NAV STATUS
page.
34-61-14
Page 323
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
KALMAN NAV
DESELECTED
MAINTENANCE LOG FULL

NO FLY AWAY
NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG
NOT ON INTERCEPT TRK
PRESS ALT NOT VALID

PARALLEL HOLD ENTRY
PASSWORD CHANGED
RENDEZVOUS
UNACHIEVABLE
TEARDROP HOLD ENTRY
TRANSITION DOWN
DESCRIPTION
KALMAN navigator has been deselected by the pilot.
when DESELECT page
configured.
Not enough memory is available to
save a file.
(Active gross weight - fuel weight) >
computed gross weight OR (radio
altitude - fly away height) < 15 ft
AWAY 1/2 and SIMUL
OEI CRUISE 2/2 pages.
When a Direct-To with InterceptCourse is pending (modified route),
The FMS detects that current
aircraft heading does not intercept
desired course to fix.
When a Direct-To with InterceptCourse is pending (modified route),
The FMS detects that current
aircraft track does not intercept
desired course to fix.
Pressure altitude is invalid or out of
bounds.
Holding pattern entry procedure to
be used at crossing of holding fix
(displayed 10 seconds to holding
fix).
The library password has been
successfully changed.
The interception of the moving
waypoint is not possible (greater
than 500 nm).
NOTE: this message is generated
when the moving waypoint
is not the active waypoint.
The FMS detects holding pattern
entry procedure to be used at
crossing of holding fix (displayed 10
seconds to holding fix).
Hover procedure execution.
Displayed until the TDN waypoint is
reached, at which point the
message is removed automatically.
ACTION
Ensure KALMAN navigation mode should be
deselected.
Advise maintenance to verify the content of

the Log file and delete some entries.
Verify intercept course entry and the heading

of the aircraft.
Verify intercept course entry and the track.
Enter a valid pressure altitude.

Configuration can be used.

Take appropriate measures to meet the
moving waypoint.
Acknowledge the hover procedure.
34-61-14
Page 324
May 10, 2007

MESSAGE
VOR/DME NAV
DESELECTED
WAYPOINT BYPASSED
WIND NOT VALID
X-FMS NAV DESELECTED
DESCRIPTION
VOR Sensor manually deselected
by the pilot.
when DESELECT page
configured.
FMS detects that the airplane
crosses the wayline (perpendicular
line to the next leg at the waypoint)
of the next leg before the bisector or
the wayline of the active leg.
Wind speed invalid.
CRUISE 2/2 pages.
FMS-FMS synchronized navigation
manually deselected by the pilot.
NOTE: Message enabled only in
a multiple-FMS installation
when DESELECT page
configured.
ACTION
Ensure VOR/DME/NAV navigation mode
should be deselected.
Acknowledge that the FMS sequences both

the active and the next leg.
Ensure xFMS navigation mode should be

deselected.
34-61-14
Page 325
May 10, 2007

SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURE FOR FMS
FMS INITIALIZE
DISPLAY TEST
FMS TEST
SENSOR TEST
EFIS
INTERFACE
ANNUNCIATOR
TEST
GO TO F
SHEET 7
Figure 305 Testing/Troubleshooting Flow Chart (Sheet 1 of 7)
34-61-14
Page 326
May 10, 2007

START TEST
PRESS
[INIT REF], <IDENT>
IDENT 1/2 APPEARS?
NO
1. REPLACE FMS
YES
D.BASE DATE
CORRECT?
CFG NO.
S/W NO.
NO
YES
1. D. BASE EXPIRED USING PDL

LOAD LATEST DATABASE
2. S/W NO. INCORRECT
IF MAINTENANCE ALLOWED
TO UPLOAD S/W, THEN
UPLOAD PROPER S/W P/N
ELSE REPLACE FMS
3. CFG NO. INCORRECT
RECONFIGURE FMS
PRESS <POS INIT>
POS INIT 1/2 PAGE IS

DISPLAYED?
NO
1. REPLACE FMS
YES
POSITION
TIME
DATE
CORRECT?
NO
RE-ENTER CORRECT DATA AS

PER OP'S MANUAL
YES
GO TO A
SHEET 3
34-61-14
Page 327
May 10, 2007

VERIFY REFFERENCES ARE

CORRECT
PRESS [INIT REF],
<NAV STATUS>
NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 PAGE IS

DISPLAYED
TO MONITOR THE INSTALLED SENSORS,
PRESS THE SOFTKEY ADJACENT TO ROUTE
DME
GO TO C
SHEET 5
PRESS <GPS>
GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE IS
DISPLAYED
IS OP MODE IN NAV (SUFFICIENT

TIMEAT LEAST30 MINUTES MUST
BE GIVEN FOR SENSOR TO
TRACK SVs)?
NO
VORDME
GO TO D
SHEET 5
1. ENSURE AIRCRAFT LOCATED

IN CLEAR AREA
2. CHECK GPS ANTENNA
CABLE/CONNECTORS
3. REPLACE GPS SENSOR/GPS
ANTENNA
YES
PRESS [NEXT]
GPS STATUS 2/2 PAGE IS
DISPLAYED
GO TO B
SHEET 4
34-61-14
Page 328
May 10, 2007

COMPARE GPS LAT/LON TO

FMS SYSTEM POSITION ON POS
INIT/REF PAGE
DIFFERENCE > 1000 METERS?
YES
1. ENSURE AIRCRAFT LOCATED

IN CLEAR
2. CHECK GPS ANTENNA
CABLE/CONNECTORS
3. REPLACE GPS SENSOR
NO
PRESS <NAV STATUS>

DISPLAYED
GO TO C
SHEET 5
34-61-14
Page 329
May 10, 2007

(IF DME IS INTERFACE TO FMS)

NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1
PRESS <DME>
MONITOR THAT THE DME
STATIONS IN THE IMMEDIATE
AREA ARE DISPLAYED
RECORD FOR LATER
COMPARISON
PRESS <NAV STATUS>

DISPLAYED
PRESS <VORDME>
VOR/DME STATUS 1/1 PAGE IS
DISPLAYED
RECORD:
VOR IDENT, RAD/DIS, FREQ,
DME DIS
PRESS [INIT REF] [NEXT]

INIT/REF INDEX 2/2 PAGE IS
DISPLAYED
PRESS <MAINT>
MAINTENANCE 1/1 PAGE IS
DISPLAYED
ENTER PASSWORD (USUALLY 1)
MAINTENANCE 1/2 PAGE IS
DISPLAYED
GO TO E
SHEET 6
34-61-14
Page 330
May 10, 2007

NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TESTS AFFECT ONLY THE

ANALOG/DISCRETE OUTPUTS. SHOULD THE
FMS BE CONNECTED VIA THE DIGITAL BUS
TO AN EFIS THESE TESTS ARE NOT
APPLICABLE
PRESS <O/P TEST>, [NEXT]

ANNUNCIATOR TEST 2/3
APPEARS
TOGGLE ANNUNCIATOR FROM

OFF TO ON
ANNUNCIATOR ILLUMINATES?
NO
1. CHECK A/C WIRING

2. ENSURE INDICATOR LAMP IS
GOOD
3. MEASURE VOLTAGE ON
DISCRETE PINS
4. REPLACE FMS
YES
IF DUEL SYSTEM ARE INSTALLED

REPEAT TESTS ON NUMBER 2
SYSTEM
GO TO F
SHEET 7
34-61-14
Page 331
May 10, 2007

EFIS INERFACE TEST
NOTE: TO CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING TESTS,

THERE MUST BE AT LEAST 4 WAYPOINTS
IN THE ACTIVE ROUTE
SELECT A COMPANY ROUTE

FROM THE FMS LIBRARY WHICH
ORIGINATES IN THE PRESENT
LOCATION
BEARING TO THE FIRST

WAYPOINT IS IT OK?
NO
1. REPLACE FMS
2. CHECK A/C WIRING
YES
COUPLE THE FMS TO THE EFIS

SELECT MAP MODE
SELECT A RANGE TO DISPLAY
MORE THAN ONE WAYPOINT
IS THE INFORMATION
DISPLAY ON THE
DISPLAY SCREEN?
(A TYPICAL SIMPLIFIED MAP MODE
DISPLAY IS SHOWN IN
FIGURE 309)
NO
1. REPLACE FMS
2. CHECK A/C WIRING
YES
END OF TEST
34-61-14
Page 332
May 10, 2007

CMA-9000 MAINTENANCE PAGES
PART NUMBER
MAINTENANCE
1/1
1/1
PASSWORD
-----
NEXT
PREV
<RETURN
<RETURN
1
(GO TO SHEET 2)
MAINTENANCE
1/2
<P/N
(GO TO SHEET 3)
(GO TO SHEET 4)
<CONFIG
O/P TEST>
<ATP
I/P TEST>
<EGI
A429 CHK>
<DVS
<PASSWORD
EGI MAINT
1/1
DVS MAINT
PASSWORD
1/1
1/1
A429 I/O CHECKER 1/1
DISCRETE I/P TEST 2/2

DISCRETE I/P TEST 1/2
EHSI OUTPUT TEST 4/4

O/P ANNUN TEST
3/4
ANALOG O/P TEST
2/4
DISCRETE O/P TEST 1/4
LEVER ARM>
<MAINT
BORESIGHT>
<MAINT
BORESIGHT>
<RETURN
MAINT1>
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
EGI - BORESIGHT 1/1
<EGI MAINT
EGI LEVER ARM 1/1
<EGI MAINT
DVS - BORESIGHT 1/1
<DVS MAINT
Figure 306 Maintenance Pages (Sheet 1 of 7)
34-61-14
Page 333/334
May 10, 2007


1
(FROM SHEET 1)
MAINTENANCE
2/2
<SENSORS
SET-UP>
<DISC I/O
DIG I/O>
LOOP TEST>
<LOG
<FLASH STATUS
OTHER>
<MEMORY
SENSOR
X-T-FMS 12/12
SENSOR
X-X-FMS 11/12
SENSOR
DR1 10/12
SENSOR
KALMAN 9/12
SENSOR
DVS1 8/12
SENSOR
INS1 7/12
SENSOR
INS/DVS1 6/12
SENSOR VOR1/DME1 5/12
SENSOR
DME1 4/12
SENSOR GPS (EGI)1 3/12
<RETURN
SENSOR
GPS1 2/12
<RETURN
<RETURN
SENSOR
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
<RETURN
INS/GPS1
DISCRETE I/O
1/1
MEMORY
<RETURN
EXT LOOP TEST
007E4000
<RETURN
<RETURN
1/1
DIG I/O STATUS
<RETURN
SET-UP
1/1
1/1
<RETURN
1/12
LOG
1/1
FLASH STATUS
1/1
OTHER
1/1
<IFEB03/05/1930:08
FLASH TEST>
<RETURN
<MAINT
<MAINT
FILE 1
<LOG
1/1
FLASH TEST
LOG>
<RETURN
1/1
<MAINT
34-61-14
Page 335/336
May 10, 2007


2
(FROM SHEET 1)
CONFIG INDEX
(GO TO SHEET 5)
<AIRCRAFT
VNAV>
<STEERING
A429 EQP>
<DISPLAY
R422 EQP>
<ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE>
<INDEX
<INDEX
STEERING CONFIG
<INDEX
1/1
(GO TO SHEET 6)
RESET>
<MAINT
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 2/2

AIRCRAFT CONFIG 1/2
1/1
DISCRETE CONFIG 3/3

DISCRETE CONFIG 2/3
DISCRETE CONFIG 1/3
ANNUNCIATOR CONFIG 1/1
DISC I/O>
DISC I/O>
DISC I/O>
<INDEX
<INDEX
<INDEX
<INDEX
RESET/LOAD CONFIG 1/1
DISC I/O LIST
4/4
DISC I/O LIST
<INDEX
<INDEX
<INDEX
RS422 PORT>
RS422 PORT LIST
VNAV CONFIG
1/1
<INDEX
1/1
2/4
DISC I/O LIST
<INDEX
<INDEX
1/1
3/4
DISC I/O LIST
<INDEX
RS422 EQP LIST
1/4
DISCRETE>
<RS422 EQP
DISCRETE>
DISCRETE>
DISCRETE>
34-61-14
Page 337/338
May 10, 2007


3
(FROM SHEET 1)
ATP MAINTENANCE
1/1
KEY TEST>
<FONTS
ANNUN TEST>
<NVRAM TEST
COLOR TEST>
<FLASH TEST
VIDEO TEST>
CONTRAST TEST>
<RETURN
FONTS
FLASH TEST
1/1
AUTO TEST>
1/1
CONTRAST TEST
VIDEO TEST
1/1
COLOR TEST
<WHITE
KEYBOARD TEST
1/1
TEST COLOR>
<RED
TOGGLE>
<RETURN
1/1
<GREEN
<BLUE
<ALL
.
<RETURN
<RETURN
NVRAM TEST
<RETURN
1/1
AUTOMATIC TEST
1/1
RETURN>
<RETURN
<RETURN
ALL COLOR TEST
<RETURN
1/1
ANNUNCIATOR TEST 1/1
<RETURN
34-61-14
Page 339/340
May 10, 2007


4
(FROM SHEET 3)
NEXT
DISPLAY CONFIG
1/4
PREV
NEXT
DISPLAY CONFIG
PREV
2/4
DISPLAY CONFIG
<DISPLAY
1/1
3/4
PREV
DISPLAY CONFIG
4/4
<RADIO
<COLOR
COLOR CONFIG
NEXT
<DATUM
<HOVER CONFIG
<INDEX
<INDEX
DATUM CONFIG
1/11
DATUM CONFIG
2/11
DATUM CONFIG
3/11
DATUM CONFIG
4/11
DATUM CONFIG
5/11
DATUM CONFIG
6/11
DATUM CONFIG
7/11
DATUM CONFIG
8/11
DATUM CONFIG
9/11
DATUM CONFIG
10/11
DATUM CONFIG
11/11
<DISPLAYUSER DATUM>
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM>
<DIMMING
<INDEX
HOVER CONFIG
<DISPLAY
1/1
<INDEX
RADIO CONFIG
3/3
RADIO CONFIG
2/3
RADIO CONFIG
1/3
<DISPLAY
DISPLAY>
DISPLAY>
DIMMING CONFIG
1/1
<DISPLAY
USER DATUM CONFIG 1/1

ENTERED TO WGS84
<DATUM
34-61-14
Page 341/342
May 10, 2007


5
(FROM SHEET 3)
A429 EQP CONFIG 1/1

<SENSOR
DISPLAY>
<GENERAL
(GO TO SHEET 7)
<RADIO
<INDEX
A429 I/P>
A429 SENSOR EQP 3/3

A429 SENSOR EQP 2/3
A429 SENSOR EQP 1/3
<A429 EQP
<A429 EQP
<A429 EQP
A429 I/P LIST 5/5

A429 I/P LIST 4/5
A429 I/P LIST 3/5
A429 I/P LIST 2/5
A429 I/P LIST 1/5
A429 I/P>
A429 I/P>
A429 I/P>
A429 DISPLAY EQP 2/2

<A429 EQP
<A429 EQP
A429 O/P>
<INDEX
<INDEX
A429 O/P>
<INDEX
A429 O/P>
A429 O/P>
<INDEX
<INDEX
A429 O/P>
NEXT
A429 GENERAL EQP 1/6
NEXT
PREV
A429 I/P>
A429 I/P>
PREV
A429 O/P LIST
CONCENTRATOR>
1/8
A429 O/P LIST
2/8
A429 O/P LIST
3/8
A429 O/P LIST
4/8
A429 O/P LIST
5/8
A429 O/P LIST
6/8
A429 O/P LIST

<A429 EQP
A429 I/P>
<A429 EQP
A429 I/P>
xCONC CONFIG
pCONC CONFIG
2/2
1/2
<A429 EQP
<A429 EQP
<A429 EQP
<A429 EQP
A429 I/P>
A429 I/P>
A429 I/P>
A429 I/P>
<INDEX
8/8
A429 EQP>
<INDEX
A429 EQP>
<INDEX
<INDEX
<INDEX
<INDEX
<INDEX
<A429 EQP
7/8
A429 O/P LIST

A429 EQP>
<INDEX
A429 EQP>
A429 EQP>
A429 EQP>
A429 EQP>
A429 EQP>
<A429 EQP
34-61-14
Page 343/344
May 10, 2007


7
(FROM SHEET 6)
NEXT
A429 RADIO EQP
PREV
1/2
A429 RADIO EQP
CONFIG>
2/2
CONFIG>
CONFIG>
CONFIG>
CONFIG>
CONFIG>
<A429 EQP
A429 I/P>
<A429 EQP
A429 RADIO CONFIG
1/8
A429 RADIO CONFIG
2/8
A429 RADIO CONFIG

A429 RADIO CONFIG
<A429 RADIO
A429 I/P>
<A429 RADIO
PREV
NEXT
<A429 RADIO
A429 I/P>
NEXT
A429 RADIO CONFIG
<A429 RADIO
A429 I/P>
A429 I/P>
PREV
6/8
A429 RADIO CONFIG
A429 I/P>
NEXT
4/8
A429 I/P>
<A429 RADIO
<A429 RADIO
3/8
A429 RADIO CONFIG
5/8
A429 I/P>
<A429 RADIO
PREV
7/8
A429 RADIO CONFIG
A429 I/P>
NEXT
<A429 RADIO
8/8
A429 I/P>
PREV
34-61-14
Page 345/346
May 10, 2007

O/P ANNUN TEST

WPT
1L
>ON
OFFSET
>ON G P S I N T
3/4
MSG
ON<
GPS INT
3L
<OFFON<
<OFF
ON<
>ON
4L
>ON
2L
LEGCHG
MCAUTION
ON<
5L
6L
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
<RETURN
6R
MAINT 1 ANNUNCIATORS:- ALL ANNUNCIATOR (MSG,OFFSET, ARM, LEGCHG,WPT,GPS INT

APPROACH, MCAUTION) ENABLE = ON
Figure 307 Maintenance Test 1
O/P ANNUN TEST

WPT
1L
>OFF
OFFSET
>OFF G P S I N T
3/4
MSG
OFF<
GPS INT
3L
<OFOFF<
OFF<
>OFF <OFF
4L
>OFF
2L
LEGCHG
MCAUTION
OFF<
5L
6L
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
<RETURN
6R
MAINT 2 ANNUNCIATORS:- ALL ANNUNCIATOR (MSG,OFFSET, ARM, LEGCHG,WPT,GPS INT

APPROACH, MCAUTION) ENABLE = OFF
Figure 308 Maintenance Test 2
34-61-14
Page 347
May 10, 2007

GS 000
HDG
000
000 /00
TAS
161
TRU
15
12
ACTWPT
2040.4z
0.7 NM
21
80
E
24
S32
IIII...IS31
30M
S02
W
80
S33
S00
S01
EHSI
TEST MOD
N S03
30
S04
33
KLM00053
Figure 309 Typical Full Rose Map Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
34-61-14
Page 348
May 10, 2007

TRK UP
MODE
TRK
HDG
HEADING
BUG
DTW
ETA
XX.X
DTW
15
12
18
XXXX.Xz
ETA
TRK
BEARING
TO ADF1
WPT/
IDENTIFIERS
20
ADF1
G706086
Figure 309 Typical ARC Map Mode Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 310 Typical ARC NAV Display
34-61-14
Page 349
May 10, 2007

GS210
TAS240
180 /29
HDG
182
TRU
LEKKO
1420.0z
17.0NM
18
15
21
EHAM
N
LEKKO
INKET
EHN
KLM00051
Figure 311 Typical Plan Mode
34-61-14
Page 350
May 10, 2007

For some operators, the different FMS Failure conditions provided by Label 271-002 FMS Failure is
displayed on their EFIS. The following provides the recommended actions in case one or more of the
conditions arise. For most of the items provided below, it is recommended not to use the FMS for navigation
and advise maintenance.
Label 271-002
LABEL 271-002
BIT NUMBER
11
12
13
14
15
16
22
DESCRIPTION
RPU CHECKSUM
FAILURE
DATA BASE CHECKSUM
FAILURE
RAM FAILURE
CO-PROCESSOR
FAILURE
REAL TIME CLOCK
FAILURE
PROGRAMMABLE
INTERVAL TIMER
FAILURE
BATTERY FAILURE
23
S/W CONFIGURATION
INVALID
24
ARINC 429 RECEIVERS

FAILURE
25
ARINC 429
TRANSMITTERS FAILURE
RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE ACTION

Software CRC check has failed. Try to re-load the
software. If the problem persists, contact vendor. Advise
maintenance.
Navigational database CRC check has failed. Try to reload the navigational database. Advise maintenance.
RAM failure detected. The FMS may fail before this
condition is raised. Ship the unit back to vendor. Advise
maintenance.
Math co-processor failure detected.Ship the unit back to
vendor. Advise maintenance.
Real time clock failure detected. Only use to retain time
and date in case of FMS power outage. If problem
persists, ship the unit back to vendor. Advise
maintenance.
A failure has been detected in the CPU clock. If problem
persists, ship the unit back to vendor. Advise
maintenance.
Battery failure detected. Only use to retain time and date
in case of FMS power outage. Advise maintenance.
Replace battery if maintenance center is approved.
Software has detected an invalid configuration.Try to reload the configuration. If problem persists, ship the unit
back to vendor. Advise maintenance.
One or more ARINC 429 receivers has failed. Determine
which functionality is affected by reviewing the
configuration. Advise maintenance.
One or more ARINC 429 transmitters has failed.
Determine which functionality is affected by reviewing the
configuration. Advise maintenance.
Figure 312 Label 271 Maintenance Action FMS Status
34-61-14
Page 351
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 352
May 10, 2007

SECTION V
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.
GENERAL
The authorized maintenance practices for the CMA-9000 Flight Management System (FMS) are
covered in separate sections as follows:
Servicing
Section VI
Page 501
Removal/Installation
Section VII
Page 601
Cleaning/Painting
Section VIII
Page 701
Approved Repairs
Section IX
Page 801
Configuration Selection Section X
Page 901
Data Loader Unit
Page 1001
Section XI
34-61-14
Page 401
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 402
May 10, 2007

SECTION VI
SERVICING
1.
GENERAL
There are no regular maintenance procedures applicable to the CMA-9000 Flight Management System.
However, when a message LOW BATTERY POWER flashes on the FMS display unit, return the Flight
Management System CMA-9000 to the CMC approved second line maintenance facility for
replacement. Also replacement of backlight for LCD is recommended after 10,000 operational hours or
as required.
34-61-14
Page 501
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 502
May 10, 2007

SECTION VII
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
GENERAL
This section contains the removal and installation instruction for the CMA-9000 FMS. For location of
holes, screws and plugs, refer to the appropriate outline drawings in Section II.
2.
REMOVAL PROCEDURES
A.
General
This section contains removal procedures for the CMA-9000 FMS. Refer to outline drawings in
Section II for location of screws, holes and plugs.
B.
3.
Flight Management System (FMS)

(1)
Ensure that all power to FMS is off.
(2)
Release four captive DZUS fasteners; pull FMS away from cockpit forward pedestal to get at
connector J1 at rear of the unit.
(3)
Disconnect aircraft interwiring cable connector mating with connector J1 of the FMS.
PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
4.
(1)
Check FMS for dents or other external damage to finish and case.
(2)
Check that the display glass is not broken.
(3)
Check aircraft interwiring cables and connectors for bent or loose connector pins, broken wires,
damaged insulation, and loose cable clamps.
INSTALLATION OF UNITS
(1)
Connect aircraft interwiring cable connector that mates with rear panel connector J1 of FMS.
(2)
Position FMS into aircraft panel and secure the four captive Dzus fasteners.
34-61-14
Page 601
May 10, 2007

5.
POST-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
(1) Check that the FMS is mounted correctly and firmly and that the display glass is clean.
(2) To clean the display glass, moisten a lint-free cloth with Isopropyl Alcohol and wipe the glass area.
Use another lint-free cloth to dry the glass clean and streak free.
6.
POST-INSTALLATION TESTS
(1) Proceed with Post-Installation Test defined in Section III.
34-61-14
Page 602
May 10, 2007

SECTION VIII
CLEANING/PAINTING
1.
GENERAL
The CMA-9000 Flight Management System (FMS) is not to be painted while installed in the aircraft,
however, minor cleaning of the outside surfaces may be done. Clean outside surfaces using a lint-free
cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol (Shell TPA 15099).
A.
Cleaning and Painting of Surfaces

Major cleaning and painting should be done when the unit is returned for overhaul and should be
carried out in accordance with the procedures given in the appropriate Maintenance Manual.
B.
Display Glass Cleaning

Clean the display glass of the FMS using a lint-free cloth and Isopropyl Alcohol.
34-61-14
Page 701
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 702
May 10, 2007

SECTION IX
APPROVED REPAIRS
1.
GENERAL
Repairs to be performed at CMC-approved repair center only and/or by CMC-approved technicians.
34-61-14
Page 801
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 802
May 10, 2007

SECTION X
CONFIGURATION SELECTION
1.
GENERAL
This section provides information that will allow the manual entry or automatic loading of the
configuration items into the FMS. Two methods are described.
2.
CONFIGURATION CAPABILITIES OF THE CMA-9000: FOUR CONFIGURATIONS

The CMA-9000 has the capability to maintain in non-volatile memory four (4) different configurations.
These configurations are independent of each other and the items can be defined with any valid
parameters requested by the user airlines (user defined type of configuration). The configurations are
named CONFIG_0, CONFIG_1, CONFIG_2 and CONFIG_3.
3.
FMS Configuration Selection Procedure

General Entry Rules
NOTE:
In the key sequences shown to display the pages, square brackets [ ] indicate a function
key, angle brackets < > indicates a line select key (left and right softkeys).
To change the condition of the selected parameter it is necessary to press the softkey located adjacent
to it. For example; on AIRCRAFT CONFIG 1/2 screen, pressing the softkey next to <TYPE> will allow
the selection of either FIX or ROTOR.
Some of the parameters have more than two choices but each option will be displayed by pressing the
appropriate softkey. When the configuration for all the displayed parameters are selected, pressing
<INDEX> softkey will return the operator to the CONFIG INDEX 1/1 page.
(1)
Figure 901 describes the configuration options for the FMS.
The following screens are used to configure the FMS:

CONFIG INDEX 1/1
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 1/2
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 2/2
STEERING CONFIG 1/1
DISPLAY CONFIG 1/4
DISPLAY CONFIG 2/4
DISPLAY CONFIG 3/4
DISPLAY CONFIG 4/4
COLOR CONFIG 1/1
DATUM CONFIG X/11
HOVER CONFIG 1/1
RADIO CONFIG 1/2 or 1/3, 2/3 or 1/4, 2/4, 3/4
RADIO CONFIG 2/2 or 3/3 or 4/4
DIMMING CONFIG 1/1
VNAV
34-61-14
Page 901
May 10, 2007

A429 SENSOR EQP 1/3

A429 SENSOR EQP 2/3
A429 SENSOR EQP 3/3
pCONC CONFIG 1/2
xCONC CONFIG 2/2
A429 RADIO EQP 1/2
A429 RADIO EQP 2/2
A429 RADIO CONFIG 1/8
A429 I/P LIST 1/5
A429 I/P LIST 2/5
A429 I/P LIST 3/5
A429 I/P LIST 4/5
A429 I/P LIST 5/5
A429 O/P LIST 1/8
A429 O/P LIST 2/8
A429 O/P LIST 3/8
A429 O/P LIST 4/8
A429 O/P LIST 5/8
A429 O/P LIST 6/8
A429 O/P LIST 7/8
A429 O/P LIST 8/8
RS422 EQP LIST 1/1
RS422 PORT LIST 1/1
DISCRETE CONFIG 1/3
DISCRETE CONFIG 2/3
DISCRETE CONFIG 3/3
DISC I/O LIST 1/4
DISC I/O LIST 2/4
DISC I/O LIST 3/4
DISC I/O LIST 4/4
RESET/LOAD CONFIG 1/1
34-61-14
Page 902
May 10, 2007

There are two ways to perform the aircraft software configuration. The first method is the Automatic
FMS Configuration Procedure using a Data Loader Unit. The second method is the Manual FMS
Configuration Procedure.
A.
FMS Configuration Procedure Using Configuration Diskette

Before proceeding with software configuration, it is necessary to obtain the appropriate
Configuration Diskette. If the Configuration Diskette is not available then proceed to step (1)
otherwise to upload the configuration data to the DLU, proceed to step (2).
(1)
Create the Configuration Diskette using the FMS PTT software

NOTE: Unless an RS-422 DLU (CMC P/N 100-602443-000 or equivalent) is available the
Aircraft Configuration Diskette can only be produced with the CMC-PTT. The CMCPTT must have exactly the same software, which is operating in the FMS.
(a) Start up the appropriate PTT and press [INIT REF], [NEXT], <MAINT>, enter password
<1> to access <CONFIG> on the MAINTENANCE 1/2 page.
NOTE: Clear all messages.
(b) At the CONFIG INDEX 1/1 page, configure all the options per Aircraft Configuration Chart
of Figure 901. Save this configuration under CONFIG_0 and exit the PTT (close)
application.
(c) Figure 902 displays the complete list of the configuration pages and their available
selections. This figure is used to mark the aircraft configuration selections to ensure
future replacement.
(d) Use WINDOWS FILE MANAGER and locate the newly saved CONFIG.LDR file and
FMS0.CFG files that reside in the same directory as the PTT.
(e) Copy the two files onto a 1.44MB diskette.
(f)
(2)
Verify that the Configuration Diskette contains two files (CONFIG.LDR and FMS0.CFG).
After making the Configuration Diskette, proceed as follows to automatically load the
configuration data.
NOTE: Any equipment sharing an input port with the DLU should be powered off prior to
powering and using the DLU):
(a) Connect a Data Loader Unit (DLU) cable to DLU receptacle available in the cockpit.
34-61-14
Page 903
May 10, 2007

(b) Turn on the DLU and ensure FMS is on. On the FMS, access the FMS1 INIT/REF INDEX
2/2 page.
(c) Insert the Configuration Diskette (refer to paragraph (1) above) containing the appropriate
configuration files into the DLU.
(d) Select PROGRESS 1/X page (press [PROG]) and ensure groundspeed is 0 kts. If not,
pull the appropriate landing accessory CB, press [INIT REF], [NEXT], <MAINT>, enter
password <1> if necessary, <CONFIG>, <DISCRETE>, set OLEO to INVERSE, press
[INIT REF] and <YES> to save the settings. Reset landing accessory circuit breaker.
(e) Access DATA LOAD prompt as follow:
3
(f)
1Press [INIT REF] and [NEXT] keys. The <DATA LOAD> prompt is displayed
next to LSK 5R.
Press <DATA LOAD> prompt.
(g) This will display the DATA LOAD 1/1 page.

(h) Using LSK 1L, scroll through data load type in order to select either CONFIG_0,
CONFIG_1, CONFIG_2 or CONFIG_3.
(i)
Press LSK 4R <START>.
(j)
When data loader indicates complete, press [INIT REF] key then either <CONFIG_0>
(LSK 3L), <CONFIG_1> (LSK 4L), <CONFIG_2> (LSK 5L), <CONFIG_3> (LSK 6L), to
save the newly loaded configuration.
(k) Cycle FMU circuit breaker.

(l)
Press [INIT REF] key then <IDENT>, (LSK 1L) to display FMS IDENT 1/2 page.
(m) Verify that CFG NO matches the AFMS or the appropriate installation documents.
B.
Manual FMS Configuration Procedure

(1)
Set the CMA-9000 circuit breaker ON.

(2)
On the FMS press in sequence [INIT REF] [NEXT] and <MAINT>. Enter Maintenance
Password (normally 1) and MAINTENANCE 1/2 page will appear.
34-61-14
Page 904
May 10, 2007

(3)
Proceed by completing all items on CONFIG INDEX 1/1 page (accessed through the
MAINTENANCE 1/2 page). Use Figure 306 to navigate between the configuration pages.
4
Figure 901 lists all FMS configuration pages and provides detailed remarks.
MAINTENANCE
1/2
1L
<P/N
2L
<CONFIG
O/P TEST>
2R
3L
<ATP
I/P TEST>
3R
4L
<EGI
A429CHK>
4R
5L
<DVS
5R
6L
<PASSWORD
6R
1R
(a) Press <CONFIG>. The following screen will appear:
CONFIG INDEX
1/1
1L
<AIRCRAFT
VNAV>
2L
<STEERING
A429 EQP>
2R
3L
<DISPLAY
RS422 EQP>
3R
4L
<ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE>
4R
RADIO EQP>
5R
RESET>
6R
5L
6L
<MAINT
1R
The next four display pages (b thru e) are examples showing the DISPLAY configuration pages. Proceed to
configure all the other items.
34-61-14
Page 905
May 10, 2007

(b) Press <DISPLAY> softkey. The following screen will appear:
DISPLAY CONFIG
DATE
1L
>MMDDYY
2L
<COLOR
3L
>YES
4L
>NO
5L
<DATUM
6L
1/4
DISPLAY REF
MAG<
WIND REF
TRUE<
MOV WPT
LAT-LONG ID
7 CHAR<
OFFSET
SEARCH
NO<
LOG MSG
NO<
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
ALERT MSG
NORMAL<
<INDEX
6R
(c) Press [NEXT]
DISPLAY CONFIG
FUEL PG
FLT LOG PG
PLAN PG
FUEL+WEIGHTS<
1L
>YES
2L
>YES
3L
>4 PG SET
4L
>DEFAULT
5L
<HOVER CONFIG
6L
2/4
DESELECT PG
YES<
PROGRESS
PREDEF PG
DISP TYPE
CO ROUTES
YES<
ALL<
HOVER
YES<
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
RTE2
YES<
<INDEX
6R
(d) Press [NEXT]
DISPLAY CONFIG
PWR UP PG
1L
>RADIO
2L
<RADIO
3L
>YES
4L
>YES
5L
>YES
6L
<INDEX
3/4
WHITE TRANS
YES<
ERASE MODS
DEFAULT<
SIMUL PG
DMAP APP DEF
TIMER PG
QNH REF
BACKTRACK
ON<
YES<
QNH FILTER
50.0
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
34-61-14
Page 906
May 10, 2007

(e) Press [NEXT]
DISPLAY CONFIG
(f)
4/4
CFG KEY 1
CFG KEY 2
CFG KEY 3
CFG KEY 4
TPDR<
1L
>FREQ
2L
>MARK
3L
>MSG
3R
4L
>YES
4R
5L
DIMMING
5R
6L
<INDEX
6R
HOLD<
CFG KEY 5
NEXT KEYS
1R
2R
Figures 901 and 902 display the complete list of the configuration pages and their
available selections. Figure 902 is used to mark the aircraft configuration selections to
ensure future replacement.
(g) After the configuration selection is completed press [INIT REF] key. The following screen
appears:
SAVE CONFIG ?
CONFIG_3 ACTIVE
1L
1R
2L
2R
3L
<CONFIG_0
3R
4L
<CONFIG_1
4R
5L
<CONFIG_2
5R
6L
<CONFIG_3
NO>
6R
34-61-14
Page 907
May 10, 2007

(h) To save the configuration, press any of the desired <CONFIG_0>, <CONFIG_1>,
<CONFIG_2>, or <CONFIG_3> softkeys. The following screen will appear:
1L
1R
2L
2R
3L
RE-CONFIGURATION
IN PROGRESS
4L
(i)
4R
PLEASE WAIT
5L
5R
6L
6R
When the configuration process is completed the screen will revert to IDENT 1/2 page or
RADIO 1/4 page. If the display is RADIO press [INT REF] key then <IDENT> at LSK 1L
to display FMSx IDENT 1/2 page. Record the number that appears under CFG NO, this
number will be displayed whenever the FMSx IDENT 1/2 page is accessed. A change in
this number indicates a change in the configuration selection.
FMS1 IDENT
1/2
5L
NAV DATABASE
ACTIVE
K L M W W 0 6 9 7 OCT10-NOV06/03
SECOND
OP PROGRAM
CFG NO
614876-xxx.xx
23253
CUSTOM DATABASE
DATE
EC-RTEST
MAR21/04
USER DATABASE
DATE
EC-UDTEST
MAR21/04
6L
<SETUP
1L
2L
3L
4L
(j)
3R
POS INIT>
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
Cycle the power to the unit before using it further.
34-61-14
Page 908
May 10, 2007

FMS CONFIGURATION PAGE
REMARKS
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 1/2

TYPE
FIX
If aircraft is Fixed wing select FIX.
ROTOR
If aircraft is Rotary Wing select ROTOR.

NOTE: If selected do not configured IRS.
SPEED
SLOW
FAST
Aircraft Category
A
B
C
D
E
AEROBATIC
Approach Speed
<91 kts
91 to 120
121 to 140
141 to 165
>166 kts
Configuration setting
select SLOW.
select SLOW.
select FAST.
select FAST.
select FAST.
Selected when the airbone/on-ground logic is set based solely on

weight on wheel status. The approach speed is the same as the
FAST type of aircraft.
ENRT
Phase of flight limit

Select ENRT: To enable only enroute navigation.
TERM
TERM: to enable en-route and terminal area navigation.
APPR
APPR: to enable en-route, terminal and non-precision approach

navigation.
MILITARY
Assumes Sensor navigation solutions to have integrity unless proven

otherwise. This option also enables the tactical direct-to option.
CIVIL
Assumes Sensor navigation solutions not to have integrity unless

proven otherwise.
POF LIMIT
NAVIGATION
NOTE: Only the CIVIL Navigation configuration is certifiable by

Transport Canada according to TSO-C129a and TSOC115b.
APPROACH
MANUAL
If the Approach mode from Enroute phase to Approach phase is to

be initiated manually by pressing the external Approach Arm
Annunciator/Switch then select MANUAL.
AUTO
If the Approach mode from Enroute phase to Approach phase is to

be initiated automatically by the FMS then select AUTO.
Figure 901 FMS Configuration Pages (Sheet 1 of 60)
34-61-14
Page 909
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 1/2 (cont'd)

DR DEGR
0 to 50 knots
Dead Reckoning degradation

Enter a value 0 to 50 kts (nm/h) which is representative of the DR
Degradation of the system. The suggested entered value is 9.0 kt.
This value is based on a 1/Hour Heading error (XTK error) and a
6 Knots error in the TAS (Along Track Error).
If the avionics equipment does not conform to the above accuracies
the following example and formula may be used to calculate the DR
DEGR. e.g. Groundspeed of aircraft=400 kts, time interval = 1 hour,
therefore distance travelled = 400 nm, assume 1 heading error and
6 knots TAS error.
Distance Travelled = 400 nm
Along Track error = 6 nm
XTK error = 400 x sin 1 = 7.0 nm
Total error =
(6) 2 + (7) 2 = 9.0 kts
The above is based on a zero wind error at the time of entry into DR.
Big wind changes will affect the DR DEGR. Winds should be
updated from a known source in order to remain within the expected
DR DEGR.
FLIGHT LOG
STANDARD
Indicates that the aircraft on-ground/airborne status is based on the

standard determination method (e.g. TAS, GPS ground speed and
oleo strut switch. If strut airborne, then aircraft is always airborne. If
strut is on ground, then refer to table below.). For the AEROBATIC
speed type, the airborne/on-ground logic is based solely on the oleo
strut switch.
TAS>40
|
TAS<40
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------GS>15 | GS<5 | GS=invalid | GS>15 | GS<5 | GS=invalid
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------air
| ground | air
| air
| ground | ground
WOW_ONLY
Indicates that the aircraft on-ground/airborne status is determined

based on the oleo strut switch status only. This field is only available
when the Aircraft Type is set to ROTOR.
POF
If the FMS is certified then select POF (Phase Of Flight).
RNP
If the FMS is not certified then select RNP (Required Navigation

Performance).
NOTE: Only the POF ERR LIMITS configuration is certifiable by
Transport Canada according to TSO-C129a and TSOC115b.
ERR LIMITS
34-61-14
Page 910
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 1/2 (cont'd)

Actual Navigation Performance/Horizontal Integrity Limit
ANP = KHIL x RAIM HIL if RAIM HIL is available.
ANP/HIL
KHIL is an FMS configurable value (ANP/HIL), can be configured to

a value between [0.050 to 1.00].
HSI SCALE
1_NM
Reduces the default value of 5_NM to 1_NM.
5_NM
Provides normal HSI mode.

NOTE: The HSI SCALE can be configured only if the POF LIMIT is
configured to TERM or APPR and for the following EFIS
types: Sperry, Sperry2, GAMA, Sextant, Rockwell/
Rockwell2, Barco, Meggitt and AHCAS2.
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 2/2

TAS SOURCE
SENSOR
If the True Air Speed is supplied to the system from a DADC or

ANALOG synchro (through a A/D converter) then select SENSOR.
MANUAL
If the True Air Speed is not available from a DADC or ANALOG

synchro then select MANUAL.
Enter the number assigned for your Navigational DataBase between
0 and 25000.
DBASE ID
USE DIGITAL HDG
YES
If the FMS source of heading is digital then select YES.
IF_LNAV_ON
If LNAV is ON, use digital heading, otherwise use external compass

heading. If compass heading is not available and LNAV is off, then a
heading failure will be displayed.
Manual update default accuracy for DVS and DR.
Value between 0.15 and 9.99nm.
MAN UPD ACCUR

COLD START
7_SEC
When the aircraft is on ground, the FMS cold start recovery is

triggered when the power outage lasts more than 7 seconds.
90_SEC
When the aircraft is on ground, the FMS cold start recovery is

triggered when the power outage lasts more than 90 seconds.
34-61-14
Page 911
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
STEERING CONFIG 1/1

STEERING TYPE
DIGITAL_ROLL
If there is a digital roll command FMS output sent to the autopilot

then select DIGITAL_ROLL.
ANALOG_ROLL
Future Growth Do not select. If there is an analog roll command

FMS output sent to the autopilot then select ANALOG_ROLL.
TKE_XTK
If a TKE/XTK equation is used as the input to the autopilot then

select TKE_XTK.
YES
If a rate of 3 degrees per second is desired select YES.
NO
If a variable rate of 3 degrees or more per second is required select

NO.
RATE 1
ROLL RATE
2.5 to 4.0 deg/sec
Enter in degrees the maximum Roll Limit of the aircraft between 2.5
and 4.0 degrees/second.
ROLL LIMIT
10 to 30 deg.
Enter in degrees the maximum Roll Limit of the aircraft between 10

and 30 degrees.
ALT_1
If Buffet Protection on the Roll Command Signal is required and is

based on Altitude select ALT_1. The roll command will be limited to
the defined BUF LIMIT when the aircraft altitude increases above
24,500 ft and remains in effect until altitude decreases below 23,500
ft.
TAS_1
If Buffet Protection on the Roll Command Signal is required and is

based on True Air Speed select TAS_1. The roll command will be
limited to the defined BUF LIMIT when the aircraft TAS is above 296
kts and remains effective until the TAS decreases below 275 kts.
NO
If Buffet Protection on the Roll Command Signal is not required,

select NO.
10 to 30 deg.
Select a value of Roll Limit between 10 and 30 degrees where

Buffet Onset could occur.
BUF PROTECT
BUF LIMIT
34-61-14
Page 912
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
STEERING CONFIG 1/1 (cont'd)

Intercept
INTC
TRK
If Track Hold course intercepts are preferred, then select TRK.
HDG
If Heading Hold course intercepts are preferred, then select HDG.
LEVEL
If Track or Heading course intercepts are not required, or if LNAV IP

is configured to NONE, then select LEVEL.
Not on intercept
NOT ON INTC
PULSE_STEER
If the Steering Valid to the Intercept is a Pulse Signal then select

PULSE_STEER.
INVALID_STEER
If the Steering Valid to the Intercept is a Continuous Signal then

select INVALID_STEER.
MOVING_DTK
If a Moving Desired Track type of a Direct-To is preferred then select

MOVING_DTK.
STANDARD
If a standard type of a Direct-To is preferred then select STANDARD.
DIRECT TO
NOTE: Only the STANDARD Direct-To configuration is certifiable

by Transport Canada according to TSO-C129a and TSOC115b.
DISPLAY CONFIG 1/4
DATE
MMMDDYY
If the date entry and display is to be in Month, Day, and Year format
then select MMMDDYY.
DDMMMYY
If the date entry and display is to be in Day, Month, and Year format
then select DDMMMYY.
TRUE
To display on the FMS and HSI all angles referenced to True North
then select TRUE.
MAG
To have all angles referenced to Magnetic North then select MAG.
TRUE
If wind is to be displayed and referenced to True North then select

TRUE.
MAG
If wind is to be displayed and referenced to Magnetic North then

select MAG.
DISPLAY REF
WIND REF
34-61-14
Page 913
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISPLAY CONFIG 1/4 (contd)

MOV WPT
YES
If capability of inserting moving waypoint is allowed then select

TRUE.
NO
If capability of inserting moving waypoint is not allowed then select

NO.
5_CHAR
If a five character ICAO Identifier is used then select 5_CHAR.
7_CHAR
If a seven character ICAO Identifier is used then select 7_CHAR.
YES
If offset capability is to be offered by the FMS (e.g. ROUTE page

LSK_6R) then select YES.
NO
If offset capability is not to be offered by the FMS then select NO.
YES
If the FMS is to be used in a search mode of navigation, select YES.
NO
If the FMS is not to be used in a search mode of navigation, select

NO.
YES
If the FMS is required to store messages, then select YES.
NO
If the logging of messages is not required, select NO.
NORMAL
If the alert messages are to be displayed on the scratchpad then

select NORMAL.
RECALL_PG
If the alert messages are not to be displayed on the scratchpad and

can only be viewed on the FMSx MESSAGE RECALL page
then select RECALL_PG.
LAT_LONG ID
OFFSET
SEARCH
LOG MSG
ALERT MSG
DISPLAY CONFIG 2/4

DESELECT PG
YES
If the DESELECT function of the NAVIGATION STATUS page is to

be accessible during normal flight operation then select YES.
NO
If the DESELECT function of the NAVIGATION STATUS page is not

to be accessible during normal flight operation then select NO.
34-61-14
Page 914
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

FUEL PG
FUEL
If the FUEL computation page (without weight details) is to be

accessible during normal flight operation then select FUEL.
FUEL+WEIGHTS
If the FUEL computation page (with weight details) is to be

accessible during normal flight operation then select FUEL
+WEIGHTS.
NO
If the FUEL computation page is not to be accessible during normal

flight operation then select NO.
YES
If the FLIGHT LOG page is to be accessible during normal flight

operation then select YES.
NO
If the FLIGHT LOG page is not to be accessible during normal flight

operation then select NO.
YES
If the PLAN information page is to be accessible during normal flight

operation then select YES.
NO
If the PLAN information page is not to be accessible during normal

flight operation then select NO.
4_PG_SET
If all information of the PROGRESS pages (refer to Operating

Manual) are to be displayed then select 4_PG_SET.
3_PG_SET
If only three pages (refer to Operating Manual) are to be displayed

then select 3_PG_SET.
YES
Enables PREDEF WPT page to be displayed.
NO
Disables PREDEF WPT page.
DEFAULT
Normal selection.
ENGINEERING
For engineering use only.
ORIG_DEST
CO ROUTES page displays only Company Routes whose Origin and

Destination airports match the entered airports.
ALL
The CO ROUTES page displays all Company routes.
FLT LOG PG
PLAN PG
PROGRESS
PREDEF PG
DISP TYPE
CO ROUTES
34-61-14
Page 915
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

HOVER
YES
Enables HOVER page to be displayed.
NO
Disables HOVER page.

NOTE: HOVER can only be configured to YES if a Radio Altimeter
is installed and if aircraft type is set to ROTOR (e.g. rotary
wing).
RTE2
YES
Activates the RTE2 prompt on the ROUTE 1 page allowing the

programming of a second route that may become active.
NO
Deactivates the RTE2 prompt on the ROUTE 1 page not allowing the
programming of a second route.
DISPLAY CONFIG 3/4

PWR UP PAGE
IDENT
The FMS IDENT 1/2 page is displayed after a power outage.
RADIO
The FMS RADIO 1/4 page is displayed after a power outage.
AUTO_TEST
The FMS AUTO_TEST page is displayed after a power outage.

NOTE: AUTO_TEST is used for production purposes only.
WHITE TRANS
YES
During fly-by leg transitions, on the FMS the active waypoint is

displayed in white reverse video between start of turn and leg
switching point on the LEGS and PROGRESS page.
NO
Disable white reverse video active waypoint annunciation.
DEFAULT
Direct erasure of changes when ERASE key is pressed.
CONFIRM
Cause a CANCEL/CONFIRM prompt to appear when ERASE key is

pressed.
YES
Activates SIMULATE prompt on the INIT/REF 2/2 and OEI MODEL

field on IDENT 2/2 pages.
NO
Deactivates and blanks SIMULATE prompt on the INIT/REF 2/2.
ERASE MODS
SIMUL PG
34-61-14
Page 916
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

DMAP APP DEF
ON
When a DMAP waypoint is received, the appropriate LEGS page will

automatically be displayed and the waypoint will be appended at the
end of the route.
OFF
When a DMAP waypoint is received, the appropriate DMAP page will

automatically appear.
YES
Activates TIMER prompt on the INIT/REF 2/2 page.
NO
Deactivates and blanks TIMER prompt on the INIT/REF 2/2 page.
NO
Default.
YES
Cause the QNH ALTIMETER REF field to appear on the

PROGRESS 4/4. Only applicable when SIGMA50H EGI is installed
and configured.
YES
Activates BACKTRACK prompt on the RTE1 1/1 page (available only

in flight).
NO
Deactivates the BACKTRACK route functionality.
TIMER PG
QNH REF
BACKTRACK
Time constant value for the QNF Reference Steady State filter.
Value between 1 to 500 seconds. Only applicable when SIGMA50H
EGI is installed and configured.
QNF FILTER
DISPLAY CONFIG 4/4

Allows configuration of the first five front panel function keys of the
second row of the FMS keyboard to provide direct access to any of
the following CDU page functions: NONE, SQK_IDT, ATC, FUEL,
MARK, RADIO, HOLD, FIX, MSG, VNAV.
CFG KEY 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
NONE
No function is assigned to the selected key.
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
RADIO
Provides access to the RADIO page.
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
FIX
Provides access to the FIX information page.
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
HOLD
Provides access to the HOLD page.
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
MSG
Provides access to the MESSAGE RECALL page.
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
SQK_IDT
Enables function only when ATC equipment configured.
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)

(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
FUEL
ATC
Enables function only when a FUEL Computer is configured.

Enables function only when ATC Radio is configured.
34-61-14
Page 917
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
MARK (on
top)
Enables function only when PREDEF PG page configured.

NOTE: When mark on top key is configured the Mark on Top prompt
is removed from INIT/REF 1/2 page as well as from
PREDEF WPT 2/2 page.
(CFG KEY 1,2,3,4,5)
VNAV
Enables function only when a VNAV is configured. (see VNAV

CONFIG 1/1 page).
NEXT KEYS
YES
Allows PROG, HOLD LEGS, DEP ARR, FUEL, RTE, FIX, MSG,
RADIO, VNAV and INIT REF function keys to function like the NEXT
key when the corresponding pages are selected.
NO
The function keys listed above function as normal.
COLOR CONFIG 1/1

PRESET TYPE
STANDARD
Approved set of colors for certified civil FMS configuration for FMS
pages. The following fields cannot be changed and contained the
standard color and size.
CUSTOM
User predefined colors for FMS pages. This section affects the
following fields.
ACT WPT
STANDARD= LG_BLK_MGT
CUSTOM= refer to note below
Color and size of the active waypoint on the Progress Pages.

Select size, foreground color, background color (SIZE_FG_BG)
when PRESET TYPE is CUSTOM.
LEGS WPT
STANDARD= LG_GRN_BLK
Color and size of waypoint identifiers on the LEGS Pages.

UNITS
STANDARD= XS_WHT_BLK
Color and size of units displayed on FMS Pages.

PAGE TTL
STANDARD= LG_CYN_BLK
Color and size of FMS Page Titles.

PAGE PMT
STANDARD= LG_CYN_BLK
Color and size of FMS Page Prompts.

FIX CAPTION
STANDARD= SM_GRN_BLK
Color and size of FMS Page fixed captions.

34-61-14
Page 918
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
COLOR CONFIG 1/1 (contd)

TUNING PROG
STANDARD= SM_BLK_WHT
Color and size of the active frequency on the radio control page
when tuning is in progress.
ENTERED DATA
STANDARD= LG_WHT_BLK
Color and size of Manually (Operator) Entered data.

COMPUTED DATA
STANDARD= SM_WHT_BLK
Color and size of FMS Computed, Database Retrieved or Received

data.
NOTE: Where SIZE_FG_BG =XS_WHT_BLK/XS_GRN_BLK/
XS_CYN_BLK/XS_MGT_BLK/SM_WHT_BLK/
SM_GRN_BLK/SM_CYN_BLK/SM_MGT_BLK/
LG_WHT_BLK/LG_GRN_BLK/LG_CYN_BLK/
LG_MGT_BLK/SM_BLK_WHT/SM_BLK_GRN/
SM_BLK_CYN/SM_BLK_MGT/LG_BLK_WHT/
LG_BLK_GRN/LG_BLK_CYN/LG_BLK_MGT
DATUM CONFIG 1/X
To select earth model for use as reference for UTM coordinates.
SUBSET
Selected subset WGS84 is hard-coded and cannot be removed from

the list.
SELECT
Choices include: ARC 1950, ARC 1960, AUSSIE 66, AUSSIE 84,
BOGOTA, CAMPO, CAPE, CARTHAGE, CHATHAM 71, CHUA
ASTRO, CORREGO, WEUROPE, CYPRUS, EGYPT, IRAN, SICILY,
EUROPE1979, GANDAJIKA, GEODETIC49, HJORSEY 55,
THAI/VIETN, BANG/IN/NP, IRELND1965, KERTAU1948,
LIBRIA1964, LUZON, MASSAWA, MERCHICH, MINNA,
NAHRWAN, N.A CONUS, N.A ALASKA, N.A CANADA, N.A
MEXICO, NAMERICA83, OLD EGYPT, OLD HAWAI, OMAN,
BRITAIN 36, PITCAIRN67, QUATARNATL, QORNOQ,
SCHWARZECK, SAMERICA69, TIMBALAI 8, TOKYO, ZANDERIJ,
WGS72, WGS84, CH1903, USER-DEF
8 datum may be selected from list contained in pages 1 to 11.

ENTERED TO WGS84
X-AXIS OFFSET
Enter the X-AXIS OFFSET in meters (default is 0 m range +/-999m).
Y-AXIS OFFSET
Enter the Y-AXIS OFFSET in meters (default is 0 m range +/-999m).

34-61-14
Page 919
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

ENTERED TO WGS84 (cont'd)
Z-AXIS OFFSET
Enter the Z-AXIS OFFSET in meters (default is 0 m range +/-999m).
SEMIMAJOR-AXIS SHIFT
Enter the semi major axis shift in meters (default is 0.000 m range +/999.999m).
FLATTENING SHIFT
Enter the flattening shift in meters (default is 0.00000000 m range +/9.99999999m).
HOVER CONFIG 1/1
Hover configuration is possible when Radar Altimeter is configured.
DECELERATION
Enter longitudinal deceleration for hover procedure (0 to 5

knots/second).
G LIMIT
Enter vertical acceleration limit for hover procedure (0 to 1).
DESIRED GS
Enter desired Ground Speed for hover procedure (30 to 100 knots).
DESIRED VS
Enter desired Vertical Speed for hover procedure (100 to 1000 ft/min).
SAFETY FACTOR (DIST.)
Enter safety factor for the TDN - MRK distance (0 to 100%).
TDN RESTRICTIONS
YES
Select YES to allow restrictions on transdown procedures.
NO
Select NO in order not to allow restrictions.
RADIO CONFIG Y/X

EQUIPMENT
Toggle between installed and configured radios options equipment

names in line select keys 1L to 6L ad 1R to 6R.
The number of pages depends on the number of radios configured
on the ARINC 429 RADIO EQP pages.
On RADIO top pages:
The radio controls are placed in the same LSK as on the RADIO
CONFIG Y/X. A blank line corresponds to a space (i.e. unused LSK).
On RADIO TEST pages:
The radio 1(s) are placed of the left side and the radio 2(s) are on the
right side of the page. The order of placement follows the order of
RADIO top page (from top to bottom). No space are used. Only
radios with test option configured are listed.
On RADIO LIBRARY pages:
The radios are placed on the left side staring with the 1st type of radio
found on the RADIO top page(s). The other type follows in the order
they appear. No distinction is done between radio 1 and 2.
34-61-14
Page 920
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

Allows the selection of a name to be used for the ATC Transponder on
the RADIO X/X pages.
ATC NAME
ATC
Select ATC and ATC is displayed on all ATC related tuning and
control and RADIO X/X pages.
TPDR
Select TPDR and TPDR is displayed on all TPDR related tuning and
XPDR
Select XPDR and XPDR is displayed on all XPDR related tuning and
VUHF NAME
Allows the selection of a name to be used for the V/UHF radio on the
RADIO X/X pages.
VUF
Select VUF and VUF is displayed on all VUF related tuning and
COM1
Select COM1 and COM1 is displayed on all COM1 related tuning

and control and RADIO X/X pages.
COM3

NAV NAME
Allows the selection of a name to be used for the VHF NAV radio on
NAV
Select NAV and NAV is displayed on all NAV related tuning and
VOR
Select VOR and VOR is displayed on all VOR related tuning and
VIR
Select VIR and VIR is displayed on all VIR related tuning and control
and RADIO X/X pages.
Allows the selection of a name to be used for the VHF COM radio on
COM NAME
COM1

COM3

VHF
Select VHF and VHF is displayed on all VHF related tuning and
34-61-14
Page 921
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DIMMING CONFIG 1/1

TABLE CRC
The CRC of the loaded LED Dimming Curve is displayed. If no table

was loaded, it displays NONE.
DIM MODE
INTERNAL
If the brightness of the display and annunciators are to be controlled

by the LDR and by the BRT key, then select INTERNAL.
EXTERNAL
If the brightness of the display and annunciators are to be controlled

based on a (loaded) dimming curve, then select EXTERNAL.
NVG THOLD
The Night Vision Threshold voltage is displayed on the external

Dimmer. The display will revert in NVG when the voltage supplied by
the source is less than the value specified. This field is available only
when DIM MODE = EXTERNAL.
It is read from the loaded Dimming Curve.
DIM CURVE
DEFAULT
If the DIM MODE is set to EXTERNAL, the dimming curve is based

on the existing hard coded dimming curve (linear model for the NVG,
day and night modes). The brightness is computed based on the 0-5
VDC voltage input source and the brightness level retrived from the
hard-coded dimming curve.
CUSTOM
If the DIM MODE is set to EXTERNAL, the dimming curve is based

on a loaded customized dimming curve. The brightness is computed
based on the 0-5 VDC voltage input source and the brightness level
retrieved from the loaded dimming curve.

Front panel annunciators configuration. ANNUN #1 is the 3rd
annunciators from the top left.
MENU,FAIL,MSG,
ANNUN #1 TO #5,EXEC
ENABLE
Select to allow the system to light the selected annunciator (even

during power-up test sequence).
DISABLE
Select to disable this annunciator from ever being lit (except ATP
pages).
VNAV CONFIG 1/1

APPR
YES
Select YES to enable the VNAV.approach function.
NO
Select NO to disable the VNAV approach function.
YES
Select YES to enable automatic activation of glidepath.
NO
Select NO to disable automatic activation of glidepath.
AUTO APPR
34-61-14
Page 922
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
VNAV CONFIG 1/1 (cont'd)

GS FLAG ENRT
OUT_OF_VIEW
Select OUT_OF_VIEW to disable display of the G/S flag on the

CDI/HIS when en-route
IN_VIEW
Select IN_VIEW to enable display of the G/S flag on the CDI/HIS
when en-route.
TEMP ENTRY
ALERT
Select ALERT to enables the SET AIRPORT TEMP messages.
NO_ALERT
Select NO_ALERT to disables the SET AIRPORT TEMP messages.
MANDATORY
MANDATORY specifies that the entry of OAT is required in order to

make VNAV approach information active.
A429 SENSOR EQP 1/3

INSTALL
ADC .
NO
If there is no digital source of TAS or Altitude then select NO.
SINGLE
If a single digital ADC sensor is installed supplying TAS and Altitude

(Pressure or Baro corrected) to one FMS then select SINGLE.
SINGLE_1
If a single_1 digital ADC sensor is installed supplying TAS and

Altitude (Pressure or Baro corrected) to one FMS then select
SINGLE_1.
DUAL
If dual digital ADC sensors are installed supplying TAS and Altitude
(Pressure or Baro corrected) to one FMS then select DUAL.
A429
If the DADC databus is of the ARINC 429 format then select A429.
A575
If the DADC databus is of the ARINC 575 format then select A575.
FORMAT.
INSTALL
AHRS .
NO
If there is no source of Digital Heading then select NO.
SINGLE
If the digital source of Heading for the FMS is from a single Attitude
Heading Reference System Sensor then select SINGLE.
SINGLE_1
If the digital source of Heading for the FMS is from a single_1

Attitude Heading Reference System Sensor then select SINGLE_1.
DUAL
If the digital source of Heading for the FMS is from dual Attitude
Heading Reference System Sensor then select DUAL.
TRIPLE
If the digital source of Heading for the FMS is from triple Attitude
Heading Reference System Sensor then select TRIPLE.
34-61-14
Page 923
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 SENSOR EQP 1/3 (contd)

TAIL_CORR
INSTALL
YES
Select YES to apply the tail boom correction.
NO
Select NO to indicate that no tail boom correction is applied.
APIRS.
NO
If the FMS is not interfaced with an APIRS, select NO.
SINGLE
If the FMS is interfaced with an Attitude Piloting Reference System

(APIRS) for acceleration and heading, select SINGLE.
SFIM_F201
Default setting is SFIM_F201.
TYPE
INSTALL
DVS .
NO
If no Doppler Velocity Sensor is connected to the FMS, select NO.
SINGLE
If Doppler Velocity Sensor is connected to the FMS, select SINGLE.
RDN85
If RDN85 DVS is interfaced to a FMS, select RDN85.

Or
If ANV353 DVS is interfaced to a FMS, select ANV353.
TYPE
ANV353
SURF CFG
AUTO
If ANV353 is configured and default surface configuration is AUTO,

select AUTO.
MANUAL
If ANV353 is configured and default surface configuration is

MANUAL, select MANUAL.
A429 SENSOR EQP 2/3

INSTALL
EGI .
NO
If no EGI is connected to the FMS, select NO.
SINGLE
If EGI is connected to the FMS, select SINGLE.

NOTE: The installation of an EGI is not allowed with a Transport
Canada approved FMS.
TYPE
LN_100 GT
SIGMA50H
If LN100 GT EGI is connected to the FMS, select LN_100GT.

Or
If SIGMA50H EGI is connected to the FMS, select SIGMA50H.
34-61-14
Page 924
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

INSTALL
GPS .
NO
Is no GPS equipment is interfaced with the CMA-9000 then select

NO.
SINGLE
If a GPS equipment is interfaced with the CMA-9000 then select

SINGLE. (default is SINGLE). Only a single GPS can be installed.
TA12
If the GPS input to the FMS is from a Trimble TA12, select TA12.
A743_A
If the GPS input to the FMS is from an ARINC 743A type GPS
system, select A743_A.
A743
If the GPS input to the FMS is from an ARINC 743 type GPS system,
select A743.
A743A_4
If the GPS input to the FMS is from an ARINC 743A_4 type GPS
system, select A743A_4.
IRS .
NOTE:
NO
If there is no inertial reference system then select NO.
SINGLE
If there is 1 inertial reference system connected to the FMS then

select SINGLE.
DUAL

select DUAL.
TRIPLE

select TRIPLE.
NO
If no IRS CDU equipment is interfaced with the CMA-9000 then

select NO.
SINGLE
If an IRS CDU equipment is interfaced with the CMA-9000 then

select SINGLE. (default is SINGLE). Only a single IRS CDU can be
installed.
LTN_92
If the IRS input to the FMS is from a Litton LTN-92, select LTN_92.
LTN_101
If the IRS input to the FMS is from an Litton LTN-101 IRS system,
select LTN_101
ADIRU
If the IRS input to the FMS is from ADIRU, select ADIRU.
LASEREF_V
If the IRS input to the FMS is from a LASEREF_V, select

LASEREF_V.
TYPE
INSTALL
Select NO if ROTOR is configured.
IRS CDU
TYPE
34-61-14
Page 925
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

INSTALL
RALT .
NO
If no Radio Altimeter is connected to the FMS then select NO.
SINGLE
If one Radio Altimeter is connected to the FMS then select SINGLE.
DUAL
If two Radio Altimeters are connected to the FMS then select DUAL.
A429 SENSOR EQP 3/3

INSTALL
TACAN .
NO
If the FMS interface does not include a TACAN radio, select NO.
SINGLE
If the FMS interfaces to a TACAN radio, select SINGLE.
NC_12B
If TACAN radio is interfaced to a FMS, select NC_12B.
TYPE
INSTALL
ACARS
Select default setting NO. No ACARS can be installed Future
Growth.
NO
INSTALL
INSTALL
ACMS .
NO
If there is no aircraft maintenance status equipment, then select NO.
SINGLE
If a single aircraft maintenance status equipment is installed, then

select SINGLE.
AFCS .
NO
If there is no digital input of Roll Command on the Autopilot

Computer then select NO.
SINGLE
If there is a digital input of Roll Command on the Autopilot Computer

then select SINGLE.
YES
If there is a TKE/XTK steering signal input on the Autopilot then

select YES.
NO
If there is no TKE/XTK steering signal input on the Autopilot then

select NO.
TKE XTK
INSTALL
CHK .
NO
If there is no ARINC 429 Checker installed then select NO.
SINGLE
If there is an ARINC 429 Checker installed then select SINGLE.
34-61-14
Page 926
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

INSTALL
INSTALL
CONC .
Concentrator
NO
If no Data Concentrator is connected to the FMS then select NO.
SINGLE
If one Data Concentrator is connected to the FMS then select

SINGLE.
DUAL
If two Data Concentrator are connected to the FMS then select

DUAL.
DLU L
Data Loading Unit
SINGLE
For Data Loader Unit, default status is SINGLE since a single Data
Loader interface is provided
IP1 THRU IP20
Select the input port which is being used by the FMS for the DLU I/P.
IN PORT
NOTE: Another equipment can be configured on the same FMS
input port used by the DLU. When the DLU is connected, the
other equipment MUST be powered down).
INSTALL
ELT .
NO
If no emergency locator transmitter is interfaced with the FMS, select

NO.
SINGLE
If an emergency locator transmitter is interfaced to the FMS, select

SINGLE.

INSTALL
FC .
NO
If there is no Digital Fuel Computer sensor installed then select NO.
SINGLE
If only one Digital Fuel Computer sensor is connected to the FMS

then select SINGLE.
DUAL
If two Digital Fuel Computers are connected to the FMS then select
DUAL.
KG
If the Fuel Parameters are to be received in Kilograms then select

KG.
LB
If the Fuel Parameters are to be received in Pounds then select LB.
UNIT
34-61-14
Page 927
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 GENERAL EQP 3/6 (cont'd)

FUEL QTY & FUEL FLOW
Enter the ARINC Label for Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow.
1ST LABEL
FUEL QTY
000 TO 377
FUEL FLOW
000 TO 377
Enter the ARINC Label for Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow.
2ND LABEL
FUEL QTY
000 TO 377
FUEL FLOW
000 TO 377
MSB
FUEL QTY
0 TO 524288
FUEL FLOW
0 TO 65537
Enter the Most Significant Bit value for Fuel Quantity.

Enter the Most Significant Bit value for Fuel Flow.
Select either ON or OFF for the SDI if it is available from the Fuel
Quantity Sensor.
SDI
FUEL QTY
OFF/ON
FUEL FLOW
OFF/ON
INSTALL
PLS .
NO
If no Personnel Locator System is connected to the FMS then select

NO.
YES
If a Personnel Locator System is connected to the FMS then select

YES.
AN_ARS6
If the input to the FMS is from the AN_ARS6 PLS, select AN_ARS6.
CUBIC_V12
If the input to the FMS is from the CUBIC_V1 PLS, select

CUBIC_V12.
TYPE
34-61-14
Page 928
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

INSTALL
REC .
NO
If no Data Recorder is connected to one of the FMS OUTPUT BUS

then select NO.
SINGLE
If a Data Recorder is connected to one of the FMS OUTPUT BUS for

data recording then select SINGLE.

INSTALL
REPE .
NO
If no repeater equipment is installed, then select NO.
SINGLE
If repeater equipment is installed, then select SINGLE.

If no repeater is used then leave blank. If repeater is used, enter
equipment (from equipment list) requiring input/output repeating. The
list is not exhaustive
IN EQP
pADC
AHRS
DME
FC
AFCS
GPS
INSTALL
pHSI
pCOM
pAPI
pATC
pNAV
pADF
PEF
xHSI
xCOM
xAPI
xATC
xNAV
xADF
xEFI
xFMU .
NO
If only one CMA-9000 is installed, then select NO.
SINGLE
If two CMA-9000 are installed, then select SINGLE.
DUAL
If three CMA-9000 are installed, then select DUAL.
NO
If the CMA-9000 must always operate in independent mode then

select NO.
MANUAL
If the CMA-9000 is set in synchronized mode manually then select

MANUAL.
AUTO
If the CMA-9000 is set in synchronized mode automatically then

select AUTO.
ALWAYS
If the CMA-9000 must always operate in synchronized mode then

select ALWAYS. In this configuration, the crew does not have the
capability to revert back in INDEPENDENT mode.
x-SYNC
34-61-14
Page 929
May 10, 2007


pCONC CONFIG 1/2 &
xCONC CONFIG 2/2
REMARKS
On line select keys 1L to 5L and 1R to 5R, select equipment
connected to the CONCENTRATION system per following list
(example, list is not exhaustive):
ADC GPS
HIS
AFCS
AHRS ATC
COM ADF
DME NAV
API
FC
NOTE: The CMA-9000 offers the capability to receive ARINC 429
labels from different equipments on a single ARINC 429
input bus. The capability of merging ARINC 429 labels from
different equipments is provided by an external equipment
called a CONCENTRATOR.
NOTE: 1. Prefix p denotes primary system in single or dual
installation.
2. Prefix x denotes cross system in dual installation.
3 Page 1/2 configures the interfaces of Concentration # 1.
4 Page 2/2 configures the interfaces of Concentration # 2.
A429 RADIO EQP 1/2

INSTALL
ADF .
NO
If there is no ADF Receiver connected to the FMS then select NO.
SINGLE
If only one ADF receiver is connected to the FMS and the SDI of
both are the same then select SINGLE.
SINGLE_1
If only one ADF Receiver is connected to the FMS and the ADFs
SDI is 01 then select SINGLE_1.
SINGLE_2
If only one ADF Receiver is connected to the FMS and the ADFs
SDI is 10 then select SINGLE_2.
DUAL
If both ADF1 and ADF2 are connected to the FMS then select DUAL.
34-61-14
Page 930
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 RADIO EQP 1/2 (cont'd)

INSTALL
ATC .
INSTALL
NO
If there is no Transponder to the FMS then select NO.
SINGLE
If only one Transponder is connected to the FMS and the SDI of both
are the same then select SINGLE.
SINGLE_1
If only one Transponder is connected to the FMS and the

Transponders SDI is 01 then select SINGLE_1.
SINGLE_2
If only one Transponder is connected to the FMS and the

Transponders SDI is 10 then select SINGLE_2.
DUAL
If two Transponders are connected to the FMS then select DUAL.

NOTE: When dual ATC is configured, the output to both ATCs must
be coming from the same FMS ARINC Output Port.
INSTALL
INSTALL
COM .
NO
If there is no COM Radio input to the FMS then select NO.
SINGLE
If only one COM Radio is being connected to the FMS and the SDI of
SINGLE_1
If only one COM is connected to the FMS and the Transponders SDI
is 01 then select SINGLE_1.
SINGLE_2
If only one COM is connected to the FMS and the Transponders SDI
is 10 then select SINGLE_2.
DUAL
If two COM Radios are connected to the FMS then select DUAL.
DME .
NO
If there is no DME sensor installed then select NO.
SINGLE
If only one DME Radio is being connected to the FMS and the SDI of
SINGLE_1
If only one DME sensor is connected to the FMS whose SDI is 01

then select SINGLE_1.
SINGLE_2
If only one DME sensor is connected to the FMS whose SDI is 10

DUAL
If two DME sensors are connected to the FMS then select DUAL.
34-61-14
Page 931
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 RADIO EQP 1/2 (cont'd)

INSTALL
NAV .
NO
If there is no VOR NAV sensor input then select NO.
SINGLE
If only one VOR NAV sensor is connected to the FMS and the SDI of
SINGLE_1
If only one VOR NAV sensor is connected to the FMS whose SDI is
01 then select SINGLE_1.
SINGLE_2
If only one VOR NAV sensor is connected to the FMS whose SDI is
10 then select SINGLE_2.
DUAL
If two VOR NAV sensors are connected to the FMS then select
DUAL.
A429 RADIO EQP 2/2

INSTALL
INSTALL
VUHF .
NO
If the FMS interface does not include a VUHF radio, select NO.
SINGLE
If the FMS interfaces to a VUHF radio, and the SDI of both are the
same then select SINGLE.
SINGLE_1
If only one VUHF radio is connected to the FMS whose SDI is 01

SINGLE_2
If only one VUHF radio is connected to the FMS whose SDI is 10

DUAL
If two VUHF radio are connected to the FMS then select DUAL.
AMU .
NO
If the FMS interface does not include an AMU, select NO.
SINGLE
If the FMS interfaces to an AMU, select SINGLE.

ADF TYPE
BK_DF431B
If the input to the FMS is from the BK_DF431B ADF, select

BK_DF431B.
C_ADF_462
If the input to the FMS is from the C_ADF_462 ADF, select

C_ADF_462.
34-61-14
Page 932
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 RADIO CONFIG 1/8 (cont'd)

pADF BURST
xADF BURST
NO
If the frequency command method to the ADF is continuous, then

select NO.
YES
If the frequency command method to the ADF is burst, then select

YES.
NO
If the FMS is not required to perform the function test on the ADF,
then select NO.
YES
If the FMS is required to perform the function test on the ADF, then
select YES.
pADF TEST
xADF TEST

ATC TYPE
BK_MST_67A
If the input to the FMS is from the BK_MST_67A ATC, select

BK_MST_67A (default).
TDR_94D_005
If the input to the FMS is from the Collins TDR_94D_005, select

TDR_94D_005.
NO
If the frequency command method to the ATC is continuous, then

select NO.
YES
If the frequency command method to the ATC is burst, then select

YES.
NO
If the FMS is not required to perform the function test on the ATC,
then select NO.
YES
If the FMS is required to perform the function test on the ATC, then
select YES.
0000 to 7777
Input the default ATC code that will be automatically loaded on the
ATC page at power up (COLD START) on the FMS, if no manual
entry is done. Default value at power up is 7000.
pATC BURST
xATC BURST
pATC TEST
xATC TEST
DEF VFR CODE
EMERGENCY CODE
0000 to 7777
Input the default ATC code that will be automatically loaded on the
ATC page when the emergency prompt is selected on the FMS, if no
manual entry is done. Default value at power up is 7777.
34-61-14
Page 933
May 10, 2007


COM TYPE
BK_VC_401B
REMARKS
If the input to the FMS is from the Chelton BK_VC_401B Com radio,
select BK_VC_401B.
pCOM BURST
xCOM BURST
NO
If the frequency command method to the COM is continuous, then

select NO.
YES
If the frequency command method to the COM is burst, then select

YES.
NO
If the FMS is not required to perform the function test on the COM,
then select NO.
YES
If the FMS is required to perform the function test on the COM, then
select YES.
135_975 MHZ
If the maximum tuning frequency from the radio is 135.975 MHz,

select 135_975MHz (applicable to 25 kHz frequency steps only).
151_975 MHZ

136_975 MHZ

136_990MHZ

select 136_990MHz (applicable to 8.33 kHz and 25+8.33 kHz
frequency steps only).
151_990MHZ

select 151_990MHz (applicable to 8.33 kHz and 25+8.33 kHz
frequency steps only).
pCOM TEST
xCOM TEST
FREQ MAX
34-61-14
Page 934
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 RADIO CONFIG 3/8 (contd)

FREQ STEP
8_33KHZ
If the radio tuning steps at 8.33 kHz, then select 8_33kHz.

If the radio tuning steps at 25 kHz, then select 25kHz.
25KHZ
25_8_33KHZ
If the radio steps at both 8.33 and 25 kHz, then select 25_8_33kHz.
When the entered frequency step is 8.33 label 047 will be used to
tune the radio, and when the entered frequency step is 25 label 030
will be use to tune the radio.
NOTE:
-
The ICAO Emergency frequency operates at 121.500 MHz

with a 25 kHz frequency channel spacing. If the frequency
channel spacing configuration item is set to 8.33 kHz, the
Emergency frequency (e.g. entering 121.500 MHz) will not
be accepted and not be tuned. The frequency is only
accessible when the frequency spacing is configured to
either 25 kHz or 25 kHz + 8.33 kHz (combined).
The Emergency frequency cannot be used as back-up 25
kHz frequencies in 8.33 sectors. Refer to ICAO Annex 10
Chapter 4.0 for additional information.
Depending on the FREQ STEP, the available options for
the FREQ MAX field are the following:
FREQ STEP
FREQ MAX
25 kHz
135_975 MHz
136_975 MHz
151_975 MHz
25_8_33 kHz or
8_33 kHz
136_990 MHz
151_990 MHz

DME TYPE
BK_DM_441B
If the input to the FMS is from the Chelton BK_DM441B DME, select
BK_DM_441B (default).
C_DME_442
If the input to the FMS is from the Chelton C_DME442 DME, select
C_DME_442.
C_DME_4000
If the input to the FMS is from the Chelton C_DME400 DME, select
C_DME_4000.
34-61-14
Page 935
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

pDME BURST
xDME BURST
YES
If the frequency commands method to the pDME is burst, select

YES.
NO
If the frequency commands method to the pDME is continuous,

select NO.
NO
If the FMS is not required to perform the functional test on the pDME,
then select NO.
YES
If the FMS is required to perform the functional test on the pDME,

then select YES.
OFF
If the Channel 1 of pDME is not to be connected, then select OFF.
pNAV
If the Channel 1 of pDME is to be connected to p-navigation receiver,

then select pNAV.
xNAV
If the Channel 1 of pDME is to be connected to x-navigation receiver,

then select xNAV.
OFF
If the Channel 2 of pDME is not to be connected, then select OFF.
pNAV
If the Channel 2 of pDME is to be connected to p-navigation receiver,

then select pNAV.
xNAV
If the Channel 2 of pDME is to be connected to x-navigation receiver,

then select xNAV.
pDME TEST
xDME TEST
pDME CHAN1
xDME CHAN1
pDME CHAN2
xDME CHAN2
NOTE: pDME CHAN1 cannot have the same selection as pDME

CHAN2, but they can both be OFF. Similarly for xDME
CHAN1 and xDME CHAN2.
DME MODE
MANUAL
If the DME is only to be tuned manually (e.g. NAV manual tuning) via
the Radio Tuning pages then select MANUAL.
SCANNING
If the DME requires to be scanned automatically (in order to create a

navigation solution), then select SCANNING.
BOTH
If both above modes are to be used, then select BOTH.

34-61-14
Page 936
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

SCANNING CHANNEL
1ST/ 2nd /3rd /4th
/5th/FREE,
/STBY
Select from the list which is the appropriate mode and channel the
DME is operating under, in the installation.
ALL_CALL
If any DME is to respond to the FMS scanning commands, then

select ALL_CALL.
SIDE_DEPENDENT
If each DME is to respond individually to the FMS scanning

commands, then select SIDE_DEPENDENT.
ONSIDE_ONLY
If a DME is to respond individually to the FMS scanning commands,

then select ONSIDE_ONLY.
SCANNING SDI
Tuning delay for DME/DME navigator.
TUNING WAIT DELAY

SEC3_3
3.3 seconds (when flying mainly at low altitude).
SEC2_5
2.5 seconds (when flying mainly at high altitude).
TUNING ATTEMPTS
ONCE
TWICE
THRICE
Number of consecutive attempts before declaring a DME station not

tuned (once, twice or thrice).

NAV TYPE
BK_VN_411B
If the input to the FMS is from the Chelton BK_VN411B NAV, select
BK_VN_411B.
C_VIR_432
If the input to the FMS is from the Chelton C_VIR432 NAV, select
C_VIR_432.
C_VOR_4500
If the input to the FMS is from the Collins C_VOR4500 NAV, select
C_VOR_4500.
A429
If the ARINC Bus format is 429 then select A429.
A579
If the ARINC Bus format is 579 then select A579.
NO
If the frequency commands method to the NAV is continuous, select

NO.
YES
If the frequency commands method to the NAV is burst, select YES.
FORMAT
pNAV BURST
xNAV BURST
34-61-14
Page 937
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

pNAV TEST
xNAV TEST
NO
If the FMS is not required to perform the functional test on the NAV,
then select NO.
YES
If the FMS is required to perform the functional test on the NAV, then
select YES.
VOR AUTOTUNING
NO
Deselect VOR autotuning.
YES
Select VOR autotuning.

NOTE: The VOR autotuning of the CMA-9000 FMS is not an
approved function (Transport Canada approved FMS).
NAV FUNCTION
MANUAL
If the FMS is to be used to allow manual tuning of the navigation

receiver, then select MANUAL.
NAVIGATOR
If the FMS is to display navigation information from the navigation

receiver, then select NAVIGATOR.
BOTH
If the FMS is to be used for both above functions, then select BOTH.
In order to enable VOR automatic tuning select BOTH.
OMNI
If bearing is referenced to omni, then select OMNI.
RADIAL
If bearing is referenced to radial, then select RADIAL.
IN REF

VUHF TYPE
X-TUNING
E_SRT651
Default is the Marconi Selenia SRT-651 V/UHF radio.
NO
The offside FMS is not used to tune a V/UHF radio. The FMS is
connected to all V/UHF radio and can perform radio tuning on all
V/UHF radios.
VUHF1
The offside FMS is used to tune V/UHF1 radio. Tuning information is

sent on the FMS cross-talk bus and is used by the offside FMS to
tune V/UHF1 radio.
VUHF2
The offside FMS is used to tune V/UHF2 radio. Tuning information is

sent on the FMS cross-talk bus and is used by the offside FMS to
tune V/UHF2 radio.
34-61-14
Page 938
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

pVUHF BURST
xVUHF BURST
NO
If the frequency commands method to the VUHF is continuous,

select NO.
YES
If the frequency commands method to the VUHF is burst, select

YES.
NO
If the FMS is not required to perform the functional test on the VUHF,
then select NO.
YES
If the FMS is required to perform the functional test on the VUHF,

then select YES.
pVUHF TEST
xVUHF TEST
pVUHF FREQ STEP

xVUHF FREQ STEP
8_33kHz
If the radio tuning steps at 8.33 kHz, then select 8_3 kHz.
25kHz
If the radio tuning steps at 25 kHz, then select 25kHz.
25_8_33kHz
If the radio tuning steps at both 25 and 8_33 kHz, then select
25_8_33kHz.
pVUHF UHF2 BD
xVUHF UHF2 BD
NO
If the FMS cannot tune VUHF radio on UHF2 band (400 - 469.975
MHz), then select NO.
YES
If the FMS can tune VUHF radio on UHF2 band (400 - 469.975
MHz), then select YES.

pVUHF MARITIME BD
xVUHF MARITIME BD
DISABLE
If the FMS is not to control VUHF maritime band mode, then select
DISABLE.
ENABLE
If the FMS is to control VUHF maritime band mode, then select

ENABLE.
34-61-14
Page 939
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

pVUHF FUNCTIONS
xVUHF FUNCTIONS
TR_GU_GV
If the FMS is to control VUHF Guard Upper transmission mode, then

select TR_GU_GV.
TR_G_GD_243
If the FMS is to control VUHF Guard 243 transmission mode, then

select TR_G_GD_243.
pVUHF POWER CTRL

xVUHF POWER CTRL
ENABLE
If the FMS can control the power (LOW, MEDIUM or FULL) of the
VUHF radio, then select ENABLE.
FULL
If the VUHF radio is to be operated in FULL power only, then select

FULL.
MEDIUM
If the VUHF radio is to be operated in MEDIUM power only, then

select MEDIUM.
LOW
If the VUHF radio is to be operated in LOW power only, then select

LOW.
pVUHF PTT CTRL

xVUHF PTT CTRL
DISABLE
If the option for the FMS that allow the user to activate the push-totalk button on a FMS prompt is NOT selected, then select DISABLE.
ENABLE
If the option for the FMS that allow the user to activate the push-totalk button on a FMS prompt is selected, then select ENABLE.

INSTALL
EFIS .
NO
If the FMS is not connected to the EFIS system then select NO.
GAMA
If the FMS interface to an EFIS is using GAMA protocol, then select

GAMA.
SEXTANT
If the FMS is interfaced to a Sextant Avionique Nouvelle EFIS, select

SEXTANT.
SPERRY
If the FMS is connected to a Honeywell 905 or 914 symbol generator

then select SPERRY.
SPERRY2
If the FMS is connected to a Honeywell 811 symbol generator then

select SPERRY2.
34-61-14
Page 940
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 DISPLAY EQP 1/2 (contd)

ROCKWELL
If the FMS is connected to a Rockwell symbol generator then select

Rockwell.
ROCKWELL2
If the FMS is connected to a Rockwell2 symbol generator then select

Rockwell2.
IFDS
If the FMS is connected to IFDS symbol generator then select IFDS.
AHCAS
If the FMS is connected to AHCAS symbol generator then select

AHCAS.
AHCAS2
If the FMS is connected to AHCAS2 symbol generator then select

AHCAS2.
BARCO
If the FMS is connected to a BARCO symbol generator then select

BARCO.
MEGGIT
If the FMS is connected to a Meggit symbol generator then select

MEGGIT.
OFF
If flight plan preview mode by EFIS MAP is not desired on the EFIS
display then select OFF.
ON
If flight plan preview mode by EFIS MAP is desired on the EFIS

display then select ON.
FIX
If the EFIS symbol generator requires a fixed update of waypoints

once every 10 seconds (for most EFIS) then select FIX. The FIX
update is set at 4 seconds for the Meggit display and at 1.8 second
for the IFDS & AHCAS types.
CONTINUOUS
If the EFIS symbol generator requires a continuous retransmission of

waypoints then select CONTINUOUS.
ALL
If all the NAVAIDS and AIRPORTS are to be displayed as default on

the EFIS then select ALL.
NDB_APT
If only NDB navaids and AIRPORTS are to be displayed as default

on the EFIS then select NDB_APT.
VHF_APT
If only VHF navaids and AIRPORTS are to be displayed as default

on the EFIS then select VHF_APT.
APT
If only AIRPORTS are to be displayed as default on the EFIS then

select APT.
VHF_NDB
If only VHF and NDB navaids are to be displayed as default on the

EFIS then select VHF_NDB.
STEP
UPDATE
BG TYPE
34-61-14
Page 941
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 DISPLAY EQP 1/2 (contd)

NDB
If only NDB navaids are to be displayed as default on the EFIS then

select NDB.
VHF
If only VHF navaids are to be displayed as default on the EFIS then

select VHF.
NONE
If navaids and airports are not to be displayed as default on the EFIS

then select NONE.
CUSTOM
If the EFIS database symbol settings are to be preserved after a

power outage, then select CUSTOM.
NOTE:
INSTALL
For ALL/NDB_APT/VHF_APT/APT/VHF_NDB /NDB/VHF

/NONE options, EFIS database symbol settings will be
reset to the default settings after a power up. For
CUSTOM option, the settings will be preserved after a
power up.
EHSI .
NO
If there is no ARINC 702 EHSI installed then select NO.
SINGLE
If only one ARINC 702 EHSI is connected to the FMS then select
SINGLE.
DUAL
If two ARINC 702 EHSIs are connected to the FMS then select
DUAL.
SINGLE
If the EHSI installation requires a single output then select SINGLE.
DOUBLE
If the EHSI installation requires a double output then select

DOUBLE.
SMITHS_5ATI
If the EHSI interfaced with the CMA-9000 is SMITHS_5ATI, then

select SMITHS_5ATI.
ASTRONAUTICS
If the EHSI interfaced with the CMA-9000 is ASTRONAUTICS, then

select ASTRONAUTICS. Future Growth
OUTPUT
TYPE
34-61-14
Page 942
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

INSTALL
DMAP .
NO
If no digital map is interfaced to the FMS, select NO.
SINGLE
If digital map is interfaced to the FMS, select SINGLE.
DKG4
If a DKG4 digital map is interfaced, select model DKG4.
ELBIT
If a ELBIT digital map is interfaced, select model ELBIT.
EURONAV
If a EURONAV digital map is interfaced, select model EURONAV.
TYPE
INSTALL
WXR .
NO
If no weather radar is interfaced to the CMA-9000, then select NO.
SINGLE
If the weather radar is interfaced to the CMA-9000, then select

SINGLE.
INSTALL
CDU .
If no external CDU installed, then select NO.
NONE
SINGLE
If a single external CDU installed, then select SINGLE.
DUAL
If two external CDU installed, then select DUAL.
TRIPLE
If three external CDU installed, then select TRIPLE.

(NOTE: Equipment appears in the input & output list even if they
are not configured).
A429 I/P LIST 1/5

SPEED
EQP
Input port 1
1 .
LOW/HIGH
Select LOW or HIGH depending on the equipment Bus speed

requirements.
----
Select equipment from the list when the line select key is pressed.
Determine which equipment was installed on this Input Port and
select the equipment name; if no equipment was installed then select
- - - - from the list.
34-61-14
Page 943
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 I/P LIST 1/5 (cont'd)

SPEED
EQP
SPEED
EQP
SPEED
EQP
SPEED
EQP
Input port 2
2 .
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
Input port 3
3 .
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
Input port 4
4 .
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
5 .
Input port 5
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
34-61-14
Page 944
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 I/P LIST 2/5

SPEED
EQP
SPEED
EQP
SPEED
EQP
SPEED
EQP
6 .
Input port 6
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
7 .
Input port 7
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
8 .
Input port 8
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
9 .
Input port 9
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
34-61-14
Page 945
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

SPEED
EQP
10 .
Input port 10
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
A429 I/P LIST 3/5

SPEED
11 .
Input port 11
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
12 .
Input port 12
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
13 .
Input port 13
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
EQP
34-61-14
Page 946
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

SPEED
14 .
Input port 14
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
15 .
Input port 15
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
EQP
A429 I/P LIST 4/5

SPEED
16 .
Input port 16
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
17 .
Input port 17
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
EQP
34-61-14
Page 947
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

SPEED
18 .
Input port 18
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
19 .
Input port 19
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
20 .
Input port 20
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
EQP
A429 I/P LIST 5/5

SPEED
EQP
21 .
Input port 21
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
34-61-14
Page 948
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

SPEED
22 .
Input port 22
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
23 .
Input port 23
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
EQP
----
SPEED
24 .
Input port 24
LOW/HIGH

requirements.
----
EQP
A429 O/P LIST 1/8

SPEED
1 .
Output port 1
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
Determine which equipment was installed on this Output Port and
34-61-14
Page 949
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 O/P LIST 2/8

SPEED
2 .
Output port 2
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
A429 O/P LIST 3/8

SPEED
3 .
Output port 3
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
A429 O/P LIST 4/8

SPEED
4 .
Output port 4
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
A429 O/P LIST 5/8

SPEED
5 .
Output port 5
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
34-61-14
Page 950
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
A429 O/P LIST 6/8

SPEED
6 .
Output port 6
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
A429 O/P LIST 7/8

SPEED
7 .
Output port 7
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
A429 O/P LIST 8/8

SPEED
8 .
Output port 8
LOW/HIGH
EQP 1 to EQP 9 ----

requirements.
RS422 EQP LIST 1/1

INSTALL
DLU .
Data Loader Unit
NO
If DLU is ARINC 615, select NO.
SINGLE
If DLU is a Targa PDP/3-DOS DLU, select SINGLE.

NOTE: If DLU is installed on this port, no other selection is
available.
34-61-14
Page 951
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
RS422 PORT LIST 1/1

INSTALL PORT
1 .
NONE
If no equipment is installed on this RS232/422 port, then select

NONE.
DLU
If a RS-232/422 DLU is installed on this port, then select DLU.
MAINT
If Maintenance equipment is installed on this port then select MAINT.
RS422
If the port 1 is to operate in RS422 mode, then select RS422.
RS232
If the port 1 is to operate in RS232 mode, then select RS232.
MODE
INSTALL PORT
INSTALL PORT
INSTALL PORT
2 .
NONE
If no equipment is installed on this RS422 port, then select NONE.
DLU
If a RS-422 DLU is installed on this port, then select DLU.
3 .
NONE
DLU
4 .
NONE
DLU
DISCRETE CONFIG 1/3

INSTALL
LNAV .
YES
If the LNAV engagement status is available from the LNAV switch or

the flight director/auto-pilot then select YES.
NONE
If LNAV engagement status is not available from a switch or the flight

director/auto-pilot then select NONE.
NORMAL
If the LNAV Switch provides an open circuit, when the LNAV is

selected, then select NORMAL.
INVERSE
If the LNAV Switch provides a ground circuit, when the LNAV is

selected, then select INVERSE.
LOGIC
34-61-14
Page 952
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISCRETE CONFIG 1/3 (cont'd)

OLEO .
LOGIC
NORMAL
If the Weight-On-Wheels logic provides a ground circuit, when the

aircraft is on the ground, then select NORMAL.
INVERSE
If the Weight-On-Wheels logic provides an open circuit, when the

aircraft is on the ground, then select INVERSE.
TOGA .
LOGIC
NORMAL
If the TOGA Switch logic provides an open circuit, when it is

activated, then select NORMAL.
INVERSE
If the TOGA Switch logic provides a ground circuit, when it is
activated, then select INVERSE.
INSTALL
TRUE/MAG .
NONE
If a TRUE/MAG discrete is not available to the FMS, then select NO.
YES
If a TRUE/MAG discrete is available to the FMS, then select YES.
NORMAL
If the TRUE/MAG provides an open or 0 volts for a valid, then select

NORMAL.
INVERSE
If the TRUE/MAG provides 28V or ground for a valid, then select

INVERSE.
LOGIC
EMERGENCY .
LOGIC
NORMAL
If the EMERGENCY Switch logic provides an open circuit, when it is

activated, then select NORMAL.
INVERSE
If the EMERGENCY Switch logic provides a ground circuit, when it is
activated, then select INVERSE.
34-61-14
Page 953
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISCRETE CONFIG 2/3

INSTALL
CENT CLR
NONE
If a Central Clear discrete is not available to the FMS, then select

NO.
YES
If a Central Clear discrete is available to the FMS, then select YES.
NORMAL
If the Central Clear switch provides an Open, then select NORMAL.
INVERSE
If the Central Clear switch provides a Ground, then select INVERSE.
LOGIC
INSTALL
M_APPR .
YES
If Manual Approach Mode is installed, select YES.
NONE
If Manual Approach Mode is not installed, select NONE.
ARM
If the APPROACH MODE is set to MANUAL and is to be

permanently armed then select ARM.
NOT_ARM
If the APPROACH MODE is set to MANUAL and is not to be

permanently armed then select NOT_ARM.
STATE
STATE
STATE
R_DEMO .
YES
If the capability to Reprogram the FMS or use the Demonstration

Mode is to be available then select YES. In this mode the access to
the Maintenance pages is granted even in AIRBORNE condition.
NO

Mode is not to be available then select NO.
EXTERN

Mode is designated by external discrete inputs, then select EXTERN
SDI .
UNIT_1
If the FMS is to be designated as No. 1 in a single or dual or triple

(Future Growth for triple installation) installation then select UNIT_1.
UNIT_2
If the FMS is to be designated as No. 2 in a dual or triple (Future

Growth for triple installation) installation then select UNIT_2.
34-61-14
Page 954
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISCRETE CONFIG 2/3 (contd)

UNIT_3
If the FMS is to be designated as No. 3 in a triple (Future Growth)

installation then select UNIT_3.
EXTERN
(Future Growth)
NOTE:
STATE
The TSO approval limits the installation to a dual FMS

installation.
RESET .
YES
Allows the FMS to reset automatically on exceptional faults.
NO
Prevents the FMS to reset on exceptional faults. The FMS stops until
re-powered.
DISCRETE CONFIG 3/3

MASTER CAUTION = .
GPS_INT
If Master Caution needs to be triggered when GPS Integrity alarm is

ON, then select GPS_INT.
SYS_INVALID
If Master Caution needs to be triggered when System Invalid alarm is

ON, then select SYS_INVALID.
KALMAN_INT
If Master Caution needs to be triggered when Kalman Integrity alarm

is ON, then select KALMAN_INT.
34-61-14
Page 955
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISC I/O LIST 1/4

SINK DOP
1
(28VDC current sink 200 mA)
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
---------SINK DOP
22
Select one from the list if a 28 Vdc current sink of 200 mA is required
from J1-39.
(MCAUTION)
NOTE: Even though this discrete output #1 can be configured, CMC

strongly recommends to configure and wire this discrete as
the Master Caution.
from J1-45.
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
---------Figure 901 FMS Configuration Pages (Sheet 48 of 60)
34-61-14
Page 956
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISC I/O LIST 1/4 (contd)

SINK DOP
3
from J1-46.
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
---------SINK DOP
4
from J1-31.
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
----------
34-61-14
Page 957
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

SINK DOP
5
from J1-87.
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
---------DIP 0V/28op
1
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
-------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
Select one from the list if the input to J1-47 is OPEN/GRND or

0V/28 Vdc.
NOTE: As a future growth option on a different FMS hardware

variation, CMC will offer an open/28 Volts discrete input type
of signal. In order to accommodate older aircrafts, the plan
is to reserve Discrete input #1 to #4 for this type of discrete
inputs signal.
34-61-14
Page 958
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
2
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
--------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
3
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
--------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR

0V/28 Vdc.
NOTE:
As a future growth option on a different FMS hardware

variation, CMC will offer an open/28 Volts discrete input
type of signal. In order to accommodate older aircrafts, the
plan is to reserve Discrete input #1 to #4 for this type of
discrete inputs signal.

0V/28 Vdc.
NOTE: As a future growth option on a different FMS hardware

variation, CMC will offer an open/28 Volts discrete input type
of signal. In order to accommodate older aircrafts, the plan
is to reserve Discrete input #1 to #4 for this type of discrete
inputs signal.
34-61-14
Page 959
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
4
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
--------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
5
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR

0V/28 Vdc.
NOTE:
As a future growth option on a different FMS hardware

variation, CMC will offer an open/28 Volts discrete input
type of signal. In order to accommodate older aircrafts, the
plan is to reserve Discrete input #1 to #4 for this type of
discrete inputs signal.

0V/28 Vdc.
34-61-14
Page 960
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISC I/O LIST 2/4

SINK DOP
6
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
---------SINK DOP
7
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
----------
from J1-88.
from J1-89.
34-61-14
Page 961
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

SINK DOP
8
MSG
OFFSET
SYS_VALID
TRUE_ANG
VNAV_VALID
AMU_CTRL
WPT
MCAUTION
pATC
xATC
APPR_ARMED
APPR_CAP
GPS_INT
HDG_VALID
LEGCHG
LNAV_VALID
---------DIP 0V/28op
6
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
from J1-90.

0V/28 Vdc.
34-61-14
Page 962
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
7
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
8
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR

0V/28 Vdc.

0V/28 Vdc.
34-61-14
Page 963
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
9
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
10
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR

0V/28 Vdc.

0V/28 Vdc.
34-61-14
Page 964
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISC I/O LIST 3/4

DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
11
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
12
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR

0V/28 Vdc.

0V/28 Vdc.
34-61-14
Page 965
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
13
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
14
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR

0V/28 Vdc.

0V/28 Vdc.
34-61-14
Page 966
May 10, 2007

REMARKS

DIP 0V/28op
15
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR

0V/28 Vdc.
34-61-14
Page 967
May 10, 2007

REMARKS
DISC I/O LIST 4/4

DIP 0V/28op
16
LNAV_ON
OLEO_AIR
SEL_CAPHSI
SEL_FO_HSI
TOGA_ON
LAMP_TEST
NAV_COM_CP
ADF_ATC_CP
NVG_MODE
NIGHT_MODE
EMERGENCY
SDI_1
SDI_2
CFG_SEL_1
CFG_SEL_2
ZEROIZE_1
ZEROIZE_2
---------MC_FAILED
APPR_ARMED
TRUE_MAG
CENT_CLEAR
RESET/LOAD CONFIG TO 1/1

CONFIG_0 to CONFIG_3

0V/28 Vdc.
FOR ENGINEERING USE ONLY

Recalls pre-stored CONFIG_0 to CONFIG_3.
MINIMUM
Sets config to minimum, used with ATP procedures.
STANDARD
Sets config to standard, used on Eurocopter EC135.
VTP
Baseline configuration used during system validation tests.
AUTOVTP
Baseline configuration used to automate system validation tests.
ATP
Baseline configuration used during Acceptance Test Procedure.

NOTE:
The CMA-9000 has the capability to maintain in nonvolatile memory four (4) different configurations. These
configurations are indepedant of each other and the items
can be defined with any valid parameters requested by the
user airlines. The configurations are named CONFIG_0,
CONFIG_1, CONFIG_2 and CONFIG_3.
34-61-14
Page 968
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 1/2

TYPE
FIX/ROTOR
SPEED
FAST/SLOW/AEROBATIC
POF LIMIT
ENRT/TERM/APPR
NAVIGATION
MILITARY/CIVIL
APPROACH
MANUAL/AUTO
DR DEGR
0 TO 50 NM/H (KTS)
FLIGHT LOG
STANDARD/WOW_ONLY
ERR LIMITS
POF/RNP
ANP/HIL
ENTER NO. BETWEEN 0.050 & 1.00
HSI SCALE
1_NM / 5_NM
AIRCRAFT CONFIG 2/2
TAS SOURCE
DBASE ID
SENSOR/MANUAL
NAV DATABASE IDENTIFIER ENTER
NO. BETWEEN 0 & 25000
USE DIGITAL HDG
YES/IF_LNAV_ON
MAN UPD ACCUR
0.15 to 9.99 nm
COLD START
7_SEC/90_SEC
STEERING CONFIG 1/1

STEERING TYPE
RATE 1
DIGITAL_ROLL/ANALOG_ROLL/
TKE_XTK
YES/NO
ROLL RATE
ROLL LIMIT
BUFF PROTECT
BUFF LIMIT
INTC
NOT ON INTC
DIRECT TO
2.5/SEC TO 4.0/SEC
10 TO 30 DEG.
NO/ALT_1/TAS_1
10 TO 30 DEG.
LEVEL/TRK/HDG
PULSE_STEER/INVALID STEER
MOVING_DTK/STANDARD
DISPLAY CONFIG 1/4

DATE
MMMDDYY/DDMMMYY
DISPLAY REF
TRUE/MAG
WIND REF
TRUE/MAG
MOV WPT
YES/NO
Figure 902 Configuration Selections (Sheet 1 of 18)
34-61-14
Page 969
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2

LAT_LONG ID
5_CHAR/7_CHAR
OFFSET
YES/NO
SEARCH
YES/NO
LOG MSG
YES/NO
ALERT MSG
NORMAL/RECALL-PG
DISPLAY CONFIG 2/4

DESELECT PG
YES/NO
FUEL PG
FUEL/FUEL+WEIGHTS/NO
FLIGHT LOG PG
YES/NO
PLAN PG
YES/NO
PROGRESS
4_PG_SET/3_PG_SET
PREDEF PG
YES/NO
DISP TYPE
DEFAULT/ENGINEERING
CO ROUTES
ALL/ORIG_DEST
HOVER
YES/NO
RTE2
YES/NO
DISPLAY CONFIG 3/4

PWR UP PAGE
IDENT/RADIO/AUTO_TEST
WHITE TRANS
YES/NO
ERASE MODS
DEFAULT/CONFIRM
SIMUL PG
YES/NO
DMAP APP DEF
ON/OFF
TIMER PG
YES/NO
QNH REF
YES/NO
BACKTRACK
YES/NO
QNH FILTER
1 TO 500 sec
DISPLAY CONFIG 4/4

CFG KEY 1
NONE/FUEL/MARK/VNAV/
SQK_IDT/RADIO/HOLD/FIX/MSG/
ATC
CFG KEY 2
ATC
34-61-14
Page 970
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2

CFG KEY 3
ATC
CFG KEY 4
ATC
CFG KEY 5
ATC
NEXT KEYS
YES/NO
COLOR CONFIG1/1
PRESET TYPE
STANDARD/CUSTOM
ACT WPT
STANDARD= LG_BLK_MGT/
LEGS WPT
STANDARD= LG_GRN_BLK/
UNITS
STANDARD= XS_WHT_BLK/
PAGE TTL
STANDARD= LG_CYN_BLK/
PAGE PMT
STANDARD= LG_CYN_BLK/
FIX CAPTION
STANDARD SM_GRN_BLK/
TUNING PROG
STANDARD= SM_BLK_WHT/
ENTERED DATA
STANDARD= LG_WHT_BLK/
COMPUTED DATA
STANDARD= SM_WHT_BLK/
NOTE: Where SIZE_FG_BG =XS_WHT_BLK/XS_GRN_BLK/
XS_CYN_BLK/XS_MGT_BLK/SM_WHT_BLK/
SM_GRN_BLK/SM_CYN_BLK/SM_MGT_BLK/
LG_WHT_BLK/LG_GRN_BLK/LG_CYN_BLK/
LG_MGT_BLK/SM_BLK_WHT/SM_BLK_GRN/
SM_BLK_CYN/SM_BLK_MGT/LG_BLK_WHT/
LG_BLK_GRN/LG_BLK_CYN/LG_BLK_MGT
34-61-14
Page 971
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
DATUM CONFIG1/X
SUBSET
ARC 1950, ARC 1960, AUSSIE 66,
AUSSIE 84, BOGOTA, CAMPO, CAPE, CARTHAGE, CHATHAM
71, CHUA ASTRO, CORREGO, WEUROPE, CYPRUS, EGYPT,
IRAN, SICILY, EUROPE1979, GANDAJIKA, GEODETIC49,
HJORSEY 55, THAI/VIETN, BANG/IN/NP, IRELND1965,
KERTAU1948, LIBRIA1964, LUZON, MASSAWA, MERCHICH,
MINNA, NAHRWAN, N.A CONUS, N.A ALASKA, N.A CANADA,
N.A MEXICO, NAMERICA83, OLD EGYPT, OLD HAWAI, OMAN,
BRITAIN 36, PITCAIRN67, QUATARNATL, QORNOQ,
SCHWARZECK, SAMERICA69, TIMBALAI 8, TOKYO, ZANDERIJ,
WGS72, WGS84, CH1903, USER-DEF
SELECT
8 datum may be selected from

page 1 to 11.
USER DATUM CONFIG1/X ENTERED TO WGS84

X-AXIS OFFSET
Range within +/-999 meters
Y-AXIS OFFSET
Z-AXIS OFFSET
SEMIMAJOR AXIS SHIFT
Range within +/-999.999 meters
FLATTENING SHIFT
Range within +/-9.99999999
HOVER CONFIG 1/1

DECELERATION
0 TO 5,knots/second
G-LIMIT
0 TO 1
DESIRED GS
30 TO 100,knots
DESIRED VS
100 TO 1000,ft/min
SAFETY FACTOR (DIST.)
0 TO 100%
TDN RESTRICTIONS
NO/YES
RADIO CONFIG Y/X

EQP
1L
2L
3L
4L
5L
6L
1R
34-61-14
Page 972
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
RADIO CONFIG Y/X (cont'd)

2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
NOTE: Any of the radios defined in A429 EQP RADIO X/2 or
RS422 EQP LIST 1/1 or RADIO EQP LIST X/2 can be
configured at any position defined on this page.
ACT NAME
ATC/TPDR/XPDR
VUHF NAME
VUHF/COM1/COM3
NAV NAME
NAV/VOR/VIR
COM NAME
COM1/COM3/VHF
DIMMING CONFIG 1/1
TABLE CRC
NONE/nnnnnnnnH
DIM MODE
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
NVG THOLD
n.nnnV
DIM CURVE
DEFAULT/CUSTOM
MENU
ENABLE/DISABLE
FAIL
ENABLE/DISABLE
MSG
ENABLE/DISABLE
ANNUN #1
ENABLE/DISABLE
ANNUN #2
ENABLE/DISABLE
ANNUN #3
ENABLE/DISABLE
ANNUN #4
ENABLE/DISABLE
ANNUN #5
ENABLE/DISABLE
EXEC
ENABLE/DISABLE
VNAV CONFIG 1/1
APPR
YES/NO
AUTO APPR
YES/NO
GS FLAG ENRT
OUT_OF_VIEW/IN_VIEW
TEMP ENTRY
ALERT /NO_ALERT/MANDATORY
A429 SENSOR EQP 1/3
INSTALL
ADC
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1/DUAL
FORMAT
A429/A575
INSTALL
AHRS .
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1/
DUAL/TRIPLE
34-61-14
Page 973
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
A429 SENSOR EQP 1/3 (cont'd)

TAIL_CORR
YES/NO
INSTALL
APIRS.
NO/SINGLE
TYPE
SFIM_F201
INSTALL
DVS .
NO/SINGLE
TYPE
RDN85/ANV353
SURF CFG
AUTO/MANUAL
A429 SENSOR EQP 2/3
INSTALL
TYPE
INSTALL
EGI
NO/SINGLE
LN_100GT/SIGMA50H
NO/SINGLE
GPS
TYPE
INSTALL
A743_A/A743/TA12/A743A_4
IRS
NO/SINGLE/DUAL/ TRIPLE
IRS CDU
NO/SINGLE
TYPE
LTN_92/LTN_101/ADIRU/
LASEREF_V
NO/SINGLE/DUAL
INSTALL
RALT
A429 SENSOR EQP 3/3

INSTALL
TACAN .
NO/SINGLE
TYPE
INSTALL
ACARS
NO
INSTALL
ACMS .
NO/SINGLE
INSTALL
AFCS .
NO/SINGLE
TKE XTK
INSTALL
NC_12B
YES/NO
CHK .
NO/SINGLE

INSTALL
CONC
INSTALL
DLU
NO/SINGLE/DUAL
SINGLE
IN PORT
INSTALL
IP1 THRU IP20

ELT .
NO/SINGLE

INSTALL
FC .
NO/SINGLE/DUAL
UNIT
KG/LB
1st LABEL
FQTY
FFLOW
000 TO 377
000 TO 377
34-61-14
Page 974
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
A429 GENERAL EQP 3/6 (cont'd)

2nd LABEL
FQTY
FFLOW
000 TO 377
000 TO 377
MSB
FQTY
FFLOW
000 TO 524288
0 TO 65537
SDI
FQTY
FFLOW
ON/OFF
ON/OFF

INSTALL
PLS
NO/YES
TYPE
AN_ARS6/CUBIC_V12
INSTALL
NO/SINGLE
REC

INSTALL
REPE .
NO/SINGLE
IN EQP
----
(select from equipment list)
INSTALL
xFMU .
NO/SINGLE/DUAL
X-SYNC
AUTO/ALWAYS/NO/MANUAL
pCONCCONFIG 1/2
POSITION 1
LEFT
POSITION 1
RIGHT
POSITION 2
LEFT
POSITION 2
RIGHT
POSITION 3
LEFT
POSITION 3
RIGHT
POSITION 4
LEFT
POSITION 4
RIGHT
POSITION 5
LEFT
POSITION 5
RIGHT
NOTE: Any of the radios defined in A429 EQP X/X can be
xCONC CONFIG 2/2
POSITION 1
POSITION 1
POSITION 2
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
34-61-14
Page 975
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
xCONC CONFIG 2/2 (cont'd)

POSITION 2
RIGHT
POSITION 3
LEFT
POSITION 3
RIGHT
POSITION 4
LEFT
POSITION 4
RIGHT
POSITION 5
LEFT
POSITION 5
RIGHT
NOTE: Any of the radios defined in A429 EQP X/X can be
A429 RADIO EQP 1/2
INSTALL
ADF .
INSTALL
ATC .
INSTALL
COM .
INSTALL
DME .
INSTALL
NAV .
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1
/SINGLE_2/DUAL
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1/
SINGLE_2/DUAL
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1/
SINGLE_2/DUAL
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1/
SINGLE_2/DUAL
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1/
SINGLE_2/DUAL
A429 RADIO EQP 2/2

INSTALL
VUHF .
INSTALL
NO/SINGLE/SINGLE_1/
SINGLE_2/DUAL
NO/SINGLE
AMU .

ADF-TYPE
pADF BURST
pADF TEST
xADF BURST
xADF TEST
ATC TYPE
pATC BURST
pATC TEST
xATC BURST
xATC TEST
DEF VFR CODE
BK_DF431B/C_ADF462
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
BK_MST_67A/TDR_94D_005
NO/YES
YES/NO
NO/YES
YES/NO
0000 to 7777
34-61-14
Page 976
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2

EMERGENCY CODE
0000 to 7777
COM TYPE
BK_VC_401B
pCOM BURST
YES/NO
pCOM TEST
YES/NO
xCOM BURST
YES/NO
xCOM TEST
FREQ MAX
YES/NO
135_975MHZ/151_975MHZ/
136_975MHZ/136_990MHZ/
151_990MHZ
8-33KHZ/25KHZ/25_8_33KHZ
FREQ STEP
DME TYPE
pDME BURST
BK_DM_441B/C_DME_442/
C_DME_4000
YES/NO
pDME TEST
YES/NO
pDME CHAN1
OFF/pNAV/xNAV
pDME CHAN2
OFF/pNAV/xNAV
xDME BURST
YES/NO
xDME TEST
YES/NO
xDME CHAN1
OFF/pNAV/xNAV
xDME CHAN2
OFF/pNAV/xNAV
DME MODE
SCANNING CHANNEL
MANUAL/SCANNING/BOTH
1st /2nd /3rd /4th /5th/FREE/STBY
SCANNING SDI
ALL_CALL/SIDE_
DEPENDENT/ONSIDE_ONLY
TUNING WAIT DELAY
SEC3_3/SEC2_5
TUNING ATTEMPTS
ONCE/TWICE/THRICE
NAV TYPE
BK_VN_411B/C_VIR_432/
C_VOR_4500
34-61-14
Page 977
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2

FORMAT
A429/A579
pNAV BURST
NO/YES
pNAV TEST
NO/YES
xNAV BURST
NO/YES
xNAV TEST
NO/YES
VOR AUTOTUNING
NO/YES
NAV FUNCTION
MANUAL/NAVIGATOR/BOTH
IN REF
OMNI/RADIAL
VUHF TYPE
E_SRT651
X-TUNING
NO/VUHF1/VUHF2
pVUHF BURST
NO/YES
pVUHF TEST
NO/YES
pVUHF FREQ STEP
8-33KHZ/25KHZ/25_8_33KHZ
pVUHF UHF2 BD
NO/YES
xVUHF BURST
NO/YES
xVUHF TEST
NO/YES
xVUHF FREQ STEP
8-33KHZ/25KHZ/25_8_33KHZ
xVUHF UHF2 BD
NO/YES

pVUHF MARITIME BD
DISABLE/ENABLE
pVUHF FUNCTIONS
TR_GU_GV/TR_G_GD_243
pVUHF POWER CTRL
ENABLE/FULL/MEDIUM/LOW
pVUHF PTT CTRL
DISABLE/ENABLE
xVUHF MARITIME BD
DISABLE/ENABLE
xVUHF FUNCTIONS
TR_GU_GV/TR_G_GD_243
xVUHF POWER CTRL
ENABLE/FULL/MEDIUM/LOW
xVUHF PTT CTRL
DISABLE/ENABLE
34-61-14
Page 978
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2

INSTALL
EFIS
NO/GAMA/SEXTANT/SPERRY/
SPERRY2/ROCKWELL/
ROCKWELL2/FDS/
AHCAS/AHCAS2/BARCO/
MEGGIT
STEP
OFF/ON
UPDATE
CONTINUOUS/FIX
BG TYPE
ALL/NDB_APT/VHF_APT/APT
VHF_NDB/NDB/VHF/NONE/
CUSTOM
INSTALL
EHSI .
NO/SINGLE/DUAL
OUTPUT
SINGLE/DOUBLE
TYPE
SMITHS_5AT1/ASTRONAUTICS

INSTALL
DMAP
TYPE
NO/SINGLE
DKG4/ELBIT/EURONAV
INSTALL
WXR .
NO/SINGLE
INSTALL
CDU
NONE/SINGLE/DUAL/TRIPLE
A429 I/P LIST 1/5

SPEED
EQP
1 .
----
SPEED
EQP
2 .
----
SPEED
EQP
3 .
----
SPEED
EQP
4 .
----
SPEED
EQP
5 .
----
LOW/HIGH
LOW/HIGH
LOW/HIGH
LOW/HIGH
LOW/HIGH
A429 I/P LIST 2/5

SPEED
LOW/HIGH
34-61-14
Page 979
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2

EQP
----
SPEED
EQP
7
----
SPEED
EQP
8
----
SPEED

LOW/HIGH
HIGH/LOW
HIGH/LOW
EQP
----
SPEED
10 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
A429 I/P LIST 3/5

SPEED
11 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
12 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
13 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
14 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
15 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
A429 I/P LIST 4/5

SPEED
16 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
17 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----

34-61-14
Page 980
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2

SPEED
18 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
19 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
20 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
A429 I/P LIST 5/5

SPEED
21 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
22 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
23 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
SPEED
24 .
LOW/HIGH
EQP
----
A429 O/P LIST 1/8

SPEED
1 .
LOW/ HIGH
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----
EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----

34-61-14
Page 981
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
A429 O/P LIST 2/8

SPEED
HIGH/LOW
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----
EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----
A429 O/P LIST 3/8

SPEED
HIGH/LOW
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----
EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----
A429 O/P LIST 4/8

SPEED
HIGH/LOW
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----

34-61-14
Page 982
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
A429 O/P LIST 4/8 (cont'd)

EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----
A429 O/P LIST 5/8

SPEED
HIGH/LOW
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----
EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----
A429 O/P LIST 6/8

SPEED
HIGH/LOW
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----
EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----

34-61-14
Page 983
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
A429 O/P LIST 7/8

SPEED
HIGH/LOW
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----
EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----
A429 O/P LIST 8/8

SPEED
HIGH/LOW
EQP1
----
EQP2
----
EQP3
----
EQP4
----
EQP5
----
EQP6
----
EQP7
----
EQP8
----
EQP9
----
RS422 EQP LIST 1/1

INSTALL
DLU .
SINGLE/NO
RS422 PORT LIST 1/1

INSTALL
1 .
MODE
INSTALL
NONE/DLU/MAINT
RS232/RS422
2 .
NONE/DLU
34-61-14
Page 984
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
RS422 PORT LIST 1/1 (cont'd)

INSTALL
3 .
NONE/DLU
INSTALL
4 .
NONE/DLU
DISCRETE CONFIG 1/3

INSTALL
LNAV
YES/NONE
LOGIC
NORMAL/INVERSE
LOGIC
OLEO
NORMAL/INVERSE
LOGIC
TOGA
NORMAL/INVERSE
INSTALL
TRUE/MAG
YES/NONE
LOGIC
NORMAL/INVERSE
LOGIC
EMERGENCY NORMAL/INVERSE
DISCRETE CONFIG 2/3

INSTALL
CENT CLR
LOGIC
INSTALL
YES/NONE
NORMAL/INVERSE
M_APPR
STATE
YES/NONE
ARM/NOT_ARM
STATE
R_DEMO
YES/NO/EXTERN
STATE
SDI .
UNIT_1/UNIT_2/UNIT_3/
EXTERN
STATE
RESET
YES/NO
DISCRETE CONFIG 3/3

MASTER CAUTION = .
SYS_INVALID/GPS_INT/
KALMAN_INT
DISC I/O LIST 1/4

DIP 0V/28op
(select from discrete list)
DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
SINK DOP

34-61-14
Page 985
May 10, 2007

CONFIGURATION CHART
PARAMETER
SELECTED PARAMETER
SYSTEM 1
SYSTEM 2
DISC I/O LIST 1/4 (cont'd)

SINK DOP
22
SINK DOP
SINK DOP
SINK DOP
DISC I/O LIST 2/4

DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
DIP 0V/28op
10
SINK DOP
SINK DOP
SINK DOP
DISC I/O LIST 3/4

DIP 0V/28op
11
DIP 0V/28op
12
DIP 0V/28op
13
DIP 0V/28op
14
DIP 0V/28op
15
DISC I/O LIST 4/4

DIP 0V/28op
16
RESET/LOAD CONFIG TO 1/1

MINIMUM/STANDARD/VTP/AUTOVTP/ATP/
CONFIG_0/CONFIG_1/ CONFIG_2/ CONFIG_3
CONFIGURATION NUMBER ON IDENT 1/2 PAGE
When the Configuration settings have been completed record the
configuration number indicated on the IDENT 1/2 page in this
block CFG NO: _ _ _ _ _
34-61-14
Page 986
May 10, 2007

SECTION XI
DATA LOADER UNIT (DLU)
1.
GENERAL
This section provides information for the loading of the following databases into the FMS using a data
loader unit (DLU):
Navigation database (example: Jeppesen)

Custom database (company routes and waypoints)
User database (user routes and waypoints)
Radio tuning database (Radio Tuning libraries and GSM library (Phone Book)
Magnetic variation model database (coefficients)
FMS configuration file
This section also provides information on saving configuration data or user database from the FMS to
DLU that support this capability.
2.
DATA LOADER DESCRIPTION

The CMA-9000 can be interfaced to an ARINC 615 or to an RS422 DLU.
ATTENTION:
A.
Another equipment can be configured on the same FMS input port used by the Data
Loader Unit. When the Data Loader Unit is connected, the other equipment MUST be
powered down.
ARINC 615 Data Loader Unit (DLU)

(1)
Demo Systems Data Loader
NOTE: Data Loaders use 28 Vdc input only.

The Portable Data Loader Units (PLU) that are used to transfer waypoint data from a
micro-floppy disc to the FMS library are designed to interface with aircraft systems computers
through one or more high or low speed ARINC 429 data busses.
34-61-14
Page 1001
May 10, 2007

One of the recommended Portable Data Loader is:

Demo Systems Inc. Part No. 30100, Software Version 4.5.
The above system meets RTCA DO-160B. The Demo System Portable Data Loader has
various software packages available. Please contact Demo Systems direct to ensure the
software is compatible with the CMA-9000.
DEMO SYSTEMS DIVISION
379 SCIENCE DRIVE
MOORPARK, CA 93021-1792
The PDL has circuit protection in the event that voltage is present on power or signal lines,
however, verify that the power to the aircraft connector is removed.
At turn-on, the display will remain blank for 7 seconds, while the data loader performs
initialization tests. The display will then read "TESTING, Please Wait" for 2 seconds.
After completing all tests at turn-on, the data loader may display "HEATING PLEASE WAIT".
This will occur only if the temperature is less than 0 degrees Celsius, the PDL in heating
mode may also be indicated by a blinking "READY" LED. This heating period could last up to
2 minutes.
The PDL will look for a data disk and if not found will display "DISK NOT INSERTED". If a
data disk is found the PDL will display "REINSERT DISK".
The data loader will automatically search for a configuration file and data file to upload. If
there is more than one file to be loaded, the loader will automatically sequence to the next
file. If the file is continued on a second disk, the PDL will display the message "INSERT DISK
# X" where X is the number of the disk in the sequence. If the wrong disk is inserted, the PDL
will continue to display the message "INSERT DISK # X" until the correct disk is inserted.
(2)
Other ARINC 615 DLUs

Qualair Equipment and Engineering; ARINC 615-3 Portable Data Loader Part No. 11615-01
or ARINC 615-3 Portable Data Loader with internal Mass Storage Device (MSD) Part No.
11615-20.
Please contact Qualair Equipment and Engineering direct to ensure the software is
compatible with the CMA-9000.
QUALAIR EQUIPMENT AND ENGINEERING
2100 196TH ST. SW
SUITE 125
LYNNWOOD, WA 98036
34-61-14
Page 1002
May 10, 2007

B.
Loading a database or FMS configuration with an ARINC 615 DLU

(1)
Connect Data Loader to the aircraft DLU connector.
(2)
Apply power to aircraft, DLU and FMS (if another equipment connected on same FMS input
port, pull other equipment Circuit Breaker).
(3)
Switch DLU to ON.
(4)
To access DATA LOAD 1/1 page on the FMS, press [INIT REF], [NEXT], <DATA LOAD>.
NOTE:
(5)
If the disk is inserted prior to initiating the transfer of data there will be no delay in the
start. If the <START> is pressed with no disk in the DLU, there is a maximum of one
minute allowed for the insertion of the disk or the operation will be terminated.
Press <TYPE> to select either NAV DATA, CONFIG, MAGVAR_MODEL, USER_DATA,

CUSTOM_DATA, RADIO_DATA, OEI_MODEL. To be able to load files from the DLU to the
FMS, the following file extension must appear on the disk as follows:
DATA TYPE
USER_DATA
NAV_DATA
CUSTOM_DATA
RADIO_DATA
CONFIG_0
CONFIG_1
CONFIG_2
CONFIG_3
MAGVAR_MODEL
OEI_MODEL
PRESCAN_MSG
DIMMING_TBL
NOTE:
(6)
DESCRIPTION
User database
Navigation database
Custom database
Radio Tuning libraries and GSM
library
FILE EXTENSION
*.UDB
*.NDB
*.RTE
*.RAD
Magnetic variation model

database
Prescan messaes
Display Dimming Curve
*.CFG
*.MVA
*.OEI
*.MSG
*.DIM
The transfer of data can only be accomplished if the aircraft is on the ground.
Press <START>. The screen will change as follows:
<START> disappears.
STATUS changes from IDLE to IN PROGRESS
34-61-14
Page 1003
May 10, 2007

(7)
The following messages available under STATUS are:

INSERT DISK: - no disk in DLU drive
IN PROGRESS: - data being transferred
COMPLETED: - the transfer of data completed successfully
FAILED: - data transfer not completed. Check indicators on front of DLU
NO DLU: - FMS does not recognize that the DLU is installed
(8)
The transfer of data may be stopped manually by pressing <ABORT>.
(9)
To load a second database, repeat the above procedures.
(10) Turn off DLU and disconnect from aircraft DLU connector (if another equipment was
connected on same FMS input port, place other equipment Circuit Breaker to power ON
position).
3.
RS422 DLU
The PDP/3-DOS DLU (CMC P/N 100-602443-000) is a loader using a RS 422 serial interface. Data is
stored on a removable PCMCIA card
The Data Loader Supplier is
TARGA ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS
18 AURIGA DRIVE
NEPEAN, ONTARIO
CANADA K2E 7T9
The configuration and user database in the FMS can be saved using this loader.
A.
Loading a database or FMS configuration with the RS 422 DLU

(1)
(2)
Insert in the DLU the PCMCIA card that contains the database.
(3)
Apply power to aircraft, DLU and FMS.
(4)
Switch DLU to ON.
(5)
NOTE:
If the PCMCIA card is inserted prior to initiating the transfer of data there will be no delay
in the start. If the <LOAD> is pressed with no disk in the DLU, there is a maximum of one
minute allowed for the insertion of the card or the operation will be terminated.
34-61-14
Page 1004
May 10, 2007

(6)
Press <TYPE> to select either NAV DATA, CONFIG, MAGVAR_MODEL, USER_DATA,

CUSTOM_DATA, or RADIO_DATA or OEI_MODEL. To be able to load file from the RS 422
DLU, the following extension filename must be used:
DATA TYPE
USER_DATA
NAV_DATA
CUSTOM_DATA
RADIO_DATA
CONFIG_0
CONFIG_1
CONFIG_2
CONFIG_3
MAGVAR_MODEL
OEI_MODEL
PRESCAN_MSG
DIMMING_TBL
NOTE:
(7)
FILE EXTENSION
*.UDB
*.NDB
*.RTE
*.RAD
Magnetic variation model

database
Prescan messaes
Display Dimming Curve
*.CFG
*.MVA
*.OEI
*.MSG
*.DIM
Press <LOAD>. The screen will change as follows:
(8)
DESCRIPTION
User database
Navigation database
Custom database
Radio Tuning libraries and GSM
library
<LOAD> disappears
percent loaded and number of kilibytes transferred are displayed at LSK 2R

INSERT DISK: - no PCMCIA card in DLU drive
(9)
(10) To load a second database, repeat the above procedures.
34-61-14
Page 1005
May 10, 2007

(11) Turn off DLU and disconnect from aircraft DLU connector.
DATA LOAD
1/1
TYPE
1L
2L
>USER_DATA
STATUS
IDLE
1R
0000K B
2R
3L
3R
LOAD>
4L
5L
6L
B.
4R
5R
<INIT/REF
SAVE>
6R
Saving the User database or the FMS configuration into the RS422 DLU
(1)
(2)
Insert in the DLU a PCMCIA card.
(3)
Apply power to the aircraft DLU and FMS (if another equipment is connected on the same
FMS input port, pull the other equipment Circuit Breaker).
(4)
Switch DLU to ON.
(5)
NOTE:
If the PCMCIA card is inserted prior to initiating the transfer of data there will be no delay
in the start. If the <LOAD> is pressed with no disk in the DLU, there is a maximum of one
minute allowed for the insertion of the card or the operation will be terminated.
(6)
Press <TYPE> to select either CONFIG or USER_DATA.
(7)
To start data download (FMS to DLU) when aircraft is on the ground press <SAVE>.
NOTE:
<SAVE> disappears
34-61-14
Page 1006
May 10, 2007

(8)

INSERT DISK: - no PCMCIA card in DLU drive
(9)
(10) Turn off DLU and disconnect from aircraft DLU connector.
(11) Retrieve the PCMCIA card with the saved data
34-61-14
Page 1007
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page 1008
May 10, 2007

APPENDIX A
GROUND FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES

FOR
CMC ELECTRONICS INC.
S/W 169-614876-010
COMPANY'S NAME:
AIRCRAFT MODEL:
AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION:
AIRCRAFT SERIAL No.:
FLIGHT FUNCTIONAL TEST
PERFORMED BY:
DATE:
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
WITNESSED BY:
DATE:
SECTION I
34-61-14
Page T-A1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page T-A2
May 10, 2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
GROUND FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 1

1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................................... 1
SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................ 1
POST INSTALLATION VISUAL INSPECTION ................................................................................... 1
AIRCRAFT LOCATION AND POWER REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 1
FMS GROUND TEST PROCEDURE.................................................................................................. 2
CROSS-TALK VERIFICATION (IF MULTIPLE FMS ARE INSTALLED AND CONFIGURED) ........................... 4
EFIS VERIFICATION (IF CONFIGURED) ................................................................................................ 4
SET UP VERIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 4
HEADING INPUT VERIFICATION TEST ............................................................................................ 5
TRUE AIRSPEED VERIFICATION TEST ....................................................................................... 6
GPS SENSOR TEST ....................................................................................................................... 6
DME NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST............................................................................................... 9
VOR/DME OR VOR/DME/TCN NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST................................................... 10
RADIO NAVIGATION TUNING TEST ........................................................................................... 11
ADF RECEIVER TUNING TEST ................................................................................................... 12
TRANSPONDER TUNING TEST .................................................................................................. 13
RADIO COMMUNICATION TUNING TEST .................................................................................. 14
ANNUNCIATORS TEST ................................................................................................................ 15
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) GROUND TEST PLAN ..................................... 18
GROUND FUNCTIONAL TEST REPORT ...................................................................................................... 19

3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
POST INSTALLATION VISUAL INSPECTION ................................................................................. 20

AIRCRAFT LOCATION AND POWER REQUIREMENTS................................................................ 20
FMS GROUND TEST PROCEDURE................................................................................................ 20
CROSS-TALK VERIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 20
EFIS VERIFICATION ........................................................................................................................ 20
SETUP VERIFICATION .................................................................................................................... 20
HEADING INPUT VERIFICATION TEST .......................................................................................... 21
TRUE AIRSPEED VERIFICATION TEST ..................................................................................... 21
GPS TEST ..................................................................................................................................... 21
DME NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST............................................................................................. 22
VOR/DME NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST.................................................................................... 22
RADIO NAVIGATION TUNING TEST ........................................................................................... 23
ADF RECEIVER TUNING TEST ................................................................................................... 23
TRANSPONDER TUNING TEST .................................................................................................. 23
RADIO COMMUNICATION TUNING TEST .................................................................................. 23
ANNUNCIATORS TEST ................................................................................................................ 24
34-61-14
Page TC-A1
May 10, 2007

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Page
Figure A-1.1 Typical Map Mode Display .......................................................................................................... 17
Figure A-1.2 Typical ARC Mode Display ......................................................................................................... 17
34-61-14
Page TC-A2
May 10, 2007

1.0
PURPOSE
1.1
The purpose of this appendix is to provide a ground test procedure to evaluate:

a.
all operating modes of the Flight Management System (FMS);
b.
the functions of other equipment connected to the FMS;
c.
various failure modes and associated annunciators;
d.
displayed FMS navigation parameters of the connected flight deck instruments; and
e.
conduct an EMI/RFI test of the installed equipment and interface cabling.
1.2
This appendix contains two sections: Section I GROUND FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
and Section II GROUND FUNCTIONAL TEST REPORT within which all conditions and results
will be recorded.
2.0
SCOPE
2.1
This appendix presents the test requirements, conditions and procedures to be followed during
the performance of the ground test on the CMA-9000 FMS(s) installed in the aircraft.
3.0
POST INSTALLATION VISUAL INSPECTION
3.1
ANTENNA ELECTRONIC UNIT (AEU)

Verify that the GPS AEU is securely fastened to the top fuselage of the aircraft.
3.2
GPS SENSOR
Check that GPS sensor is firmly fitted into its mounting bracket and that the antenna cable is
connected.
3.3
FMS (Flight Management System)

Check that each installed FMS is securely fastened with four (4) DZUS fasteners in the forward
pedestal. Ensure that the FMS cable is securely attached to J1 on the rear of the FMS.
4.0
AIRCRAFT LOCATION AND POWER REQUIREMENTS
4.1
The aircraft should be located in an area where the GPU or APU and later the engines may be
run to supply power to the aircraft's avionic and hydraulic systems. To verify and record the
sensor tests it is necessary to position the aircraft in an area clear of surrounding obstructions
and electromagnetic interference. Refer to the Operators Guide for the proper procedures to
access the pages required for many of the following tests.
4.2
Apply GPU or APU power to the aircraft and ensure all avionics, electrical and hydraulics are on
and functioning.
34-61-14
Page A-1
May 10, 2007

5.0
FMS GROUND TEST PROCEDURE

NOTE:
Omit any tests pertaining to equipment not installed or connected to the FMS.
5.1
Power On
5.2
Verify that all relevant circuit breakers to the FMS and associated systems are on.
5.3
Initialization Test
5.4
If the FMS is configured as a Radio Control Unit (ADF, ATC, COM configured), the RADIO 1/4
page appears. Otherwise the FMSx IDENT 1/2 page appears as illustrated in 5.5.
RADIO
1/4
04
5.5
1L
<VHF1
2L
<VHF2
3L
<NAV1
4L
<NAV2
5L
<ATC1
6L
<VOL
05
125.150
--151.000 1 2 4 . 6 5 0
YJN A
---115.80 1 1 6 . 7 0
YUL
109.30H
YQB
116.30 1 1 2 . 8 0
SBY
2200
1500
CTL C1 C2 IC N1 N2
FMS
7 6 4 3 3
118.400
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
The FMS IDENT 1/2 page appears (below refer to appropriate S/W).
This page can also be accessed by pressing [INIT REF] followed by <IDENT>.
FMS1 IDENT
1/2
5L
NAV DATABASE
ACTIVE
K L M W W 0 6 9 7 OCT10-NOV06/03
SECOND
OP PROGRAM
CFG NO
614876-XXX XX
23253
CUSTOM DATABASE
DATE
EC-RTEST
MAR21/04
USER DATABASE
DATE
EC-UDTEST
MAR21/04
6L
<SETUP
1L
2L
3L
4L
POS INIT>
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
34-61-14
Page A-2
May 10, 2007

5.6
Verify the software and configuration identification numbers are as specified in the Aircraft Flight
Manual Supplement. NAV database should indicate current cycle. Record identification
numbers.
5.7
Press <POS INIT>. The POS INIT/REF 1/2 page appears.
POS INIT/REF
1/2
FMS POS DR
N47o26.28 W122o18.67
1L
2L
3L
4L
REF WAYPOINT
KBFI N 4 7 o3 1 . 8 0 W 1 2 2 o1 8 . 0 0
INS MODE
SET ALT
STANDBY
-----F T
ALIGN
SET INS POS
>GND
UTC
5L
1757:04z
6L
<SETUP
1R
2R
3R
4R
DATE
OCT20/04
5R
START ALIGN>
6R
Verify and record Present Position, UTC and DATE.

NOTE: A prerequisite to the following test is a Navigational Database, Company Route
Database, or a manually entered route must have been loaded into the FMS.
5.8
Display the RTE X 1/1 Page by Pressing RTE.

This is also accessible from the
POS INIT/REF 2/2 page by selecting the ROUTE prompt (LSK 6R).
5.9
Key in the company route identifier into the scratchpad and move the company route name to
the CO ROUTE field by pressing LSK 3R.
OR
Select a company route from the List of CO ROUTES by pressing CO ROUTES (LSK 4R),
select the route identifier by pressing the appropriate LSK.
OR
Build a ROUTE by following the procedure BUILDING A ROUTE via WAYPOINT INSERTION in
Section 3 of the Operator's Manual.
5.10
Move the company route name to the CO ROUTE field by pressing LSK 3R.
5.11
Verify the ORIGIN and DEST identifiers.
5.12
Accept the active route by pressing EXEC.
34-61-14
Page A-3
May 10, 2007

6.0
CROSS-TALK VERIFICATION (if multiple FMS are installed and configured)
6.1
If the equipment configuration specifies a dual installation with synchronised cross-talk as AUTO
or ALWAYS, then verify the following:
- On FMS2 verify the CO Route entered in the above section is transferred to FMS2 from FMS1
after the EXE key was pressed.
7.0
EFIS VERIFICATION (if configured)
7.1
Connect the captain's and first officer's EFIS to the FMS.
7.2
Verify that the route selected is displayed properly on the EFIS.
8.0
SET UP VERIFICATION
8.1
Press [INIT REF] and <SETUP>. The FMS SETUP 1/1 page appears.
FMS1 SETUP
1/1
DISPLAY
1L
>MAG
TIME
2L
>UTC
COORD
3L
>LAT_LONG
OFFSET
+5.0H R S
1R
2R
DATUM
WGS84<
4L
3R
4R
FMS OPERATION
5L
<SYNCHRONIZED
6L
<POS INIT
5R
ROUTE>
6R
8.2
Verify the angular references are correct.
8.3
This completes the initialization sequence and from this point on the operator may access any of
the pages necessary for this test procedure. Ensure that there is a minimum of four waypoints in
the Active Route to enable the Analog and discrete output tests. If it is necessary to enter
Waypoints manually, refer to the appropriate Operators Guide.
34-61-14
Page A-4
May 10, 2007

9.0
HEADING INPUT VERIFICATION TEST
9.1
Press [PROG] and [PREV]. ACT PROGRESS 3/3 or 4/4 page appears.
ACT PROGRESS
HEADWIND
1L
2L
3L
027K T
4/4
CROSSWIND
R44K T
HDG/DA
o
o
2 9 0 /L 1 1
MAGVAR
o
E019.9
TAS
240K T
1R
2R
3R
4L
4R
ALT (GPS)
5L
6L
QNH SET
28.63
FT
5R
6R
9.2
Verify the Heading as displayed on the HDG/DA line and the HSI, EHSI or EFIS agree within
+/- 2 degrees.
9.3
Slew the compass system in 30 degree increments and verify the HDG/DA readout changes in
the same direction and remains within 2 degrees at each stop.
9.4
Fail the compass system and verify:

HEADING FAILED in the scratchpad.
MSG annunciator is illuminated.
HEADING FAILED displayed on the MESSAGE RECALL 1/2 page. This page may be displayed
by pressing [INIT REF] and <MSG RECALL>.
FMS1 MESSAGE RECALL 1/1

1L
2L
3L
*VUHF1 CONTROL LOST1

*TACAN NAV LOST
*MC FAILED
VUHF2 CONTROL LOST
INDEPENDENT OP
1
1
1
1
1R
2R
3R
4L
4R
5L
5R
6L
MAINT MSG>
6R
34-61-14
Page A-5
May 10, 2007

9.5
Reactivate the compass system and verify the heading failure messages disappear and the
MSG annunciator extinguishes.
9.6
Repeat above if dual or triple (future growth) system is installed.
10.0
TRUE AIRSPEED VERIFICATION TEST
10.1
Press [PROG] and [PREV].
10.2
Connect a Pitot/Static Test set to the aircraft. Input the following values of airspeed: 50, 100,
150, 200 knots.
10.3
Verify that the FMS TAS readout is within +/- 4 knots.
10.4
Fail the TAS system and verify the FMS:

TAS FAILED in the scratchpad.
MSG annunciator is illuminated.
TAS FAILED displayed MESSAGE RECALL 1/1 page.
10.5
Reactivate the TAS system and verify the failure indications disappear.
10.6
Repeat above test if dual system is installed.
11.0
GPS SENSOR TEST
11.1
Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <GPS>. GPS STATUS 1/2 page appears.
(If EGI is configured)
GPS STATUS
(If ARINC 743 GPS is configured)
1/2
5L
POSITION
N45o34.25 W073o38.0
MODE
HOR ACCURACY
0.45N M
3D
TK/GS
GPS ALT
o
+ 2438F T
072 /150K T
VER SPD
VER ACCURACY
220
FT/MIN
325F T
UTC
DATE
1506:24Z
JUL11/04
6L
<NAV STATUS
1L
2L
3L
4L
GPS STATUS
1R
1L
2R
2L
3R
3L
4R
4L
5R
5L
OP MODE
NAV
SAT VIS
8
HOR FOM
M
20
HOR DOP
1
HOR INT
O.20N M
6R
6L
<NAV STATUS
34-61-14
1/2
SAT TRK
5
VER FOM
65M
VER DOP
2
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
Page A-6
May 10, 2007

11.2
Ensure the OP MODE status is indicating NAV (GPS), 3D (LTN_100GT EGI) or OPER
(SIGMA50H). If the GPS is not in either correct mode, then ensure the aircraft is located outside
the hangar in an unrestricted area. The following tests of this section can only be completed if in
NAV, 3D or OPER mode.
11.3

POSITION
ALT
TK/GS
VER SPD
UTC
DATE
11.4
(GPS position of Latitude and Longitude)

(GPS Altitude)
(Track Angle and Ground Speed)
(GPS Vertical Velocity)
(GPS Universal Coordinated Time (UTC))
(GPS Date)
Press [NEXT]. GPS STATUS 2/2 page appears.
GPS STATUS
1L
KEY STATUS
KEY VER
2L
5L
GDOP
11.0
HOR DOP
2.1
RAIM HIL
0.34N M
6L
<NAV STATUS
3L
4L
11.5
2/2
FAIL CODE
0000
SAT TRK
5
PDOP
40.3
VER DOP
1.0
WIND
120T/15K T
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R

SAT TRK
GDOP
PDOP
HOR DOP
VER DOP
RAIM HIL
WIND
(Satellites Tracked)
(Geometric Dilution of Precision)
(Position Dilution of Precision)
(Horizontal Dilution of Precision)
(Vertical Dilution of Precision)
(Horizontal Integrity Limit)
(Wind direction and Wind Speed)
NOTE: To obtain the correct results in step (6), the FMS must be in independent operation.
34-61-14
Page A-7
May 10, 2007

11.6
Press [INIT/REF] and <NAV STATUS>. NAV STATUS INDEX 1/1 page appears.
Press <PREDICT RAIM>. GPS PREDICT RAIM 1/1 page appears.
GPS PREDICT RAIM

IDENT
1L
PANC
ETA
2L
1200Z
3L
1145Z
1150Z
1155Z
1200Z
1205Z
1210Z
1215Z
1/1
NONE
ENRT
TERM
APPR
APPR
TERM
NONE
1R
2R
3R
4L
4R
5L
5R
6L
<NAV STATUS
SAT DESEL>
6R
Enter a valid waypoint identifier and press LSK 1L to transfer scratchpad entry into the IDENT
display area.
Enter an estimated time of arrival number and press LSK 2L to transfer scratchpad entry into the
ETA display area.
NOTE: GPS Mode must be in NAV (A743) or 3D (LTN_100GT) or OPER (SIGMA50H).
After a short delay, the results of the predictive RAIM computation are displayed. If the
predictive RAIM for all times displayed is ****, check that the FMS is configured correctly, and
the interfaces wiring between FMS and GNSSU is correct.
34-61-14
Page A-8
May 10, 2007

12.0
DME NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST

NOTE: In a dual installation verify that both FMS displays the same information to be verified
during the test.
12.1
Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <DME>. DME STATUS 1/1 page appears.
DME STATUS
1L
2L
3L
ID
YUL
IJFK
YJN
PLB
YQA
YUD
STAT
N/A
REJ
REJ
FREQ
116.30
109.50
118.00
118.80
119.00
120.25
1/1
DIS
25.5N M
64.5N M
12.5N M
39.0N M
99.5N M
4L
5L
6L
1R
NM
2R
3R
4R
POSITION
N46o43.31 W078o46.07
<NAV STATUS
DME DESEL>
5R
6R
This page displays the DME stations within the vicinity of the aircraft, the display will continually
change. Record the following parameters:
Identifier: three characters
Status: * station not used, (Blank) does not respond to tuning
Frequency : Distance: DME slant range
12.2
Pull the circuit breaker which supplies the DME which is interfaced to the FMS.
12.3
Verify: DME FAILED in the scratchpad.

MSG annunciator illuminated.
DME FAILED message in MESSAGES page.
12.4
Reactivate the DME and verify DME FAILED indications disappear.
34-61-14
Page A-9
May 10, 2007

13.0
VOR/DME OR VOR/DME/TCN NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST

NOTE: In a dual installation verify that both FMS displays the same information to be verified
during the test.
13.1
Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <VOR/DME/TCN> or <VOR/DME> or <TACAN>.

VOR/DME STATUS 1/1 or VOR/DME/TCN STATUS 1/1 page appears.
NOTE: The title will change to VOR/DME or VOR/DME/TCN as applicable, if the TACAN and
VOR/DME is or is not configured.

1L

VOR1 YJN
115.80
260
DME
YJN
115.80
130NM
2L
2R
3L
3R
TCN
UHU 99X 150/ 110NM
4L
5L
6L
1R
4R
POSITION
N4500.00 W07200.00
<NAV STATUS
5R
6R
This page displays the stations used by the FMS in VOR/DME or VOR/DME/TCN navigation
mode. Record the following parameters:
VOR/DME Station Identifier ID: (IDentifier)
VOR/DME Station FREQ: (FREQuency)
RAD/DME (RADial from stn/ DME distance to stn)
TACAN Station Identifier ID: (IDentifier)
TACAN Station CHAN: (CHANnel)
13.2
Pull the circuit breaker which supplies the VOR/DME/TCN which is interfaced to the FMS.
13.3
Verify: VOR FAILED in the scratchpad.

MSG annunciator illuminated.
VOR FAILED message in MESSAGES page.
13.4
Reactivate the VOR/DME/TCN and verify the VOR FAILED indications disappear.
34-61-14
Page A-10
May 10, 2007

14.0
RADIO NAVIGATION TUNING TEST
14.1
Press [RADIO], <NAV#> (When the NAV radio is installed on the first RADIO top page).
Press [RADIO], <NEXT>, <NAV#> (When the NAV radio is installed on the second RADIO top
page), the NAV TUNING page appears.
NAV
NAV1
1L
b111.90 I Z Z
116.70----
1/2
NAV2
Y M X A116.30b
----112.80
2L
2R
3L
3R
DME1 HOLD
4L
5L
6L
14.2
1R
>OFF
LOC DME
o
/ 130N M
DME2 HOLD
I U L 109.30<
RAD/DME
180o 12.0N M
4R
LIBRARY>
6R
<RADIO
5R
Enter a VOR frequency and press LSK 1L to insert below NAV1 and record.
NOTE: In a dual installation verify that both FMS displays in the NAVx field the same
information.
14.3
Press LSK 1L to move the standby frequency to the active frequency.

NOTE: Frequencies must be suitable to be able to monitor VOR/DME/LOC signals.
14.4
Verify RADIAL1 status to be of proper radial.
14.5
Verify DME FREQ1 to be of proper frequency and record.
14.6
Verify DME RANGE1 to be of proper distance and record.
14.7
Press LSK 4L, DME HOLD. Verify that status changes to ON.
14.8
Enter a LOC frequency and press LSK1L to insert below NAV1 and record.
14.9
Press LSK 1L. Verify that the STANDBY1 frequency replaces the NAV1 ACT frequency and vice
versa.
14.10
Verify that RADIAL1 status displays LOC when LOC frequency active.
14.11
Verify that DME FREQ1 and DME RANGE1 has not changed from the value recorded in steps
(5) and (6).
14.12
Repeat above test for NAV 2 Radio.
34-61-14
Page A-11
May 10, 2007

15.0
ADF RECEIVER TUNING TEST
15.1
Press [RADIO], <ADF#> (When the ADF radio is installed on the first RADIO top page).
Press [RADIO], [NEXT], <ADF#> (When the ADF radio is installed on the second RADIO top
page), or
Press [RADIO], [RADIO], <ADF#> (When the ADF radio is installed on the second RADIO top
page and the "Next Keys" is set to "Yes" in the "Display Config" maintenance page).
NOTE: In a dual installation verify that both FMS displays in the same information to be verified
during the test.
ADF
ADF1
1L
b1234.5 0 1
1780.6 --
1/2
ADF2
04
--
407.0b
333.5
2L
2R
MODE
3L
1R
>ADF
BFO
MODE
ANT<
3R
BFO
4L
>OFF
MAG-BRG
5L
REL-BRG
>2 3 1 o
6L
<RADIO
LIBRARY>
ON<
<
4R
5R
6R
15.2
Enter a frequency and press LSK 1L to insert below ADF1.
15.3

NOTE: Frequencies must be suitable to receive ADF information.
34-61-14
Page A-12
May 10, 2007

15.4
Press <MODE> consecutively. Verify operation of ADF Receiver in ADF, ANT and BFO Mode.
15.5
Verify BEARING to the selected station.
15.6
Press LSK 1L. Verify that the STANDBY frequency replaces the ACTIVE frequency and vice
versa.
15.7
Verify that BEARING display has changed to the new Station.
16.0
TRANSPONDER TUNING TEST

NOTE: In a dual installation verify that both FMS displays in the ATCx the same information to
be verified during the test.
16.1
Press [RADIO], <ATC> (When the ATC radio is installed on the first RADIO top page)
Press [RADIO], [NEXT], <ATC> (When the ATC radio is installed on the second RADIO top
page), or
Press [RADIO], [RADIO], <ATC> (When the ATC radio is installed on the second RADIO top
Press [ATC], [TPDR] or [XPDR] (When Front panel Function Key is implemented).
ATC
ATC1
1L
b 1200
1500
1/2
ATC2
2200b
4600
2L
2R
MODE
3L
1R
>C
STATUS
4L
>ACTIVE
5L
>IDENT
6L
<RADIO
MODE
3A<
3R
STATUS
STANDBY<
4R
EMERGENCY<
5R
6R
16.2
Verify that the unique identity code, under CODE1, is per documentation (this code is hardwired
into the Transponder).
16.3
Enter an Ident Code and press LSK 1L to insert below CODE1.
16.4
Press <STATUS1>. Verify that the status changes to ACTIVE.
16.5
Press <SQK/IDT>.
16.6
On the Test Equipment, verify that the proper code is displayed.
16.7
Repeat above test for Transponder 2.
34-61-14
Page A-13
May 10, 2007

17.0
RADIO COMMUNICATION TUNING TEST

NOTE: In a dual installation verify that both FMS displays in the COMx ACT field the same
information to be verified during the test.
17.1
Press [RADIO], <VUF#> (When the VUF radio is installed on the first RADIO top page).
Press [RADIO], [NEXT], <VUF#> (When the VUF radio is installed on the second RADIO top
page), or
Press [RADIO], [RADIO], <VUF#> (When the VUF radio is installed on the second RADIO top
VUF
VUF1
1L
b 118.400 0 4
125.150 05
1/3
VUF2
-- 151.000b
-- 124.650
2L
2R
MODE
3L
1R
>AM
FUNCTION
MODE
FM<
3R
FUNCTION
4L
>TR_GV
TR<
4R
5L
>GUARD
GUARD<
5R
6L
<RADIO
LIBRARY>
6R
17.2
Enter a frequency and press LSK 1L to insert below COM1 ACT.
17.3

NOTE: Frequencies must be suitable to establish communication with another station.
17.4
Transmit on Radio1 and verify that communication can be established on COM1 ACT frequency.
17.5
Press LSK 1L. Verify that the STANDBY1 frequency replaces the COM1 ACT frequency and
vice versa.
17.6
Transmit on Radio1 and verify that communication can be established on the new frequency.
17.7
Repeat above test for COM 2 Radio.
34-61-14
Page A-14
May 10, 2007

18.0
ANNUNCIATORS TEST
Verify the annunciator tests as shown below.
Press [INIT/REF] [NEXT] <MAINT> <O/PTEST>, [NEXT] and [NEXT].
O/P ANNUN TEST

WPT
1L
>ON
2L
OFFSET
>ON G P S I N T
3L
OFF<
GPS INT
<OFFOFF<
<OFF
OFF<
>ON
LEGCHG
4L
3/4
MSG
>ON
OFF<
<RETURN
3/4
MSG
1L
>ON
2L
OFFSET
>ON G P S I N T
ON<
GPS INT
<OFFOFF<
<OFF
OFF<
>ON
LEGCHG
1R
2R
3R
MCAUTION
>ON
OFF<
5L
6L
4R
6R
O/P ANNUN TEST
4L
3R
5R
WPT
3L
2R
MCAUTION
5L
6L
1R
4R
5R
<RETURN
6R
ANNUNCIATORS:- MSG ANNUNCIATOR = ON
O/P ANNUN TEST

WPT
1L
>ON
2L
OFFSET
>ON G P S I N T
3L
>ON
5L
6L
OFF<
GPS INT
<OFFOFF<
>ON
<OFF
OFF<
LEGCHG
4L
3/4
MSG
1R
2R
3R
MCAUTION
OFF<
4R
5R
<RETURN
6R
ANNUNCIATORS:- MSG ANNUNCIATOR = OFF
34-61-14
Page A-15
May 10, 2007

18.1
FOR AIRCRAFT EQUIPPED WITH AN EFIS SYSTEM

NOTE: For EFIS equipped aircraft refer to the appropriate Operators Manuals for the proper
procedures to access the pages required for the following tests:
18.1.1
On the EFIS Controller select MAP MODE and if applicable put the RAD/NAV switch to NAV.
18.1.2
Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS> and <DESELECT>. Deselect GPS by pressing LSK 2L until
DESEL appears.
18.1.3
Press [RTE] to display RTE X 1/1 page.
18.1.4
Enter any valid airport identifier for both ORIGIN and DESTINATION fields.
18.1.5
Press [INIT REF], <POS INIT> and LSK 1R, the Present Position LAT-LONG is transferred to
the scratchpad. Press [LEGS] and enter Present Position as the active waypoint, WPT01 by
pressing LSK 1L.
18.1.6
LSK 2L.
18.1.7
LSK 3L.
18.1.8
LSK 4L.
18.1.9
LSK 5L.
18.1.10
Press [EXEC].
18.1.11
Set range of EFIS Nav display to 20 miles range.
18.1.12
Slew aircraft heading to 000 degrees to verify the display of the created course, DTW and ETA.
Figure A-1.1 is a typical simplified Map Mode display.
18.1.13
Press [LEGS] and perform 30 course intercept of WPT02 by pressing LSK 2L and then LSK 1L.
18.1.14
Enter course intercept of 30 into scratchpad and press LSK 6R.
18.1.15
Press [EXEC].
18.1.16
On the EFIS Controller switch to ARC Mode.
18.1.17
Verify that the Deviation Bar is to the left on the second dot. Figure A-1.2 is a typical ARC Mode
display.
18.1.18
Slew compass to proper setting.
34-61-14
Page A-16
May 10, 2007

Figure A-1.1 Typical Map Mode Display
Figure A-1.2 Typical ARC Mode Display
34-61-14
Page A-17
May 10, 2007

19.0
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) GROUND TEST PLAN

The purpose of this test is to demonstrate the electromagnetic compatibility of the FMS
subsystems with each other, with all other subsystems, and electronic equipment installed on
the aircraft. This is the responsibility of the system integrator. The guidelines indicated in the
main section can be use by the system integrator to define each specific test steps.
34-61-14
Page A-18
May 10, 2007

GROUND FUNCTIONAL TEST REPORT

FOR
CMC ELECTRONICS
CMA-9000
COMPANY'S NAME:
AIRCRAFT MODEL:
PERFORMED BY:
DATE:
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
WITNESSED BY:
DATE:
SECTION II
34-61-14
Page A-19
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FMS 2

SAT
3.0
POST INSTALLATION VISUAL INSPECTION
3.1
Antenna Unit
3.2
GPS Sensor
3.3
FMS
4.0
AIRCRAFT LOCATION AND POWER

REQUIREMENTS
4.1
Aircraft Location
4.2
Power applied to aircraft
5.0
FMS GROUND TEST PROCEDURE
5.2
Verify all circuit breakers ON
5.3
Initialization Sequence
5.4
Annunciator and Screen Test
5.7
Operational Software:-
UNSAT
N/A
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
Config. No:NAV DATABASE:

5.8
Present Position:
UTC:-
.
.
.
.
Date:- DD
5.12
- N/S
E/W
MMM / YY
or
MMM
DD / YY
ORIGIN and DEST identifiers are correct.
5.13
Active Route was Executed by pressing the EXEC

key.
6.0
CROSS-TALK VERIFICATION
6.1
Verify the CO Route entered in the above section

is transferred to FMS2 from FMS1.
7.0
EFIS VERIFICATION
7.1
Captain's and First Officer's EFIS is connected to

the FMS.
7.2
Route is properly displayed on each EFIS.
8.0
SETUP VERIFICATION
8.2
Display:-
MAGNETIC
TRUE
34-61-14
Page A-20
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FMS 2

SAT
9.0
HEADING INPUT VERIFICATION TEST
9.2
Verify Heading
9.3
Verify Heading
9.4
UNSAT
N/A
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
Verify: - HEADING FAILED in scratchpad

MSG Annunciator illuminated
HEADING FAILED displayed on
MESSAGES 1/1 page
9.5
Verify: - HEADING FAILED disappears from

above
9.6
Verify:
10.0
TRUE AIRSPEED VERIFICATION TEST
10.2
Test Setting
- Second System per above

Third System per above
100 knots
200 knots
250 knots
300 knots
10.4
Verify: - TAS FAILED in scratchpad

MSG Annunciator illuminated
TAS FAILED displayed on MESSAGES
1/1 page
10.5
Verify: - all TAS FAILED messages disappear
10.6
Verify: - Second system per above
11.0
GPS TEST
11.2
Record OP MODE status

NOTE: OP MODE status must be in OPER
(SIGMA50H) or 3D (LN_100GT) to
continue this test.
11.3

LAT N/S
LONG E/W
ALT
TK/GS
34-61-14
Page A-21
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FMS 2

SAT
UNSAT
N/A
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
VER SPD
UTC
DATE
11.5

SAT VIS
SAT TRK
PDOP
GDOP
HOR DOP
VER DOP
EHE
11.6
Record that not all predictive RAIM results read

either NONE, ENRT, TERM or APPR.
12.0
DME NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST

NOTE: In some circumstances it may be
impossible to receive VOR/DME signals. If
so, proceed to Para 13.0.
12.1

Identifier
12.3
Status
Freq.
Distance
Verify:- DME # FAILED in scratchpad

MSG Annunciator illuminates
DME # FAILED on MESSAGE RECALL
1/1 page
12.4
Verify:- DME # FAILED indications disappear
13.0
VOR/DME NAVIGATION VALIDITY TEST
13.1
Record following parameters:

Identifier
Frequency
Radial from Station
Distance from Station
13.3
Verify:- VOR # FAILED in scratchpad

MSG Annunciator illuminates
VOR # FAILED on MESSAGE RECALL
1/1 page
13.4
Verify:- VOR # FAILED indications disappear
34-61-14
Page A-22
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FMS 2

SAT
14.0
RADIO NAVIGATION TUNING TEST
14.2
Record active frequency
14.3
Verify frequency per 14.2
14.4
Verify: Radial 1
14.5
Verify: DME Frequency 1 and record
14.6
Verify: DME Range 1 and record
14.7
Verify: DME1 Hold Status
14.8
Record: LOC Frequency
14.9
Verify: Frequency Changes
14.10
Verify: Radial 1 status displays LOC
14.11
Verify: DME Frequency per 14.5

DME Range 1 per 14.6
14.12
Repeat above test for NAV2 Radio
15.0
ADF RECEIVER TUNING TEST
15.4
Verify: Operation in ADF Mode

Operation in ANT Mode
Operation in BFO Mode
15.5
Verify: Bearing to station
15.6
Verify: Frequency Changes
15.7
Verify: New bearing

Repeat above test for ADF2
16.0
TRANSPONDER TUNING TEST
16.2
Verify: ACT to ON
16.4
Verify: Status to ACTIVE
16.5
Verify: Status to ON
16.6
Verify: Proper code is displayed
16.7
Repeat above test for Transponder 2
17.0
RADIO COMMUNICATION TUNING TEST
17.4
Verify: Transmission on Active Frequency
17.5
Verify: Transmission on Standby Frequency
17.6
Verify: Transmission on new Frequency
UNSAT
N/A
34-61-14
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
Page A-23
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FMS 2

SAT
17.7
Repeat above test for COMM2 RADIO
18.0
ANNUNCIATORS TEST
UNSAT
N/A
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
Verify the annunciator test and display
34-61-14
Page A-24
May 10, 2007

APPENDIX B

PROCEDURES & REPORT
FOR
CMC ELECTRONICS INC.
S/W 169-614876-010
COMPANY'S NAME:
AIRCRAFT MODEL:
PERFORMED BY:
DATE:
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
WITNESSED BY:
DATE:
34-61-14
Page T-B1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page T-B2
May 10, 2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
FLIGHT FUNCTIONAL TEST.......................................................................................................................... 1

1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
PURPOSE ...................................................................................................................................... 1
FLIGHT TEST PREREQUISITES................................................................................................... 1
GENERAL....................................................................................................................................... 1
POWER ON AND INITIALIZATION OF FMS .................................................................................... 2
BEARING & DISTANCE VERIFICATION OF WAYPOINTS .......................................................... 2
STATUS AND MESSAGES.............................................................................................................. 2
ENGINE START AND GENERATOR LOAD SHARING TEST ........................................................ 3
GPS RECEPTION TEST ................................................................................................................ 3
FMS OPERATION DURING TAKE-OFF AND CLIMB-OUT ............................................................ 3
ENROUTE FMS INTERFACING CHECKS .................................................................................... 3
NAVIGATION MODE - SENSOR TEST ......................................................................................... 4
DME/DME MODE OF NAVIGATION .............................................................................................. 4
VOR/DME MODE OF NAVIGATION ............................................................................................... 5
GPS MODE OF NAVIGATION......................................................................................................... 5
DIRECT TO/INTERCEPT TEST ..................................................................................................... 6
HOLDING PATTERN TEST............................................................................................................ 6
ENROUTE TO TERMINAL AND INSTRUMENT APPROACH PHASE ......................................... 7
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) FLIGHT TEST PLAN........................................ 17
PERFORM ANY OTHER TESTS THAT ARE NECESSARY ....................................................... 18
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Page
Figure B-1 Arrival Zone .................................................................................................................................. 12
Figure B-2 EMC Matrix Chart ......................................................................................................................... 19
34-61-14
Page TC-B1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page TC-B2
May 10, 2007

FLIGHT FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURE

1.0
PURPOSE
1.1
The purpose of this procedure is to provide a flight test to evaluate and record:
a.
all operating modes of the Flight Management System (FMS);
b.
the operation of associated equipment connected to the FMS;
c.
the operation of annunciators and indicators in accordance with the Operator's Guide and
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement; and
d.
conduct an EMC test of any deferred items which could not be completed in the Ground
Functional Test Procedure.
2.0
FLIGHT TEST PREREQUISITES
2.1
Prior to carrying out the flight test, the FMS must have successfully completed all applicable
portions of the Ground Functional Test Procedure.
3.0
GENERAL
3.1
The flight test should be of sufficient length and incorporate as many waypoints as required to meet the
regulations of the local regulatory agency. The waypoints should be known and geographical positions
identifiable by visual or electronic means.
3.2
The flight test procedure is divided into two parts. One section is for the purpose of checking the
navigational accuracy of the FMS and it's sensors. The other portion is to check the interface between
the FMS and the Automatic Flight Guidance System. The portion associated with the Flight Guidance
System should not be incorporated with the accuracy test as the FMS offers the "Turn Anticipation"
feature in its Roll Command output.
3.3
During the flight planning stage of this test procedure, there are certain operations which can be
predefined. In particular the DIRECT TO/INTERCEPT and HOLDING PATTERN test. These tests can
be pre-programmed to avoid any excessive workload during the actual flight. In both tests, the
procedures to accomplish the task will be based on the appropriate Operators Manual, Sections 9 and
10.
3.4
The flight tests should take into account the use of the installed FMS.
34-61-14
Page B-1
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FLIGHT FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURE & REPORT
4.0
POWER ON and INITIALIZATION of FMS
4.1
Ensure all appropriate circuit breakers ON.
4.2
4.3
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Press appropriate LSK key, [INIT REF]

<IDENT>
Record:
OP PROGRAM:
CFG NO
ACTIVE DATABASE EXPIRES:
SECOND DATABASE EXPIRES:
4.4
Select Active Database
4.5
Press <POS INIT>
4.6
Modify displayed data if required
4.7
Press <ROUTE>
4.8
Clear the scratchpad, enter ORIGIN and DEST
airports and press [LEGS]. Enter the test flight waypoints
using either Idents or Lat/Long inserting waypoint
procedures then press [EXEC].
4.9
Record waypoints on Waypoint Entry sheet.
5.0
BEARING & DISTANCE VERIFICATION OF

WAYPOINTS
5.1 Verify the entered waypoints of the FMS
using the Bearing and Distance method.
6.0
STATUS and MESSAGES
6.1
Verify:
Scratchpad clear
Remote MSG Annunciator extinguished
No Alerting messages on MESSAGE RECALL
page
6.2
Record all displayed messages.

6.3 Are these messages critical to the test
flight? If YES call Maintenance.
34-61-14
Page B-2
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
7.0
ENGINE START and GENERATOR LOAD

SHARING TEST
7.1
Prior to the engine start and load sharing test,

note the screen displayed on the FMS:
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
7.2 Following the engine start and load sharing

test, verify that the FMS did not switch OFF and
the screen noted in step 7.1 is identical.
8.0
GPS RECEPTION TEST
8.1
Press [INIT REF], <NAV STATUS>, <GPS>
8.2
Ensure GPS in NAV Mode
8.3
Record the following data:

Lat.
Long.
Alt.
8.4
Press [NEXT]
8.5
Record the following data:

SAT VIS
SAT TRK
VER DOP
VER FOM
HOR DOP
HOR INIT
9.0
HOR FOM
FMS OPERATION DURING TAKE-OFF and

CLIMB-OUT
9.1
Verify the following during this phase of flight:

Groundspeed is increasing TAS is increasing
9.2
DME stations are being received.
9.3
GPS Satellites are being received.

Record the following:
SAT VIS
SAT TRK
10.0
ENROUTE FMS INTERFACING CHECKS
10.1
Couple the FMS to the Captains Flight Director

or EFIS.
10.2
Verify the following indication are correct:

TO/FROM pointer
NAV Flag
Long Range Nav pointer
Course pointer
34-61-14
Page B-3
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
10.3
Manually fly the aircraft 4 nm to the right of track.

Verify the Flight Instruments are indicating a fly
left condition.
10.4
Couple the FMS to the Flight Guidance System. If

applicable verify the autopilot is in the NAV
Armed Mode.
10.5
If required manually fly the aircraft toward the

Desired Track until the autopilot captures the
NAV mode.
10.6
Verify that the coupling and intercept of the

Desired Track is smooth and there is no
scalloping.
10.7
De-couple the FMS from the autopilot.
10.8
Fly aircraft to 4 nm left of track and repeat test.

Verify the intercept is smooth with no scalloping.
11.0
NAVIGATION MODE - SENSOR TEST
11.1
For this section of the test procedure deselect

and test those sensors which are applicable.
11.2
Select the next waypoint in the flight plan and

ensure it is a VOR/DME, couple the Flight
Guidance System in the NAV mode. Before
arriving at the waypoint, decouple the Flight
Guidance System and manually fly the aircraft
over the waypoint.
Add Manually Deselect GPS Sensors (if
applicable).
11.3
Verify the following:

The remote Waypoint Alert annunciator
illuminates
12.0
DME/DME MODE OF NAVIGATION
12.1
The NAV STATUS page should now indicate the

FMS is in DME/DME NAV mode.
12.2
Record the DME stations used, the frequency

and distance on the DME Position and Stations
Used Data Sheets.
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
34-61-14
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Page B-4
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
12.3
Couple the FMS to the Flight Guidance System.

Prior to arrival at the next waypoint, de-couple
the FMS and
manually fly the aircraft directly overhead the
waypoint.
12.4

Before arrival at the waypoint the remote
Waypoint Alert annunciator illuminates.
13.0
VOR/DME MODE of NAVIGATION
13.1
Tune the VHF NAV. controller to a co-located

VOR/DME station within range of the aircraft
present position.
13.2
Deselect enough DME stations to force NAV

MODE to DME/VOR.
13.3
Couple the Flight Guidance System to the FMS.

Prior to arrival at the waypoint de-couple the
FMS and
manually fly the aircraft directly over the
waypoint.
13.4

13.5
Manually reselect all usable VOR/DME stations
14.0
GPS MODE of NAVIGATION
14.1
Reselect the GPS sensor and confirm the FMS is

navigating in the GPS mode.
14.2
Record the number of GPS satellites being

received:
SAT VIS
SAT TRK
14.3
Couple the FMS to the Flight Guidance System.

Prior to arrival at the next waypoint, de-couple
the FMS and
manually fly the aircraft directly overhead the
waypoint.
14.4

14.5
Reselect all sensors and return FMS to normal

operation.
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
34-61-14
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Page B-5
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
15.0
DIRECT TO/INTERCEPT TEST
15.1
There are two parts to this test. The first portion

will be a DIRECT TO a waypoint defined in the
flight plan.
The second part of the test will be to intercept a
leg on a predefined heading.
15.2
Using the procedure in the Operators Guide carry

out a DIRECT TO a preselected waypoint.
15.3
Verify the new Bearing, Distance and Desired

Track are as expected.
15.4
Verify the Flight Guidance System which is

coupled to the FMS rolls out to the new course
with minimum
scalloping and overshoot.
15.5
The Intercept portion of the DIRECT TO will be in

two parts. The first heading will be erroneous and
should react as follows:
- NOT ON INTERCEPT HDG message on
FMS
- Steering Valid to Invalid
- Autopilot disengages
15.6
Turn the aircraft to the correct intercept Heading.

Couple FMS to Flight Guidance System. Verify
the above messages have disappeared and the
Flight Instruments display the expected
presentation.
15.7
Verify the aircraft does not overshoot the Desired

Track when intercept has been completed.
16.0
HOLDING PATTERN TEST
16.1
The test for the Holding Pattern will include the

three methods of entry to both the right and left
side. The starting Waypoints and type of entry
may be programmed on the ground and/or during
the flight. The sequence in which the different
modes of entry, etc. are carried out is at the
discretion of the flight crew.
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
34-61-14
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Page B-6
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
16.2
Verify that the following advisory messages

appear in the scratchpad approximately 10
seconds before reaching the desired holding fix:
DIRECT HOLD ENTRY or
PARALLEL HOLD ENTRY or
TEARDROP HOLD ENTRY
- the remote Waypoint Alert annunciator
illuminates.
16.3
The Holding Pattern test will comprise of at least

one complete circuit per entry.
16.4
Exit the Holding Pattern only after having

completed the entire race-track and passing over
the holding fix once again.
16.5
Verify that the second circuit around the racetrack is completed prior to proceeding to the next
enroute waypoint.
17.0
ENROUTE TO TERMINAL AND INSTRUMENT

APPROACH PHASE
17.1
If the Active Route Does Not Contain a Valid

Approach.
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
If a valid approach has not been selected and

loaded into the route, none of the following
functions will take place. It may be possible to
manually enter the FAF, MAP and missed
approach holding waypoints by selection from the
navigation database by their identifiers (when
these waypoints are uniquely identified and not
linked to a specific approach). However, the
CMA-9000 will remain in the terminal phase of
flight, although LNAV-coupled navigation
between these waypoints will continue to be
possible.
34-61-14
Page B-7
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
17.2
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Distance from the Departure Airport greater than

33 nm.
When the radial distance from the departure
airport is greater than 33 nm or the altitude is
greater than 16,000 feet AGL, the phase of flight
changes from terminal to en-route, verify that the
following changes occur:
-
17.3
RNP value changes from 1 nm to 2 nm; and

HSI lateral deviation sensitivity changes
from 1 nm to 5 nm full scale over a 10
second period.
Distance to Destination Airport less than 30 nm.

When the radial distance from the destination
airport is less than 30 nm and the aircraft altitude
is less than 15,000 feet AGL, the phase of flight
changes from en-route to terminal, verify that the
following changes occur:
-
17.4
RNP value changes from 2 nm to 1 nm;

smoothly from 5 nm to 1 nm full scale over a
period of 10 seconds; and
Alert message "LAT SCALE CHANGING" is
displayed in the CDU scratchpad, with
flashing of the remote "MSG" annunciator
At 3 nm Inbound to the Final Approach Fix (FAF).

(Future Growth)
At 3 nm inbound to the FAF, and provided a valid
approach is loaded into the active flight plan,
verify that the following occurs:
-
Advisory message "LAT SCALE TO

CHANGE" is displayed in the CDU
scratchpad.
34-61-14
Page B-8
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
17.5
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
At 2 nm Inbound to the FAF.

At 2 nm inbound to the FAF, and provided that:
a) approach horizontal integrity limit (HIL < 0.3 nm)
is predicted to exist at the FAF and the Missed
Approach Point (MAP), and
b) a valid approach is loaded into the active flight
plan, and
c) the final approach course is being intercepted
with a track angle error of less than 90
degrees, and
d) within 60 degrees zone the CMA-9000
transitions automatically to the approach phase
of flight, and the approach can be flown in
LNAV-coupled mode.
The transition to
approach phase results, verify that the following
occurs:
-
If applicable, "GPS APPR CAP" annunciator

illuminates;
RNP value changes from 1 nm to 0.3 nm;
linearly from 1 nm to 0.3 nm full scale over a
10 second period;
HSI NAV flag remains out of view; and
"MISSED APPR" line select key (LSK)
prompt is displayed on CDU LEGS 1/X and
PROGRESS 1/4 pages.
NPA annunciator illuminates.
34-61-14
Page B-9
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
17.6
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
At 2 nm Inbound to FAF with Approach Integrity Not

Available.
If the predictive RAIM function shows that approach
integrity (HIL < 0.3 nm) will not be available at the
FAF and/or the MAP, the CMA-9000 remains in the
terminal phase of flight. Verify the following occurs
at 2 nm inbound to the FAF:
-
HSI NAV flag appears;

Lateral steering validity signal is set to INVALID,
which results in the autopilot dis-engaging the
LNAV mode and reverting to heading select or
heading hold mode (depending on the autopilot
design);
- Alert message "NO APPR INTEGRITY" is
displayed in the CDU scratchpad, with flashing
of the remote MSG annunciator;
- If applicable, "GPS APPR CAP" annunciator
remains extinguished; and
- "MISSED APPR" line select key (LSK) prompt is
displayed on CDU LEGS 1/X and PROGRESS
1/4 pages.
- NPA annunciator remains extinguished.
34-61-14
Page B-10
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
17.7
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
If Approaching the FAF with Poor Orientation.

The following conditions must be satisflied in
order for the FMS to fly a GPS approach. (Refer
to Figure B-1)
Track angle error must be less than 90
degrees of the FAF's inbound course; and
- within 60 degrees bearing of FAF's inbound
course; and
- approaching the FAF from a distance greater
than 2.5 nmi.
Verify if the above conditions are not met the

following messages and Alerts appear:
-
Lateral steering remains valid;

remains extinguished; and
"MISSED APPR" line select key (LSK) prompt
is displayed on CDU LEGS 1/X and
PROGRESS 1/4 pages.
NPA annunciator remains extinguished.
On overflying the FAF, automatic leg sequencing

to the MAP occurs.
34-61-14
Page B-11
May 10, 2007

GPS
APPROACH
ZONE
GPS APPR CAP
ANNUNCIATOR
3NM
HSI SCALE TO CHANGE

ADVISORY MESSAGE
2NM
60
INBOUND
COURSE
FAF
MAP
60
2NM
CROSS THIS BOUNDARY
AT A TRACK ANGLE
ERROR OF LESS THAN 90
9909047
Figure B-1 Arrival Zone
34-61-14
Page B-12
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
17.8
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Flight on Final Approach Course Between FAF and

MAP.
With GPS approach integrity available, LNAVcoupled navigation in the approach phase of flight
will continue along the final approach course from
the FAF to the MAP. As specified in TSO-C129, if
a loss of approach integrity is detected after
passing the FAF, its annunciation will be delayed
by 5 minutes.
17.9
Waypoint Sequencing At the MAP.

At the missed approach point, there is no
automatic sequencing to the next waypoint/leg.
Waypoint sequencing at the MAP to the first
waypoint of the missed approach procedure must
be manually initiated by the crew by pressing the
"MISSED APPR" line select key, which is displayed
on the LEGS 1/x and PROGRESS 1/4 pages on
passing the FAF, or the Take-Off/Go-Around
(TOGA) switch. Waypoint sequencing can also be
initiated by direct-to navigation to the MAP.
17.10
Overflying the MAP, Missed Approach Not

Selected
At the MAP, if the missed approach procedure has
not been initiated, the following occurs:
- Displayed distance-to-go to the MAP starts to
increase, indicating that the waypoint is
overflown;
- Navigation and guidance is computed and
displayed along the extension of the final
approach course;
- To/From flag on the HSI displays FROM; and
- LNAV steering signal remains valid.
On touchdown (based on the combined logic of the
weight-on-wheels switch, TAS and groundspeed)
the phase of flight changes to terminal and NPA
annunciator extinguishes.
34-61-14
Page B-13
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
17.11
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Missed Approach Procedure

The missed approach procedure can be initiated
by:
a) Pressing the "MISSED APPR" LSK on the CDU,
or by
b) pressing the standard Take-Off/Go-Around
(TOGA) switch on the throttle quadrant, or by
c) executing direct-to navigation.
Verify this point the following occurs:
-
17.12

extinguishes;
RNP value changes from 0.3 nm to 1 nm;
HSI lateral deviation sensitivity changes over a
10 second period from 0.3 nm to 1 nm full
scale;
HSI NAV flag disappears from view (if it had
been displayed as a result of lack of approach
integrity);
LNAV steering validity is reset to VALID (if it had
been set to INVALID as a result of lack of
approach integrity);
"MISSED APPR" line select key (LSK) prompt
disappears from CDU LEGS 1/X and
PROGRESS 1/4 pages;
"NO APPR INTEGRITY" scratchpad message
disappears (if displayed); and
Navigation and guidance sequences at the MAP
to the first waypoint of the missed approach
procedure.
NPA annunciator extinguishes.
Manual Deselection of Approach Mode

The approach mode can be manually deselected
at any time by:
a) Initiation of the missed approach procedure as
described in para 16 above; or
b) execution of a direct-to leg; or
c) if not yet at the FAF, by defining a holding
pattern at the FAF.
34-61-14
Page B-14
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
17.13
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
FMS 2
N/A
SAT/
YES
UNSAT
/ NO
N/A
Manual Override of HSI Display Sensitivity

The RNP value can be modified at any time by
manual override. As shown in the table below, the
HSI sensitivity and GPS integrity alert limit are
linked to the RNP value. In addition, for multisensor installation, the position check limit is also
controlled by the current RNP value.
34-61-14
Page B-15
May 10, 2007

Allowable
HSI
Sensitivities
Default
HSI Sensitivity
(Phase of Flight)
5.0 nm f.s
(En-route)
Position
Check
Limit
RNP
(GPS Integrity
Alarm Limit)
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
(2.0 nm)
Manual
Override
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
Resulting RNP
(GPS Integrity
Alarm Limit)
(NOTE 1)
1.0 nm
(1.0 nm)
0.3 nm
(0.3 nm)
1.0 nm f.s.
(Terminal)
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
(1.0 nm)
0.3 nm only
0.3 nm
(0.3 nm)
0.3 nm f.s.
(Approach)
0.3 nm
0.3 nm
(0.3 nm)
0.3 nm only
0.3 nm (NOTE 2)
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
The GPS integrity alert limit cannot be modified.

When in the approach phase of flight, the HSI sensitivity cannot be changed by RNP entry, except by
initiating a missed approach as described above.
Used for position comparison in non-RNP airspace and in multi-sensor navigation.
34-61-14
Page B-16
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
18.0
18.1
FMS 2
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
(EMC) FLIGHT TEST PLAN
List all the deferred EMC tests from the ground
functional test procedure.
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
______________________________
Evaluation Criteria
System performance and operation within the interference
environment will be evaluated based on the following
criteria:
A.
MALFUNCTION: A failure of a subsystem due to

electromagnetic interference that results in a flight
safety situation, a mission abort, or a failure to
accomplish the mission.
B.
UNACCEPTABLE CONDITION: An abnormality in

the expected operation or output of a receiver or
subsystem due to electromagnetic interference
which usually cannot be termed a malfunction, but
which is detrimental to system performance.
C.
UNDESIRABLE CONDITION:
A recognizable
interruption of normal output which cannot be
designated as an unacceptable condition or
malfunction and which is considered tolerable.
18.2
The attached matrix, refer to Figure B-2, chart is to

be used as a guide in performing the EMC tests.
18.3
Conduct a coupled ILS approach at a known airport

and monitor and record any unusual aircraft
response. Repeat this test as many times as
necessary to determine the EMC interference
equipment.
Is there any unusual aircraft response?

YES__________
NO__________
34-61-14
Page B-17
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FMS 2
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
If YES list results:

_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
___
___
___
___
___
___
List all equipments that fall under criteria

malfunction.
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
___
___
___
___
___
___

unacceptable condition.
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
___
___
___
___
___
___

undesirable condition.
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
___
___
___
___
___
___
_
18.4
_
18.5
18.6
19.0
PERFORM ANY OTHER TESTS THAT ARE

NECESSARY
19.1
List any other tests deemed necessary to satisfy

the local airworthiness authorities.
19.2
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
___
___
___
___
___
___
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
19.3
19.4
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
19.5
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
34-61-14
Page B-18
May 10, 2007
MONITOR
OPERATE
34-61-14
FMS
UHF
REC
EIVE
RS
FM R
ECE
IVER
GSM
S
PHO
NE
MOD
EST
RAN
SPO
NDE
R
ENG
INE IN
STR
AUT
UME
OPIL
NTS
OT
FLIG
HT R
ECO
RDE
MAS
R
TER
CAU
T
INTE
ION
RCO
M
HEA
DING
SYS
TEM
STAL
L WA
RNIN
FUE
G
L QU
ANT
ITY
FIRE
WAR
NING
INTE
GRA
TED
AVIO
HF R
NICS
ECE
IVER
S
LOW
LEVE
L WIN
WEA
DSH
THE
EAR
R RA
SYS
DAR
TCA
S
VHF
N
OMM
REC
EIVE
AV R
RS
ECE
ILS R
IVER
ECE
S
IVER
S
MLS
REC
EIVE
RS
DME
REC
EIVE
RS
ADF
REC
EIVE
RS
SATC
OM
RAD
IO AL
TIME
TER
ADC
S
VHF
C

FMS
TUNE VHF
COMM REC'S
TUNE ADF REC'S
TUNE & XMIT

HF REC'S
XMIT SATCOM
COMMENTS:
NOTE: Enter N/A for any non-applicable systems. All entries must be completed.
9810013
Figure B-2 EMC Matrix Chart
Page B-19
May 10, 2007

WAYPOINT ENTRY SHEET

WPT NO.
IDENT
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
BRG/DIST
01
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
02
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
03
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
04
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
05
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
06
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
07
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
08
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
09
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
10
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
11
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
12
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
13
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
14
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
15
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
16
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
17
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
18
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
19
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
20
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
21
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
22
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
23
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
24
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
25
N/S
: .
E/W
: .
34-61-14
Page B-20
May 10, 2007

FMS 1
FMS 2
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
SAT
UNSAT
N/A
___
___
___
___
___
___
DME POSITION AND STATION USED TABLE

FMS POSITION
N / S _____:_____.____
E / W _____:_____:____
DME STATION IDENT
FREQUENCY
DISTANCE
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
DME POSITION AND STATION USED TABLE

FMS POSITION
N / S _____:_____.____
E / W _____:_____:____
DME STATION IDENT
FREQUENCY
DISTANCE
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
__________
_____ .___
_____ .___
34-61-14
Page B-21
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page B-22
May 10, 2007

APPENDIX C
PROCEDURES FOR OBTAINING

CIVIL AUTHORITIES APPROVAL - IFR/VFR
OPERATIONS FOR FOLLOW-ON FMS/GPS
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS
COMPANY'S NAME:
AIRCRAFT MODEL:
PERFORMED BY:
DATE:
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
WITNESSED BY:
DATE:
34-61-14
Page T-C1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page T-C2
May 10, 2007

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
1.
FOLLOW-ON MULTI-SENSOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS LIMITED TO VFR USE

ONLY ............................................................................................................................................... 1
A.
General Installation Methods .............................................................................................. 1
B.
Installation Criteria .............................................................................................................. 1
C.
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement/Placard(s) .................................................................... 1
D.
Functional Flight Evaluation................................................................................................ 3
2.
FOLLOW-ON MULTI-SENSOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS FOR IFR USE.......................... 3

A.
Data Submitted by the Applicant......................................................................................... 3
B.
Additional Data That May be Required............................................................................... 3
C.
Additional Data That May be Required............................................................................... 3
D.
Functional Flight Evaluation................................................................................................ 5
3.
SAMPLE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT (FAA Form 337 Approval

Process) .......................................................................................................................................... 5
GLOSSARY ................................................................................................................................... 13
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Page
Figure C-1 Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (Sheet 1 of 7) .................................................... 6

Figure C-2 FMS/GPS TSO-C129a Equipment Classes and Applications ............................................... 14
34-61-14
Page TC-C1
May 10, 2007

34-61-14
Page TC-C2
May 10, 2007

1.
FOLLOW-ON MULTI-SENSOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS LIMITED TO VFR USE ONLY
Approval of follow-on multi-sensor equipment installations limited to VFR use only (where the initial approval
was accomplished using the TC or STC process) are normally obtained using FAA Form 337 approved by
the responsible Flight Standards District Office (FSDO). Such installations can usually be approved for return
to service by one of the entities noted in 14 CFR part 43; e.g., repair station, manufacturer, holder of an
inspection authorization, etc., provided the installation:
A.
General Installation Methods

Conforms to the acceptable methods, techniques, and practices contained in AC 43.13-1B,
Acceptable Methods, Techniques and Practices Aircraft Inspection and Repair, and AC 43.13-2A,
Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices - Aircraft Alterations.
B.
Installation Criteria
Is in accordance with the criteria specified in paragraph 8c(1)(ii) of AC20-130a. A certification from
the manufacturer to confirm that the en route/terminal accuracy requirements in paragraph 6 and
ground accuracy test requirements in paragraph 8c(1)(iii) of AC20-130a have been met should be
provided. This certification can be accomplished by reference to the first time TC/STC approval.
NOTE:
C.
Limited test data may be required to verify/demonstrate that the applicable requirements
have been satisfied.
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement/Placard(s)

Except for those installations where placards address required limitations, an airplane or rotorcraft
flight manual supplement (or supplemental flight manual) prepared by the applicant and containing
at least the following information must be presented for FAA approval. The proposed flight manual
supplement (or supplemental flight manual) is submitted for approval along with the other data
associated with the installation.
(1)
Equipment operating limitations.

(a) TSO-C115b (a)(1), with respect to RTCA DO-187 paragraph 2.3, and TSO-C129a
(a)(3)(xix), with respect to RTCA DO-208 paragraph 2.3, Vertical Navigation (except for
GPS based Terminal and Non-precision approach provided as advisory guidance), is not
implemented.
(b) The use of the VNAV function during approach operations is prohibited.
34-61-14
Page C-1
May 10, 2007

(c) TSO-C115b (a)(2)(xii), Stand Alone VOR/DME and DME/DME approach capability is not
implemented.
(d) Multiple FMS installations are limited to the dual FMS configuration only.
(e) The FMS can only be used in an installation that provides an indication that the AutoFlight Control System (AFCS) has lost the FMS steering or guidance input.
(f)
Search Patterns are prohibited.
(g) VOR radio automatic tuning is prohibited.

(h) Doppler Velocity Sensor (DVS) interface is prohibited.
(i)
Embedded INS/GPS (EGI) interface is prohibited.
(j)
Military Navigation sensor selection (military navigation modes option) is prohibited.
(k) OEI Cruise and Fly Away functions are prohibited.

(l)
In a dual FMS installation a GPS input must be provided to each FMS.
(m) The STANDARD set of color is approved. Non-standard set of colors must be approved
by the certification authority approving the installation.
(n) Non-scalable HSIs interface is limited to the En-route phase of flight approval only.
(o) Configuration and use of the Radio Tuning is prohibited.
(p) Transdown in multiple installation is prohibited.
(q) Navigation using IRS sensors is prohibited.
(r) DME/DME navigation is prohibited.
(2)
Emergency/abnormal operating procedures (if applicable).
(3)
Normal procedures for operating the multi-sensor equipment and any interfaced equipment.
(May be provided in a pilot's guide that is referenced in the flight manual supplement.)
(4)
General description of system (or reference to a pilot's guide that provides an equipment
description).
34-61-14
Page C-2
May 10, 2007

D.
Functional Flight Evaluation

A functional flight evaluation covering the items listed in paragraph 8c(2)(iii) of AC20-130a is
accomplished by the installer. The results of this evaluation are included with the data provided to
the FSDO.
2.
FOLLOW-ON MULTI-SENSOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS FOR IFR USE

Approval of follow-on multi-sensor equipment installations for IFR use (where the initial approval was
accomplished using the TC or STC process) may be obtained using an FAA Form 337 approved by the
responsible FSDO.
A.
Data Submitted by the Applicant

Alteration data for the equipment installation is submitted with a properly executed FAA Form 337,
and a certification from the manufacturer to confirm that the accuracy requirements of paragraph
7a and ground accuracy test requirements of paragraph 9c(1)(iii) of AC20-130a and system
performance specifications of TSO-C115a or b have been met. (This certification can be
accomplished by reference to TSO-C115a or b approval and the original TC/STC approval.) The
FAA Form 337, along with all required data pertaining to the installation, should be submitted to
the responsible FSDO.
B.
Additional Data That May be Required

If required by the FSDO (or an ACO when consulting with the FSDO when reviewing the
data/conducting necessary tests requested by the FSDO) approving the technical data/installation,
the applicant may also be required to furnish a copy of the equipment data (for equipment not
produced under TSO-C115a or b authorization), manufacturers operating and installation
instructions, fault analysis for installation, installation details and/or photographs, structural
substantiation, system wiring diagrams, and ground test evaluation results.
C.
Additional Data That May be Required

An airplane or rotorcraft flight manual supplement (or supplemental flight manual) prepared by the
applicant and containing at least the following information must be presented for FAA approval.
The proposed flight manual supplement (or supplemental flight manual) is prepared using the
guidance contained in Appendix 2 and submitted to the FSDO.
(1)
Equipment operating limitations.

(a) TSO-C115b (a)(1), with respect to RTCA DO-187 paragraph 2.3, and TSO-C129a
implemented.
(b) The use of the VNAV function during approach operations is prohibited.
34-61-14
Page C-3
May 10, 2007

(c) TSO-C115b (a)(2)(xii), Stand Alone VOR/DME and DME/DME approach capability is not
implemented.
(d) Multiple FMS installations are limited to the dual FMS configuration only.
(e) The FMS can only be used in an installation that provides an indication that the AutoFlight Control System (AFCS) has lost the FMS steering or guidance input.
(f)
(g) VOR radio automatic tuning is prohibited.

(h) Doppler Velocity Sensor (DVS) interface is prohibited.
(i)
(j)
(k) OEI Cruise and Fly Away functions are prohibited.

(l)
(m) The STANDARD set of color is approved. Non-standard set of colors must be approved
by the certification authority approving the installation.
(n) Non-scalable HSIs interface is limited to the En-route phase of flight approval only.
(o) Configuration and use of the Radio Tuning is prohibited.
(p) Transdown in multiple installation is prohibited.
(q) Navigation using IRS sensors is prohibited.
(r)
DME/DME navigation is prohibited.
(2)
Emergency/abnormal operating procedures.
(3)
Normal procedures for operating the multi-sensor equipment and any interfaced equipment.
(May be provided in a pilot's guide that is referenced in the flight manual supplement.)
(4)
General description of system (or reference to a pilot's guide that provides an equipment
description).
34-61-14
Page C-4
May 10, 2007

D.
Functional Flight Evaluation

A functional flight evaluation covering the items listed in paragraph 9.c.(2)(iv) of AC20-130a is
accomplished. The inspector may authorize the installer to conduct the flight evaluation. In
situations where additional FAA evaluation is necessary, required flight evaluations will be
conducted by the cognizant ACO or, when authorized, by a Flight Test Pilot Designated
Engineering Representative (DER) in accordance with the procedures used by the ACO.
3.
SAMPLE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT (FAA Form 337 Approval Process)
The following sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) is provided as an example of the
format to be used and information to be included when preparing required supplements. An AFMS must
follow the organization of the flight manual being supplemented.
34-61-14
Page C-5
May 10, 2007

Installation Center/Repair Station

123 Fourth Street
Anytown, USA
Model XXX FMS/GPS

Navigation System
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT

ABC MODEL XXX FMS/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AIRPLANE MAKE: ______

AIRPLANE MODEL: ______
AIRPLANE SERIAL NO.: ______
REGISTRATION NO.: ______
This document must be carried in the airplane at all times. It describes the operating procedures for the
ABC Model XXX FMS/GPS navigation system when it has been installed in accordance with
S.T.C. _________.
For airplanes with an FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual, this document serves as the FAA
Approved ABC Model XXX FMS/GPS Flight Manual Supplement. For airplanes that do not have an
approved flight manual, this document serves as the FAA Approved ABC Model XXX FMS/GPS
Supplemental Flight Manual.
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the basic Airplane Flight Manual dated
<insert date> only in those areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance
information not contained in this document, consult the basic Airplane Flight Manual.
FAA APPROVED
___________________________
Manager, Flight Test Branch
XXX Aircraft Certification Office
Federal Aviation Administration
City, State
FAA Approved
Date: ______
Page<> of <>
Figure C-1 Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (Sheet 1 of 7)
34-61-14
Page C-6
May 10, 2007


123 Fourth Street
Anytown, USA
Model XXX FMS/GPS

Navigation System
Table of Contents
Section..............................................................
Page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
<>
<>
<>
<>
<>
<>
<>
General.........................................................
Limitations ....................................................
Emergency/Abnormal Procedures ...............
Normal Procedures ......................................
Performance .................................................
Weight and Balance .....................................
System Description ......................................
FAA Approved
Date: ________
Page <> of <>
34-61-14
Page C-7
May 10, 2007


123 Fourth Street
Anytown,USA
Model XXX FMS/GPS

Navigation System
SECTION l GENERAL
1.
<Provide a very brief (e.g., one paragraph) general description of the FMS/GPS navigation
system installed in the aircraft, including it's sensors and aircraft interface.>
2.
Provided the ABC Model XXX FMS/GPS navigation system is receiving adequate usable signals,
it has been demonstrated capable of and has been shown to meet the accuracy specifications of:
VFR/IFR en route oceanic and remote, en route domestic, terminal and instrument
approach (FMS/GPS, Loran-C, VOR, VOR-DME, TACAN, NDB, NDB-DME, RNAV)
operation <specify operations, e.g., en route oceanic and remote, en route domestic,
terminal, instrument approach, etc., as applicable to the particular approval> (see
limitations under para. 6 below) within the North Atlantic Minimum Navigation
Performance Specification (MNPS) Airspace using the WGS-84 (or NAD 83) coordinate
reference datum in accordance with the criteria of AC 20-XXX, AC 91A9, AC 120-33, and
<list additional applicable AC's>. Navigation data is based upon use of only the global
positioning system (FMS/GPS) operated by the United States.
3.
System Annunciators
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
System Switches
a.
b.
c.
5.
Waypoint - <describe each annunciator, location and colour of legends>

Message - <describe each annunciator, location and colour of legends>
Approach - <describe each annunciator, location and colour of legends>
(see limitations under para. 6 below)
<describe any other annunciators, location and colour of legends>
Nav/FMS/GPS - <describe switch use and function, it's location and colour of legends>
RMI Switch - <describe switch use and function, it's location and colour of legends>
<describe any other switches, their location and colour of legends>
Pilot's Display <describe the pilot's display(s), TO/FROM, XTK, NAV VALID, DSTRK pointer
(mention what will be displayed when FMS/GPS is selected to the HSI or EFIS in place of Raw
Radio Nav. Data.)>
SECTION 2 LIMITATIONS
1.
The ABC Model XXX FMS/GPS Operator's Manual, P/N <insert part number>, dated <insert
date> (or later applicable revision) must be immediately available to the flight crew whenever
navigation is predicated on the use of the system. The software status stated in the pilot's guide
must match that displayed on the equipment.
2.
The system must utilize software version <insert version identification or later approved version>.
FAA Approved
Date: ______
Page <> of < >
34-61-14
Page C-8
May 10, 2007


123 Fourth Street
Anytown, USA
Model XXX FMS/GPS

Navigation System
3.
IFR en route, terminal and approach navigation is prohibited unless the pilot verifies the currency
of the database or verifies each selected waypoint for accuracy by reference to current approved
data.
4.
GPS instrument approach procedures must be accomplished in accordance with approved

instrument approach procedures that are retrieved from the FMS/GPS equipment navigation
database. (See limitations under para. 6 below).
(a)
GPS instrument approaches must be conducted in the approach mode and GPS integrity
(RAIM) must be available at the Final Approach Fix and Missed Approach Point. (See
limitations under para. 6 below).
(b)
Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, and MLS approaches using GPS are
not authorized.
(c)
When an alternate airport is required by the applicable operating rules, it must be served by
an approach based on other than GPS or Loran-C navigation, the aircraft must have
operational equipment capable of using that navigation aid, and the required navigation aid
must be operational.
5.
The aircraft must have other approved navigation equipment installed and operating appropriate
to the route of flight.
6.
<Specify any additional limitations applicable to the particular installation.>

(a)
TSO-C115b (a)(1), with respect to RTCA DO-187 paragraph 2.3, and TSO-C129a
implemented.
(b)
The use of the VNAV function during approach operations is prohibited.
(c)
TSO-C115b (a)(2)(xii), Stand Alone VOR/DME and DME/DME approach capability is not
implemented.
(d)
Multiple FMS installations are limited to the dual FMS configuration only.
(e)
The FMS can only be used in an installation that provides an indication that the Auto-Flight
Control System (AFCS) has lost the FMS steering or guidance input.
(f)
(g)
VOR radio automatic tuning is prohibited.
FAA Approved
Date: ______
Page <> of <>
34-61-14
Page C-9
May 10, 2007


123 Fourth Street
Anytown, USA
Model XXX FMS/GPS

Navigation System
(h)
Doppler Velocity Sensor (DVS) interface is prohibited.
(i)
(j)
(k)
OEI Cruise and Fly Away functions are prohibited.
(l)
(m)
The STANDARD set of color is approved. Non-standard set of colors must be approved by
the certification authority approving the installation.
(n)
Non-scalable HSIs interface is limited to the En-route phase of flight approval only.
(o)
Configuration and use of the Radio Tuning is prohibited.
(p)
Transdown in multiple installation is prohibited.
(q)
Navigation using IRS sensors is prohibited.
(r)
DME/DME navigation is prohibited.
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY/ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
No Change is expected but each installation must be reviewed individually.
ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
1.
For alert messages, see Operator's Manual Procedures
2.
<Describe all annunciated failures applicable to individual installation

e.g.: APPR capture fails to illuminate.>
3.
<Describe the annunciation of "IND" and the consequences of this mode of operation.>
4.
<Describe the limitation under a failed altitude input.>
5.
<Describe what procedure should be taken if the FMS/GPS has a failed heading or TAS input.>
FAA Approved
Date: ______
Page <> of <>
34-61-14
Page C-10
May 10, 2007


123 fourth Street
Anytown, USA
Model XXX FMS/GPS

Navigation System
SECTION 4 - NORMAL PROCEDURES

1.
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the ABC Model ~ FMS/GPS Operator's Manual, P/N
<insert part number>, dated <insert date> (or later appropriate revision).
2.
<Describe all system annunciators located on the FMS and all remotely located annunciators
including location and colour.>
3.
In synchronized mode of operation, if a loss of FMS/GPS integrity is detected by only one system,
this will be annunciated only on the affected side.
4.
In holding patterns, the outbound and inbound legs may not be parallel when a combination of wind
and airspeed result in a high ground speed such that the limits of the ICAO protected airspace may
be exceeded.
5.
Flight Director/Autopilot Coupled Operation <describe the procedures for coupling the FMS/GPS to
the flight director and or autopilot system(s) and any autopilot XTK criteria for full autopilot
engagement of FMS/GPS>
6.
<Describe the LNAV engage criteria including any criteria required by the autopilot for ARM and
CAPTURE.>
7.
<Describe the pilot's display for enroute, terminal and approach lateral deviation scale factors. In
particular for an EFIS installation, describe whether variable lateral deviation scale factors are
supported.>
8.
<Describe the method used for FMS/GPS Approach; Manual Mode or Automatic Mode depending
on installation and FMS/GPS configuration set-up.>
9.
<Describe the reversionary mode if FMS/GPS has failed or lost satellites, describe the reversionary
mode when the roll command from the FMS goes invalid.>
10. <Describe reversionary modes of autopilot/flight director coupling/engagement caused by

FMS/GPS failure.>
11. <State the Omega mode of operation (Absolute or Relative).>
12. If the FMS/GPS is installed as a stand-alone GPS navigation system, <describe the dead
reckoning reversionary mode.>
FAA Approved
Date: ______
Page <> of <>
34-61-14
Page C-11
May 10, 2007


123 fourth Street
Anytown, USA
Model XXX FMS/GPS

Navigation System
13. If the FMS/GPS is installed as a multi-sensor navigation system, <list the sensors and the
reversionary navigation modes on sensor failure.>
14. <include any other normal operating procedures necessary>
CAUTION: FOR OPERATION WITH NON BARO-CORRECTED ALTITUDE INPUTS, ENTER AND
CROSS CHECK ALTITUDE SETTING ON FMS.
FAA Approved
Date: ______
Page <> of <>
34-61-14
Page C-12
May 10, 2007

GLOSSARY
1.
Availability
The availability of the FMS/GPS system is the percentage of time that the services of the FMS/GPS
system are usable. Availability is an indication of the ability of the system to provide usable service
within the specified coverage area. Signal availability is the percentage of time that navigational signals
transmitted from the satellites are available for use.
2.
Barometric Altitude
Altitude in the earth's atmosphere above mean standard sea level pressure datum, measured by a
pressure (barometric) altimeter and corrected for local barometric pressure setting.
3.
Differential FMS/GPS
A technique used to improve FMS/GPS system accuracy by determining positioning error from the
FMS/GPS satellites at a known fixed location and subsequently transmitting the determined error, or
corrective factors, to FMS/GPS users operating in the same area.
4.
Distance Root Mean Square (DRMS)

The root-mean-square value of the distances between the measured and true location in a collection of
measurements. The two dimensional circular error distribution, where 95 percent of the position
solutions must lie within the defined radius of the circle, is represented by two times the DRMS (2
DRMS).
5.
En Route Operations
The phase of navigation covering operations between departure and arrival terminal phases. The en
route phase of navigation has two subcategories: en route domestic and en route oceanic/remote.
6.
En Route Domestic
The phase of flight between departure and arrival terminal phases, with departure and arrival points
within the U.S. National Airspace System (NAS).
7.
En Route Oceanic and Remote

The phase of flight between the departure and arrival terminal phases, with an extended flight path over
an ocean.
34-61-14
Page C-13
May 10, 2007

8.
Flight Technical Error (FTE)

Navigation error introduced by the pilot's (or autopilot's) capability to utilize displayed guidance
information to track the desired flight path.
9.
Geometric Altitude
Altitude above the surface of the WGS-84 ellipsoid.
10. Geometric Dilution of Precision (GDOP)

A measure of the satellite geometric effects that degrade a user's position determination.
11. FMS/GPS Equipment Classes A(), B() and C()
FMS/GPS equipment is categorized into the following classes (ref. TSO-C129a), refer to Figure C-2:
CLASS
STANDALONE
A1
A2
MULTISENSOR
NMS
AUTOPILT RAIM *
RAIM
REQUIRED
EQUIVLNT
ENROUTE
TERMINAL
B1
B2
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
NONPREC.
APPROACH
* Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
NOTE:
For guidance on approval of Stand Alone FMS/GPS equipment (Class A), refer to FAA
Notice AC20-130. For guidance on approval of FMS/GPS equipment used in multi-sensor
Navigation Management Systems or Flight Management Systems (Class B and C), refer to
FAA Notice AC20-130.
Figure C-2 FMS/GPS TSO-C129a Equipment Classes and Applications
34-61-14
Page C-14
May 10, 2007

a.
Class A()
Equipment incorporating both the FMS/GPS sensor and navigation capability. This equipment
incorporates receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM). Class Al equipment includes en
route, terminal, and non-precision approach navigation capability. Class A2 equipment includes en
route and terminal navigation capability only.
b.
Class B()
Equipment consisting of a FMS/GPS sensor that provides data to an integrated navigation system
(e.g., flight management system, multi-sensor navigation system, etc.). Class B1 equipment
includes RAIM and provides en route, terminal, and-non-precision approach capability. Class B2
equipment includes RAlM and provides en route and terminal capability only. Class B3 equipment
requires the integrated navigation system to provide a level of FMS/GPS integrity equivalent to
RAIM and provides en route, terminal, and non-precision approach capability. Class B4 equipment
requires the integrated navigation system to provide a level of FMS/GPS integrity equivalent to
RAIM and provides en route and terminal capability only.
c.
Class C()
Equipment consisting of a FMS/GPS sensor that provides data to an integrated navigation system
(e.g., flight management system, multi-sensor navigation system, etc.), which provides enhanced
guidance to an autopilot or flight director in order to reduce flight technical error. Installation of
Class C() equipment is limited to aircraft approved under FAR Part 121 or equivalent criteria.
Class C l equipment includes RAIM and provides en route, terminal, and non-precision approach
capability. Class C2 equipment includes RAIM and provides en route and terminal capability only.
Class C3 equipment needs the integrated navigation system to provide a level of FMS/GPS
integrity equivalent to RAIM and provides en route, terminal, and non-precision approach
capability. Class C4 equipment requires the integrated navigation system to provide a level of
FMS/GPS integrity equivalent to RAIM and provides en route and terminal capability only.
12. Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)

A measure of the satellite geometric effects which degrade a user's horizontal position determination.
13. Integrity
The probability that the system will provide accurate navigation as specified or timely warnings to users
when FMS/GPS data should not be used for navigation.
14. Mask Angle
A fixed elevation angle referenced to the user's horizon below which FMS/GPS satellites are ignored by
the receiver software.
34-61-14
Page C-15
May 10, 2007

15. Non-Precision Approach Operations

Those flight phases conducted on charted Instrument Approach Procedures (IAP's) commencing at the
initial approach fix and concluding at the missed approach point or the missed approach holding fix, as
appropriate.
16. Pressure Altitude
Altitude in the earth's atmosphere above mean standard sea level pressure datum plane, measured by
a pressure (barometric) altimeter set to standard pressure (29.92 inches of mercury).
17. Pseudorange
The distance from the user to a satellite plus an unknown user clock offset distance. With four satellite
signals it is possible to compute position and offset distance.
18. Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)
A technique whereby a civil FMS/GPS receiver/processor determines the integrity of the FMS/GPS
navigation signals using only FMS/GPS signals or FMS/GPS signals augmented with altitude. This
determination is achieved by a consistency check among redundant pseudorange measurements. At
least one satellite in addition to those required for navigation must be in view for the receiver to perform
the RAIM function.
19. Stand-Alone FMS/GPS Navigation System
Stand-alone FMS/GPS equipment is equipment that is not combined with other navigation sensors or
navigation systems such as DME, Loran-C, Inertial, etc. Stand-alone FMS/GPS equipment can,
however, include other augmentation features such as aItimetry, smoothing, clock coasting, etc.
20. Supplemental Air Navigation System
An FAA approved navigation system that can be used for navigation provided an alternate navigation
system, which meets all of the regulatory requirements for the route of flight, is also installed on the
aircraft.
21. System Availability
The percentage of time (specified as 98 percent) that at least 21 of the 24 FMS/GPS satellites must be
operational and providing a usable navigation signal.
22. Terminal Area Operations
Those flight phases conducted on charted Standard Instrument Departures (SID's), on Standard
Terminal Arrivals (STAR's), or other flight operations between the last en route fix/waypoint and an
initial approach fix/waypoint.
23. Track Angle Error
Track angle error is the difference between the desired track and actual track (magnetic or true).
34-61-14
Page C-16
May 10, 2007
To order a Manual with the Binder:

929-600026-000
To order a Manual on CD:
929-600026-005

CMA9000 Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

CMA9000 Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

INSTALLATION/

FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

CMC Electronics Inc.

CMC Electronics Inc.

Publication No. 9000-GEN-0840

May 10, 2007

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

WE VALUE YOUR COMMENTS

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

CHANGE AND REASON

CMC Electronics Inc.

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

List of Effective Pages

Service Bulletin List

Description and Operation 1

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Description and Operation 40

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Flight Line Test/

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Data Loader Unit (DLU)

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

On receipt of revisions, insert pages and record

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

SERVICE BULLETIN LIST

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

"CAUTION-THIS EQUIPMENT CONTA I N S PA R T S S E N S I T I V E T O

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF STANDARD AND NONSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

Aircraft Autonomous Integrity

Binary Coded Decimal

Control Display Unit

Electronics Atttiude Display

Federal Aviation Authority

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF STANDARD AND NONSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS (contd)

Flight Management Computer

General Aviation Manufucturers

Joint Aeronautical Authority

One Engine Inoperative

Portable Data Loader

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

LIST OF STANDARD AND NONSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS (contd)

Source Data Information

TACtical Air Navigation system

Ultra High Frequency

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

INSTALLATION/FLIGHT LINE MANUAL